JP6877860B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Conventionally, a game called pachislot, which is provided with a plurality of reels having a plurality of symbols provided on their respective surfaces, a start switch, a stop switch, a stepping motor provided corresponding to each reel, and a control unit. The machine is known. The start switch detects that the start lever is operated by the player (hereinafter, also referred to as "start operation") after the game medium such as a medal or coin is inserted into the game machine, and the rotation of all reels is rotated. Output a signal requesting a start. The stop switch detects that the stop button provided corresponding to each reel is pressed by the player (hereinafter, also referred to as "stop operation"), and outputs a signal requesting that the rotation of the corresponding reel be stopped. To do. The stepping motor transmits its driving force to the corresponding reels. Further, the control unit controls the operation of the stepping motor based on the signals output by the start switch and the stop switch, and performs the rotation operation and the stop operation of each reel.

In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected, a lottery process using random numbers (hereinafter referred to as "internal lottery process") is performed on the program, and the result of the lottery (hereinafter, "internal winning combination") is performed. The rotation of the reel is stopped based on the timing of the stop operation. Then, when the rotation of all the reels is stopped and the combination of symbols related to the establishment of the winning is displayed, the player is given a privilege corresponding to the combination of the symbols. As an example of the privilege given to the player, the payout of the game medium (medals, etc.) and the operation of the re-game (hereinafter, also referred to as "replay") in which the internal lottery process is performed again without consuming the game medium. , The operation of a bonus game that increases the chances of paying out game media, etc. can be mentioned.

Further, conventionally, in a gaming machine having the above configuration, a gaming machine having an assist time (hereinafter referred to as “AT”) function, which is a function of navigating the formation of a specific small winning combination with a lamp or the like (see, for example, Patent Document 1). ) Is being developed. Further, in addition to the conventional AT function, a function in which a gaming state in which the winning probability of replay is higher than the normal time is activated when a specific symbol combination is displayed, that is, a function of replay time (hereinafter referred to as "RT") is provided. A game machine to be equipped is also being developed.

Patent Document 1 discloses a gaming machine having an AT function for notifying the pressing order of stop buttons. In the gaming machine of Patent Document 1, if the pressing order of the stop buttons is other than the predetermined pressing order (the order of the left stop button, the middle stop button, and the right stop button), the AT function is activated as a penalty. It is configured not to let you.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2013-236911

By the way, conventionally, for example, there has been a demand for a gaming machine capable of executing a rewriting display operation of an effect image with a simpler process and suppressing the occurrence of a defect during the rewriting display operation.

The present invention has been made to solve the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to enable the rewriting display operation of the effect image to be executed by a simpler process and to suppress the occurrence of a defect during the rewriting display operation. It is to provide a game machine capable of being able to do so.

In order to solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11 described later) capable of displaying game information by an image corresponding to the content of the effect, and
An effect control means that can determine the effect to be executed (for example, an effect content determination process described later),
An image display control means (for example, an animation task described later) that controls an image display operation of the display device based on the effect determined by the effect control means.
As the game information displayed by the display device, a game information determining means capable of determining the first game information (for example, the type of sushi material "squid" described later) (for example, at the time of victory of the kappa described later_at the start of the game). Processing S793) and
When a specific condition is satisfied, a change determining means (for example, S802 of the process at the time of winning the kappa_game starting, which will be described later) capable of determining the change of the first game information displayed on the display device.
When it is determined by the change determining means to change the first game information, the first game information is changed to the second game information (for example, the types of sushi material "egg" and "salmon roe" described later. , "Sea urchin" or "Ise lobster") and the game information changing means (for example, S805 of Kappa victory_game start processing described later).
During the execution of the effect, the effect control data (for example, the call sign data including the request for rewriting the sushi material symbol described later) that may include the change command request of the game information associated with the time information of the effect sequence of the effect being executed. ) Is provided with a change command information acquisition means (for example, S313 during the animation task management process described later).
When it is determined by the change determining means to change the first game information and the change command request is acquired by the change command information acquiring means, the image display control means is transmitted to the display device. It is possible to execute control to change the displayed image of the first game information to the image of the second game information and display it.
The degree of advantage suggested by the second game information is higher than the degree of advantage suggested by the first game information.
At the start of the display effect of the game information, both the first game information and the second game information can be displayed as the first game information, and the first game information is displayed as the first game information. A gaming machine characterized in that the ratio to be played is higher than the ratio at which the second game information is displayed as the first game information.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, for example, the rewriting display operation of the effect image can be executed by a simpler process, and the occurrence of a defect during the rewriting display operation can be suppressed.

It is a figure for demonstrating the functional flow of the gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the appearance structure of the gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of the gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of the gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the whole structure of the circuit provided in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the main control circuit in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the sub-control circuit in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a transition flow diagram of the RT gaming state of the gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol arrangement table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table (three pieces) for the general (RT0) gaming state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table (three pieces) for the game state between 2MB flags (RT1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table (three-sheet hanging) for 3MB flags (RT2) game state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table (two pieces) for the general (RT0) gaming state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table (two pieces) for the game state between 2MB flags (RT1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table (2 sheets hanging) for 3MB flag (RT2) game state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for 2MB gaming state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for 3MB gaming state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination determination table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination determination table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination determination table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal winning combination storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the display combination storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the carry-over combination storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the game state flag storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation stop button storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pressing order storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol code storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a correspondence table between the abbreviation of the internal winning combination used in the control of the sub CPU and the abbreviation of the internal winning combination used in the control of the main CPU. It is a figure which shows an example of the race runner MAP lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the race information MAP data table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the winning person lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the race win rate MAP lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the race win rate MAP data table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the race win rate MAP data table (percentage display) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the race result lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the post-AT race victory expectation data selection lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the race win rate data rewriting lottery (during penalty) table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo BB lottery (general middle) table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo BB lottery (during AT, preparing for AT, during a race) table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo BB precursor lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the cycle shortening lottery table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the cycle shortening lottery table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the direct addition lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the AT start game number lottery (at the time of female A victory) table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the AT start game number lottery (when Kappa wins) table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the AT start game number lottery (when Kappa wins) table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the AT start game number lottery (when a kappa wins) table (3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the AT start game number lottery (when Kappa wins) table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the Kawado sushi MAP data table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the kappa game number acquisition lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the Kawado sushi data conversion generation lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the kappa sushi data conversion lottery (first dish) table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the kappa sushi data conversion lottery (second dish) table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the kappa sushi data conversion lottery (third dish) table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the kappa sushi data conversion lottery (fourth dish) table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the kappa sushi data conversion lottery (fifth dish) table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the MAX bet button point off determination table in non-MB in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the MAX bet button point off determination table in MB in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a main flowchart which shows the processing example of the main control circuit of the gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the power-on processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the medal acceptance / start check process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of MAXBET input processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the internal lottery processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the reel stop initial setting process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the pull-in priority order storage process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the pull-in priority table selection process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the symbol code storage process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the reel stop control processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the priority pull-in control processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the bonus end check processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the bonus operation check processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the interrupt process controlled by the main CPU in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the power-on processing performed by the sub CPU in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the power failure detection processing performed by the sub CPU in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the lamp control task performed by the sub CPU in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the sound control task performed by the sub CPU in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the mother task performed by the sub CPU in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the main task performed by the sub CPU in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the random number update process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the random number acquisition processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the main board communication task performed by the sub CPU in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the animation task performed by the sub CPU in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the animation task management processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the periodic information display processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the command analysis processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the command sequence check processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the effect content determination process (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the effect content determination process (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of receiving the initialization command in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the race information lottery processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the processing at the time of receiving the medal insertion command in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of receiving a start command in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the variable setting process (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the variable setting process (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the general medium_variable setting process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the _ variable setting process in BB in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of AT preparation _ variable setting processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the _ variable setting process in AT in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the | variable setting process during a race in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the general termination_variable setting process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the general middle BB end _ variable setting process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the race end_variable setting process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the BB end in AT_variable setting process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the ball ejection state update process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the Bns state setting process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the BB winning _Bns state setting process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the | Bns state setting process between BB flags in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the BB operation waiting_Bns state setting process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the _Bns state setting process in BB in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the _Bns state setting process in JAC in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the _Bns state setting process in ChaBB in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the _Bns state setting process in ChaJAC in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the general middle _ game start processing (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the general middle _ game start processing (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the pseudo BB lottery processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the general middle BB_game start processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the BB rush determination process (at the time of starting a game) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the BBJAC transition determination processing (at the time of starting a game) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the BB counter management processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of a race_game start in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of AT preparation _ game start processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of a woman A victory_at the start of a game in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the processing at the time of Kappa victory_game start in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of AT_game start in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of BB_game start processing in AT in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the game state setting process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the general medium_game state setting process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the general medium BB_gaming state setting process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the game state setting process during a race in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of AT preparation _ game state setting process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the BB_gaming state setting process in AT in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the processing at the time of receiving a reel stop command in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the general middle penalty processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the penalty processing in BB in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of receiving a winning operation command in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the general middle BB_ prize-winning processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the BB rush determination process (at the time of winning) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the BBJAC transition determination process (at the time of winning) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of a race_winning in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of BB_ prize-winning processing in AT in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the processing at the time of receiving a payout end command in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the non-operation command reception processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of pressing the button during AT preparation in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the female A_AT start game number determination processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table at the time of a loss | loss in the race in the modification 1. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of the race | game start in the modification 1. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table at the time of a loss | loss in the race in the modification 2.

Hereinafter, a pachi-slot machine will be taken as an example of a gaming machine showing an embodiment of the present invention, and its configuration and operation will be described with reference to the drawings. In this embodiment, a pachi-slot machine having an AT function will be described.

<Function flow>
First, the functional flow of the pachislot machine will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachislot machine of the present embodiment, a medal is used as a game medium for playing a game. In addition to medals, coins, game balls, point data for games, tokens, and the like can also be applied as the game medium.

When a medal is inserted into the pachislot machine by the player and the start lever is operated, one value (hereinafter referred to as an internal lottery random number value) is extracted from random numbers in a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 65535). To.

The internal lottery means draws a lot based on the extracted random value for the internal lottery, and determines the internal winning combination. This internal lottery means is one of various processing means (processing functions) included in the main control circuit described later. By determining the internal winning combination, the combination of symbols that are allowed to be displayed along the valid line (winning determination line) described later is determined. The types of symbol combinations include those related to "winning" in which benefits such as medal payout, replay operation, bonus operation, etc. are given to the player, and other so-called "losses". Such things are provided.

Further, when the start lever is operated, a plurality of reels are rotated. After that, when the stop button corresponding to the predetermined reel is pressed by the player, the reel stop control means controls to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel based on the internal winning combination and the timing when the stop button is pressed. Do. This reel stop control means is one of various processing means (processing functions) included in the main control circuit described later.

In pachislot, basically, control is performed to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel within a specified time (190 msec or 75 msec) from the time when the stop button is pressed. In the present embodiment, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reel within this specified time is referred to as the "number of sliding pieces". In the present embodiment, when the specified period is 190 msec, the maximum number of sliding pieces (maximum number of sliding pieces) is set for four symbols, and when the specified period is 75 msec, the maximum number of sliding pieces is set. The number is set for one symbol.

When the internal winning combination that allows the combination display of the symbols related to the winning is determined, the reel stop control means usually sets the combination of the symbols along the effective line within the specified time of 190 msec (for 4 symbols). Stop the rotation of the reel so that it is displayed as much as possible. Further, the reel stop control means is, for example, 1 when the challenge bonus (hereinafter referred to as “CB”) and the “MB” (middle bonus) that continuously operate the “CB”, which are the second type special accessories, are operated. For one or more reels, the rotation of the reels is stopped so that the combination of the symbols is displayed as much as possible along the winning determination line within the specified time of 75 msec (for one symbol). Further, the reel stop control means uses various specified times corresponding to the gaming state to stop the rotation of the reel so that the combination of symbols whose display is not permitted by the internal winning combination is not displayed along the effective line. Let me.

In this way, when all the rotations of the plurality of reels are stopped, the winning determination means determines whether or not the combination of symbols displayed along the effective line is related to winning. This winning determination means is also one of various processing means (processing functions) included in the main control circuit described later. Then, when it is determined by the winning determination means that the combination of the displayed symbols is related to the winning, a privilege such as a medal payout is given to the player. In pachislot, the above series of flows is performed as one game (unit game).

Further, in pachislot, in the flow of the above-mentioned series of game operations, video display performed by a display device such as a liquid crystal display device, light output performed by various lamps, sound output performed by a speaker, or a combination thereof can be performed. Various productions are performed using it.

Specifically, when the start lever is operated, a random value for production (hereinafter referred to as a random value for production) is extracted in addition to the random value for internal lottery used for determining the internal winning combination described above. To. When the effect random value is extracted, the effect content determining means determines the effect to be executed this time from a plurality of types of effect contents associated with the internal winning combination by lottery. This effect content determining means is one of various processing means (processing functions) included in the sub-control circuit described later.

Next, when the effect content is determined by the effect content determining means, the effect execution means responds in conjunction with each opportunity such as when the reel starts rotating, when each reel stops rotating, and when it is determined whether or not there is a prize. To execute. In this way, in pachislot, for example, by executing the production content associated with the internal winning combination, the opportunity to know or anticipate the determined internal winning combination (in other words, the combination of symbols to be aimed at) is a game. It is provided to the player and can improve the interest of the player.

<Structure of pachislot>
Next, the structure of the pachislot machine in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 to 4. The pachislot machine of the present embodiment is functionally mainly composed of a main control unit that controls various movements related to the progress of the game and the various movements, a sub-control unit that directs the game, and a main control. It is composed of a gaming machine housing unit for mounting a unit and a sub-control unit. The main control unit includes a main control circuit (main control board) described later and various peripheral devices (various operation buttons, reel units, etc.) connected to the main control circuit (main control board). Further, the sub-control unit includes a sub-control circuit (sub-control board) described later and various peripheral devices (including various effect devices such as a liquid crystal display device, a speaker, and a lamp (LED)) controlled by the sub-control circuit (sub-control board). Hereinafter, the contents of each component will be described more specifically.

[Appearance structure]
FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the external structure of the pachislot machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 2, the pachislot machine 1 includes an exterior body 2. The exterior body 2 has a cabinet 2a for accommodating a reel, a circuit board, and the like, and a front door 2b that can be opened and closed with respect to the cabinet 2a. Handles 7 are provided on both side surfaces of the cabinet 2a (only one side handle 7 is shown in FIG. 2). The handle 7 is a recess in which the carrier's hand is placed when the pachi-slot machine 1 is transported.

Inside the cabinet 2a, three reels 3L, 3C, 3R (variation display device) are provided side by side. Hereinafter, each reel 3L, 3C, 3R will also be referred to as a left reel 3L, a middle reel 3C, and a right reel 3R, respectively. Each reel 3L, 3C, 3R (display row) has a reel body formed in a cylindrical shape and a translucent sheet material mounted on the peripheral surface of the reel body. On the surface of the sheet material, a plurality of (for example, 20) patterns are drawn at predetermined intervals along the circumferential direction.

An upper panel unit 10 and a liquid crystal display device 11 (display device, notification means) are provided above the center of the front door 2b. The upper panel unit 10 is provided in the upper end region of the front door 2b, and the liquid crystal display device 11 is arranged below the upper panel unit 10. The upper panel unit 10 has a light source, and performs an effect by the light emitted from the light source. In addition, the liquid crystal display device 11 executes an effect by displaying an image.

A pedestal portion 12 is provided at the center of the front door 2b. The pedestal portion 12 is provided with a frame member 13 and various devices to be operated by the player.

The frame member 13 has a symbol display area 4, an information display window 14, and a stop button mounting portion 15. As shown in FIG. 2, the symbol display area 4 and the information display window 14 are provided in the opening of the frame member 13, and the stop button mounting portion 15 is provided in the lower part of the opening of the frame member 13.

The symbol display area 4 is an area that overlaps the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R when viewed from the front (player side), and is arranged on the front side (player side) of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R. The symbol display area 4 functions as a display window, and has a configuration in which three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R arranged behind the display window (cabinet 2a side) can be seen through. Therefore, in the following, the symbol display area 4 is referred to as a reel display window 4.

The reel display window 4 is arranged continuously among a plurality of symbols provided on the peripheral surface of each reel when the rotation of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R provided behind the reel display window 4 is stopped. It is configured so that one symbol is displayed in the frame. That is, when the rotation of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is stopped, one symbol is set in each of the upper, middle, and lower regions for each reel in the frame of the reel display window 4 (three in total). ) Is displayed. Then, in the present embodiment, in the frame of the reel display window 4, a pseudo line (center line) connecting the middle stage region of the left reel 3L, the middle stage region of the middle reel 3C, and the middle stage region of the right reel 3R is formed. It is defined as an effective line (judgment line) for judging whether or not a prize has been won.

The information display window 14 is continuously provided at the lower part of the reel display window 4, and is arranged so that the surface direction of the information display surface faces upward. The information display window 14 and the reel display window 4 are covered with a transparent window cover 16. The window cover 16 is arranged on the inner surface side of the frame member 13, and has a structure that cannot be removed from the front side of the front door 2b.

Further, the frame member 13 has a sheet mounting portion 17 facing the information display surface of the information display window 14 with the window cover 16 interposed therebetween. Then, a seat member (information sheet) in which information about the game is described is arranged between the seat mounting portion 17 and the window cover 16. Therefore, the information sheet is covered with a window cover 16 having a smooth surface without irregularities or gaps, and the window cover 16 serves as a mounting portion for the information sheet.

As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the window cover 16 is not removable from the front side of the front door 2b and has a smooth surface without irregularities or gaps. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts that access the inside of the pachislot machine 1 via. The exchange of information sheets will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the present embodiment, as described above, an example in which the information display window 14 is continuously formed with the reel display window 4 at the opening of the frame member 13 has been described, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The information display window 14 may not be formed continuously with the reel display window 4. That is, the opening of the reel display window 4 and the opening of the information display window 14 may be arranged side by side in the vertical direction.

The stop button mounting portion 15 is composed of a flat plate member having a substantially trapezoidal surface shape. The stop button mounting portion 15 is provided below the information display window 14 and is provided so that a substantially trapezoidal surface faces the front (player side). On the substantially trapezoidal surface of the stop button mounting portion 15, three through holes through which the three stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R each pass are provided side by side.

The three stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R are provided corresponding to each of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and each stop button is provided to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel. These stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R are one of various devices to be operated by the player. In the following, the stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R are also referred to as a left stop button 19L, a middle stop button 19C, and a right stop button 19R, respectively.

In addition to the stop button, the pedestal portion 12 is provided with a medal insertion slot 20, a MAX bet button 21 (bet operation means), a 1-bet button 22, and a start lever 23 as various devices to be operated by the player. ..

The medal slot 20 is provided to receive medals dropped on the pachislot machine 1 from the outside by the player. The medals received from the medal slot 20 are used for one game up to a preset number of medals (for example, 3), and the amount exceeding the preset number of medals is deposited inside the pachislot machine 1. Can be done. That is, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a so-called credit function (game medium storage means).

The MAX bet button 21 and the 1-bet button 22 are provided to determine the number of medals to be used in one game from the medals deposited inside the pachi-slot machine 1. Further, the start lever 23 is provided to start the rotation of all the reels (3L, 3C, 3R).

Further, when viewed from the front, a 7-segment display 24 composed of a 7-segment LED (Light Emitting Diode) is provided on the left side of the reel display window 4 of the front door 2b. The 7-segment display 24 displays information such as the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a privilege (hereinafter referred to as the number of medals to be paid out), the number of medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1 (hereinafter referred to as the number of credits), and the like. Display digitally. Further, a selection button 25 (chance button) is provided on the right side of the reel display window 4 of the front door 2b. The selection button 25 is a button pressed by the player when a selection operation such as game playability is required. For example, in the AT start game number determination game when "Woman A" is won, which will be described later, the button is pressed when the player selects one of the two types of AT start game number determination modes (modes). The selection button 25 is connected to the sub-control board 72 described later, and the sub-control board 72 detects the pressing of the selection button 25 and controls the selection operation based on the detection.

Side panel units 26L and 26R are provided on both sides of the pedestal portion 12 of the front door 2b, respectively. Each side panel unit has a light source, and performs an effect by the light emitted from the light source. A settlement button 27 is provided below the left side panel unit 26L. The settlement button 27 is provided for pulling out (discharging) the medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1 to the outside.

A lumbar panel unit 31 is provided below the pedestal portion 12 of the front door 2b. The lumbar panel unit 31 has a decorative panel on which an arbitrary image is drawn, and a light source that emits light for illuminating the decorative panel from the back side.

Below the lumbar panel unit 31, a medal payout outlet 32, speaker holes 33L and 33R, and a medal tray unit 34 are provided. The medal payout outlet 32 guides the medal discharged by driving the hopper device 51 (medal payout device) described later to the outside. The medal tray unit 34 stores medals discharged from the medal payout outlet 32. The speaker holes 33L and 33R are provided to output sound effects, music, and the like corresponding to the content of the production.

[Internal structure]
Next, the internal structure of the pachislot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 and 4. 3 and 4 are diagrams showing the internal structure of the pachi-slot machine 1. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a state in which the front door 2b is opened and the middle door 41 provided on the back surface side of the front door 2b is closed with respect to the front door 2b. Further, FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a state in which the front door 2b is opened and the middle door 41 is opened with respect to the front door 2b.

The cabinet 2a is a box-shaped member, and has a top plate, a bottom plate, left and right side plates, and a back plate. For example, a cabinet-side speaker 42 for outputting a sound effect is provided on the upper side inside the cabinet 2a.

A cabinet-side relay board 44 is arranged on one side of the cabinet-side speaker 42 (left side in FIGS. 3 and 4). The cabinet-side relay board 44 includes a main control board 71 (see FIG. 5 described later) attached to the middle door 41 (see FIGS. 3 and 4), a hopper device 51, and a medal auxiliary storage switch 75 (described later). This is a relay board for electrically connecting the medal payout count switch (not shown) and the medal payout count switch (not shown).

An amplifier board 45 for controlling sound output by the cabinet-side speaker 42 is arranged in the central portion inside the cabinet 2a. Further, although not shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front (player side), the other side portion (right side in FIGS. 3 and 4) of the amplifier board 45 is the outside described later. A centralized terminal board 47 (see FIG. 5 described later) is arranged. The external centralized terminal plate 47 is provided to output signals such as a medal insertion signal, a medal payout signal, and a security signal to the outside of the pachislot machine 1.

A hopper device 51 (medal payout device), a medal auxiliary storage 52, and a power supply device 53 are arranged in the lower part of the inside of the cabinet 2a.

The hopper device 51 is attached to a substantially central portion of the bottom plate of the cabinet 2a. The hopper device 51 has a structure capable of accommodating a large number of medals and ejecting them one by one. The hopper device 51 pays out medals when the number of stored medals exceeds, for example, 50, or when the settlement button 27 is pressed to settle the medals. The medals paid out by the hopper device 51 are discharged from the medal payout outlet 32 (see FIG. 2).

The medal auxiliary storage 52 stores medals overflowing from the hopper device 51. The medal auxiliary storage 52 is arranged on the right side of the hopper device 51 when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front.

The power supply device 53 includes a power supply switch 53a and a power supply board 53b (see FIG. 5 described later). The power supply device 53 is arranged on the left side of the hopper device 51 when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front. The power supply device 53 converts the power of the AC voltage 100V into the power of the DC voltage required in each part, and supplies the converted power to each part.

As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the middle door 41 is arranged substantially in the center of the back surface of the front door 2b, and the reel display window 4 (see FIG. 4) is attached to the front door 2b so as to be openable and closable from the back side. Has been done.

As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the middle door 41 is attached with a main control board case 55 in which a main control board 71 (see FIG. 5 described later) is housed, and three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. Has been done. Further, although not shown, a stepping motor (variation display device) is connected to each of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R via a gear having a predetermined reduction ratio.

In the present embodiment, when the middle door 41 is opened with respect to the front door 2b, the back surface of the window cover 16 and the seat mounting portion 17 are exposed on the back surface of the front door 2b as shown in FIG. As described above, an information sheet on which information about the game is described is arranged between the back surface of the window cover 16 and the sheet mounting portion 17. This information sheet is inserted into the gap formed between the back surface of the window cover 16 and the seat mounting portion 17 in a state where the middle door 41 is opened to expose the back surface of the window cover 16 and the seat mounting portion 17. The window. Also, when exchanging the information sheet, the information sheet is exchanged after the middle door 41 is opened.

Although not shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the main control board case 55 is provided with a setting key type switch 56 (see FIG. 5 described later) described later. The setting key type switch 56 is used when changing the setting of the pachi-slot 1 or confirming the setting of the pachi-slot 1. In the present embodiment, the main control board unit is configured by the main control board case 55 and the main control board 71 housed in the main control board case 55.

The main control board 71 housed in the main control board case 55 has a main control circuit 91 (see FIG. 6 described later) described later. The main control circuit 91 is a circuit that controls the main flow of the game in the pachislot machine 1, such as determining the internal winning combination, rotating and stopping the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, and determining whether or not there is a prize. The specific configuration of the main control circuit 91 will be described in detail later with reference to the drawings.

A sub-control board case 57 in which a sub-control board 72 (see FIG. 5 to be described later), which will be described later, is housed is arranged above the middle door 41 of the front door 2b. The sub-control board 72 housed in the sub-control board case 57 has a sub-control circuit 101 (see FIG. 7 described later). The sub-control circuit 101 (sub-control means) receives the command data transmitted from the main control circuit 91, and based on the received command data, determines the production of the game by displaying an image or the like, and also determines the production of the game. It is a circuit that controls the operation of the determined effect. The specific configuration of the sub-control circuit 101 will be described in detail later with reference to the drawings.

Although not shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, when the front door 2b is viewed from the back surface side, the sub-relay board 61 (see FIG. 5 described later) described later is arranged on the right side of the sub-control board case 57. The sub-relay board 61 is a board that relays the connection wiring between the sub-control board 72 and the main control board 71. Further, the sub-relay board 61 is a relay board that electrically connects the sub-control board 72 and the boards provided around the sub-control board 72. Examples of the substrate arranged around the sub-control substrate 72 include LED substrates 62A and 62B, which will be described later.

Although not shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the LED substrates 62A and 62B are provided above the sub-control substrate case 57 when viewed from the back surface side of the front door 2b. The LED substrates 62A and 62B are variously included in the LED (Light Emitting Diode) group 85 (see FIG. 5 described later) according to the effect executed by the control of the sub-control circuit 101 (see FIG. 7 described later). The LED is turned on and off to display the blinking pattern. Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a plurality of LED substrates in addition to the LED substrates 62A and 62B. For example, although not shown, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment includes an LED (light emitting means) for turning on and off the MAX bet button 21 and an LED substrate for controlling the operation of the LED. The LED for turning on and off the MAX bet button 21 may be included in the LED group 85. In this case, the operation of the LED is controlled by the LED substrates 62A and 62B.

Further, although not shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, a 24h door open / close monitoring unit 63 described later is arranged below the sub-relay board 61 (see FIG. 5 described later). The 24h door open / close monitoring unit 63 stores the open / close history information of the middle door 41. Further, the 24h door open / close monitoring unit 63 outputs a signal for displaying an error by the liquid crystal display device 11 to the sub control board 72 (sub control circuit 101) when the middle door 41 is opened.

Below the middle door 41, lower speakers 65L and 65R are arranged as shown in FIGS. 3 and 4. The lower speakers 65L and 65R are arranged on the back surface of the front door 2b at positions facing the speaker holes 33L and 33R (see FIG. 2), respectively.

Further, above the lower speaker 65L of the front door 2b, a selector 66 and a door open / close monitoring switch 67 described later (see FIG. 5 described later) are arranged. The selector 66 is a device for selecting whether or not the material and shape of the medal are appropriate, and guides the appropriate medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 20 to the hopper device 51. Although not shown, a medal sensor (insertion operation detecting means) for detecting that an appropriate medal has passed is provided on the path through which the medal passes in the selector 66.

Although not shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the door open / close monitoring switch 67 is arranged on the left side of the selector 66 when the front door 2b is viewed from the back surface side. The door opening / closing monitoring switch 67 outputs a security signal for notifying the opening / closing of the front door 2b to the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1.

Further, as shown in FIG. 4, a door relay terminal plate 68 is provided in a region below the reel display window 4 and in a region opened and closed by the middle door 41. The door relay terminal board 68 is a board that relays the connection wiring between the main control board 71 in the main control board case 55 and various buttons and switches, the sub control board 72, the selector 66, and the game operation display board 81. Yes (see FIG. 5 below). Examples of the various buttons and switches include the MAX bet button 21, the 1-bet button 22, the settlement button 27, the door open / close monitoring switch 67, the BET switch 77 described later, the start switch 79, and the like.

<Control system provided by pachislot>
Next, the control system included in the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a circuit block diagram showing the configuration of the control system of the pachislot machine 1.

The pachi-slot machine 1 has a main control board 71 provided on the middle door 41 and a sub control board 72 provided on the front door 2b. Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a reel relay terminal board 74, a setting key type switch 56, a cabinet-side relay board 44, and a power supply device 53 connected to the main control board 71. Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 has an external centralized terminal board 47, a hopper device 51, and a medal auxiliary storage switch 75 connected to the main control board 71 via a cabinet-side relay board 44. Since the configurations of the external centralized terminal plate 47 and the hopper device 51 have been described above, their description will be omitted here.

The reel relay terminal plate 74 is arranged inside the reel main body of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The reel relay terminal plate 74 is electrically connected to a stepping motor (not shown) of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R, and relays a signal output from the main control board 71 to the stepping motor.

The medal auxiliary storage switch 75 is provided in the medal auxiliary storage 52, and detects whether or not the medal auxiliary storage 52 is full of medals.

The power supply device 53 includes a power supply board 53b connected to the main control board 71 and a power supply switch 53a connected to the power supply board 53b. The power switch 53a is pressed when supplying the necessary power to the pachi-slot machine 1.

Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a selector 66, a door open / close monitoring switch 67, and a BET switch 77 (bet detecting means) connected to the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal plate 68 and the door relay terminal plate 68. , Settlement switch 78, start switch 79, stop switch board 80, game operation display board 81, and sub-relay board 61. Since the selector 66, the door open / close monitoring switch 67, and the sub-relay board 61 have been described above, their description will be omitted here.

The BET switch 77 detects that the MAX bet button 21 or the 1-bet button 22 has been pressed by the player. The checkout switch 78 detects that the checkout button 27 has been pressed by the player. The start switch 79 (start operation detecting means) detects that the start lever 23 has been operated by the player (start operation).

The stop switch board 80 (stop operation detecting means) includes a circuit for stopping a rotating reel and a circuit for displaying a stoptable reel by an LED or the like. Further, the stop switch board 80 is provided with a stop switch. The stop switch detects that each of the stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R is pressed by the player (stop operation).

The game operation display board 81 is connected to the 7-segment display 24 and is inserted when accepting the insertion of medals, when the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are rotatable, and when replaying the game. This is a substrate for displaying the number of medals on the 7-segment display 24. Further, an LED 82 is connected to the game operation display board 81, and the LED 82 lights a mark indicating the start of the game, a mark for replaying the game, or the like based on a signal input from the game operation display board 81, for example. ..

The sub-control board 72 is connected to the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal board 68 and the sub-relay board 61. Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a sound I / O board 84, LED boards 62A and 62B, and a 24h door open / close monitoring unit 63 connected to the sub-control board 72 via the sub-relay board 61. Since the LED substrates 62A and 62B and the 24h door open / close monitoring unit 63 have been described above, their description will be omitted here.

The sound I / O board 84 outputs sound to a speaker group including lower speakers 65L and 65R and various speakers (not shown).

Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a ROM cartridge board 86 (second storage means) and a liquid crystal relay board 87 connected to the sub-control board 72. The ROM cartridge board 86 and the liquid crystal relay board 87 are housed in the sub-control board case 57 together with the sub-control board 72.

The ROM cartridge substrate 86 is a substrate for managing image (video), audio, light (LED group 85), and communication data for production. The liquid crystal relay board 87 is a board that relays the connection wiring between the sub-control board 72 and the liquid crystal display device 11.

<Main control circuit>
Next, the configuration of the main control circuit 91 mounted on the main control board 71 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the main control circuit 91 of the pachislot machine 1.

The main control circuit 91 is mainly composed of a microcomputer 92 mounted on the main control board 71. The microcomputer 92 includes a main CPU 93, a main ROM 94, and a main RAM 95.

The main ROM 94 stores a control program executed by the main CPU 93, a data table, data for transmitting various control commands (commands) to the sub control circuit 101, and the like. The main RAM 95 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by executing a control program.

A clock pulse generation circuit 96, a frequency divider 97, a random number generator 98, and a sampling circuit 99 are connected to the main CPU 93. The clock pulse generation circuit 96 and the frequency divider 97 generate a clock pulse. The main CPU 93 executes a control program based on the generated clock pulse. The random number generator 98 generates random numbers in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535). The sampling circuit 99 extracts one value from the generated random numbers.

The main CPU 93 counts the number of times a pulse is output to the stepping motor of each reel after detecting the reel index. As a result, the main CPU 93 manages the rotation angle of each reel (mainly, how many symbols the reel has rotated). The reel index is information indicating that the reel has made one revolution. This reel index includes, for example, an optical sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and a detection piece provided at a predetermined position on each reel and interposed between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit due to rotation of each reel. It is detected by the reel position detection unit (not shown).

Here, the management of the rotation angle of each reel will be specifically described. The number of pulses output to the stepping motor is counted by a pulse counter provided in the main RAM 95. Then, each time the output of a predetermined number of pulses required for the rotation of one symbol is counted by the pulse counter, the symbol counter provided in the main RAM 95 is added one by one. The symbol counter is provided according to each reel. The value of the symbol counter is cleared when the reel index is detected by the reel position detection unit (not shown).

That is, in the present embodiment, by managing the symbol counter, it is possible to manage how many symbols have been rotated since the reel index was detected. Therefore, the position of each symbol on each reel is detected with reference to the position where the reel index is detected.

<Sub-control circuit>
Next, the configuration of the sub-control circuit 101 mounted on the sub-control board 72 will be described with reference to FIG. 7. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the sub-control circuit 101 of the pachi-slot machine 1.

The sub-control circuit 101 is electrically connected to the main control circuit 91, and performs processing such as determination and execution of the effect content based on the command transmitted from the main control circuit 91. The sub-control circuit 101 basically includes a sub CPU 102, a sub RAM (DRAM: Dynamic RAM) 103 (first storage means), a rendering processor 104, a drawing RAM 105, a driver 106, an SRAM (Static RAM) 107, and an RTC (Real). Time Clock) 108 is included.

The sub CPU 102 controls the output of video, sound, and light according to the control program stored in the ROM cartridge board 86 in response to the command transmitted from the main control circuit 91. The ROM cartridge board 86 is basically composed of a program storage area and a data storage area.

The control program executed by the sub CPU 102 is stored in the program storage area. For example, the control program includes a main board communication task for controlling communication with the main control circuit 91, and an effect registration task for extracting an effect random value and determining and registering the effect content (effect data). Contains various programs to execute. Further, the control program includes a drawing control task (animation task) that controls the display of an image by the liquid crystal display device 11 based on the determined effect content, a lamp control task that controls the output of light from a light source such as the LED group 85, and the like. Various programs for executing a sound control task or the like for controlling the sound output by the speakers 65L and 65R are also included.

The data storage area includes a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing effect data constituting each effect content, and a storage area for storing animation data related to video creation. The data storage area also includes a storage area for storing sound data related to BGM and sound effects, a storage area for storing lamp data related to a pattern of turning on and off light, and the like.

The sub-RAM 103 is provided with a storage area for registering the determined effect content and effect data, and a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination transmitted from the main control circuit 91.

The sub CPU 102, the rendering processor 104, the drawing RAM (including the frame buffer) 105, and the driver 106 create an image according to the animation data specified by the effect content, and display the created image on the liquid crystal display device 11.

Further, the sub CPU 102 causes the speaker group such as the speakers 65L and 65R to output the sound such as BGM according to the sound data specified by the effect content. Further, the sub CPU 102 controls the lighting and extinguishing of the LED group 85 according to the lamp data specified by the effect content.

The SRAM 107 is a storage device that is used as a backup RAM and backs up predetermined data in the sub RAM 103. The RTC 108 is a date and time timing circuit.

<Transition flow of RT game state>
Next, with reference to FIG. 8, various RT gaming states controlled by the main control circuit 91 (main CPU 93) of the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment and their transition flows will be described.

In the present embodiment, as RT game states, three types of states, RT0 game state and RT2 game state, in which the types of internal winning combinations related to replay and the winning probabilities thereof are different from each other are provided. The RT0 gaming state is a gaming state in which the winning probability of the internal winning combination related to the replay is low, and the winning probability of the internal winning combination related to the replay is high in both the RT1 gaming state and the RT2 gaming state. It is a game state.

The RT0 game state is the RT game state set in the initial state, and the number of medals inserted (multiplied number) for each unit game is 2 (first number) or 3 (second number). It is in a state. In the RT0 gaming state, information is notified to the effect that the player is instructed to multiply the number of medals by two (the suggestion of multiplying two medals is made).

Then, in the RT0 gaming state, when the middle bonus (special internal winning combination) of the name "2MB" described later, which is internally won (established) only during the two-card game, is won, as shown in FIG. 8, the RT gaming state. Shifts from the RT0 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state. Further, in the RT0 game state, when the middle bonus of the name "3MB" described later, which is internally won (established) only when playing three cards, is won, as shown in FIG. 8, the RT game state is changed from the RT0 game state to RT2. It shifts to the game state.

In the RT1 game state, the number of medals inserted (number of medals) for each unit game is 2 or 3, but information is notified that the player is instructed to multiply the number of medals by 3. (Suggestion of 3 medals is made), so the game of 3 medals is mainly performed. In this case, the bonus of "2MB" won when the RT game state shifts to the RT1 game state is a bonus that is won only when the number of medals multiplied is 2, so in the RT1 game state, "2MB" The game is played with the bonus carried over. Therefore, in the following, the RT1 game state is also referred to as a "2MB flag state". In addition, in the game in the state between the 2MB flags, even if the "loss" is internally won, the "2MB" will not win. The game operation in the state between the 2MB flags is controlled by the main control circuit 91. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 also serves as a means (predetermined game control means) for controlling the game operation in the state between the 2MB flags (predetermined game state).

However, in the RT1 game state, when a two-card game is played and a bonus of "2MB" is won, the corresponding bonus game is activated. In the "2MB" bonus game, a two-card game is played, and when the number of medals paid out exceeds two, the "2MB" bonus game ends. Then, when the "2MB" bonus game is exhausted, the RT gaming state shifts from the RT1 gaming state to the RT0 gaming state, as shown in FIG.

In the RT2 game state, the number of medals inserted (number of medals) for each unit game is 2 or 3, but since the suggestion of 3 medals is given, the game of 3 medals is mainly performed.

In the RT2 game state, when a three-card game is played and a "3MB" bonus is won, the corresponding bonus game is activated. In the "3MB" bonus game, a two-card game is played, and when the number of medals paid out exceeds 30, the "3MB" bonus game ends. Then, when the "3MB" bonus game is exhausted, the RT gaming state shifts from the RT2 gaming state to the RT0 gaming state, as shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, in the RT2 gaming state, it is possible to play the game in a state where the bonus of "3MB" won when the RT gaming state shifts to the RT2 gaming state is carried over. The RT2 game state is also referred to as a "3MB flag state".

In the present embodiment, the total number of medals stored in the credit and the current number of inserted medals is 3 (predetermined) in the state between 2MB flags (RT1 gaming state) or the state between 3MB flags (RT2 gaming state). If the number of medals is less than the maximum number of medals, even if the player presses the MAX bet button 21, the medal betting operation (insertion operation) cannot be performed. That is, in the state between 2MB flags or the state between 3MB flags, when the total number of medals stored in the credit and the current number of inserted medals is 2 or less, the player presses the MAX bet button 21. Even if it is pressed, the operation is treated as invalid.

If the total number of medals credited and inserted is two in the state between the 2MB flags, and the player's MAX bet operation is enabled, a two-card game is played and is being carried over. There is a possibility that "2MB" will win a prize. In this case, since the RT gaming state shifts from the RT1 gaming state to the RT0 gaming state, the gaming state shifts to a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player. However, as in the present embodiment, when the total number of medals credited and inserted is 2 or less in the state between the 2MB flags, the player's MAX betting operation is invalidated, so that the player's MAX betting operation is disabled. It is possible to prevent the gaming state from shifting to a disadvantageous gaming state unintentionally.

In the present embodiment, when the total number of medals credited and inserted is less than 3 not only in the 2MB flag state and the 3MB flag state but also in the general gaming state (RT0 gaming state). , The player's MAX betting operation may be disabled.

<Structure of data table stored in main ROM>
Next, the configurations of various data tables stored in the main ROM 94 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 23.

[Design arrangement table]
First, the symbol arrangement table will be described with reference to FIG. The symbol arrangement table is data that specifies the position of each symbol in each rotation direction of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, and the type of the symbol arranged at each position (hereinafter, symbol code (in FIG. 9). (Refer to the symbol code table of)) and stipulate the correspondence with.

In the symbol arrangement table, when the reel index is detected, the position of the symbol located in the middle region of each reel in the frame of the reel display window 4 is defined as "0". Then, in each reel, in the order of proceeding in the reel rotation direction (direction from the symbol position "19" in FIG. 9 toward the symbol position "0") with the symbol position "0" as a reference, " "0" to "19" are assigned to each symbol as the symbol position.

That is, by referring to the values of the symbol counters (“0” to “19”) and the symbol arrangement table, they are displayed in the upper region, the middle region, and the lower region of each reel in the frame of the reel display window 4. It is possible to specify the type of symbol. For example, when the value of the symbol counter corresponding to the left reel 3L is "7", the symbol position "8" is set in the upper region, the middle region, and the lower region of the left reel 3L in the frame of the left display window 4L, respectively. The symbol "yellow BAR", the symbol "watermelon 1" at the symbol position "7", and the symbol "orange" at the symbol position "6" are displayed.

[Design combination table]
Next, the symbol combination table (Nos. 1 to 3) will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 12. The symbol combination table is a combination of symbols (combination and combination name) predetermined according to the type of privilege (bonus, small combination, replay), and the contents (storage area, data) and payout of the corresponding display combination code. Define the correspondence with the number of sheets.

In the present embodiment, a prize is won when the combination of symbols displayed by the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R along the effective line (center line) matches the symbol combination specified in the symbol combination table. Is determined. Then, when it is determined that the prize is won, the player is given benefits such as payout of medals, operation of replay (replay), and operation of bonus. If the combination of symbols displayed along the effective line does not match any of the symbol combinations specified in the symbol combination table, a so-called "loss" occurs. That is, in the present embodiment, the symbol combination of "loss" is specified by not specifying the symbol combination corresponding to "loss" in the symbol combination table. The present invention is not limited to this, and the item of "missing" may be provided in the symbol combination table to directly specify the "missing" symbol combination.

The various data described in the display combination code column in the symbol combination table are data for identifying the symbol combination displayed along the valid line. The "data" in the display combination code column is represented by 1-byte data, and a unique combination of symbols (contents of the display combination) is assigned to each bit in the data.

Further, the data of the "storage area" in the display combination code column is data for designating the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 30 described later) in which the data of the corresponding symbol combination is stored. In this embodiment, 15 symbol code storage areas are provided. Then, in the present embodiment, the display combinations having the same bit pattern (1 byte data pattern) and different contents are managed as different display combinations due to the difference in the "storage area".

The numerical value described in the payout number column in the symbol combination table represents the number of medals to be paid out to the player. In the symbol combination in which a numerical value of 1 or more is given as the data of the "number of payouts", the same number of medals as the numerical value is paid out. For example, in the present embodiment, when the display combination related to the combination name "CT bell" is determined for the number of inserted three medals (the symbol combination related to "CT bell" is stopped and displayed on the effective line. In the case of), 10 medals will be paid out.

Further, in the present embodiment, for example, when the display combination related to the combination name "CT lip" is determined (when the symbol combination related to "CT lip" is stopped and displayed on the effective line), the replay is activated. To do. Further, in the present embodiment, for example, when the display combination related to the combination name "3MB" or "2MB" (when the symbol combination related to "3MB" or "2MB" is stopped and displayed on the valid line) is determined. , MB (middle bonus) works.

As shown in FIG. 10, in the present embodiment, "0" is specified in the "three-sheet hanging" column of "3MB", but a number is not specified in the "two-sheet hanging" column. .. Further, although "0" is specified in the "2 sheets" column of "2MB", a number is not specified in the "3 sheets" column. That is, in the present embodiment, the symbol combination (display combination) of "3MB" is valid (winning) only when three cards are hung, and invalid (missing) when two cards are hung. In addition, the symbol combination (display combination) of "2MB" is valid (winning) only when two cards are hung, and invalid (missing) when three cards are hung.

[Internal lottery table]
Next, the internal lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 20. In the present embodiment, an internal lottery table is separately provided in each of the RT0 gaming state (general gaming state), the RT1 gaming state (2MB flag-to-2MB flag state), the RT2 gaming state (3MB-flag-to-3MB flag state), and the MB gaming state. Further, in each of the RT0 game state (general game state), the RT1 game state (2MB flag state), and the RT2 game state (3MB flag state), the number of medals multiplied (2 or 3) is internally reduced. A lottery table will be provided.

Each internal lottery table has a winning number (internal winning combination), a lottery value when each winning number is determined (winning probability), and a data pointer (small winning combination / small winning combination) acquired when each winning number is determined. The correspondence with the replay data pointer and bonus data pointer) is specified. For convenience of explanation, the abbreviation of the internal winning combination is also described in the internal lottery table referred to when the number of medals multiplied is three, which is shown in FIGS. 13 to 15. Further, in the internal lottery table referred to when the number of medals multiplied is two and the internal lottery table referred to during the MB game state shown in FIGS. 16 to 20, in order to simplify the explanation, the internal winning combination is used. The description of the name and data pointer is omitted.

In addition, the lottery value is defined for each setting (settings 1 to 6) for adjusting the expected value of the internal winning such as a preset bonus or small winning combination. This setting is changed using, for example, a reset switch (not shown) and a setting key switch (not shown).

In the internal lottery process of the present embodiment, first, a random number value (external random number value) for internal lottery extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (for example, 0 to 65535) is defined corresponding to each winning number. The lottery value is subtracted sequentially. Next, it is determined (internal lottery) whether or not the result of subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the result of the subtraction becomes negative (“digits” occur) at the predetermined winning number, it means that the winning number (internal winning combination) has been won.

Therefore, in the internal lottery process of the present embodiment, the higher the winning number defined as the lottery value, the higher the probability that the assigned data pointer will be determined. The winning probability of each winning number can be expressed by "the lottery value specified for each winning number / the number of all random number values that may be extracted (random number denominator: 65536)".

(1) General (RT0) Internal lottery table for game status (3 sheets)
FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a configuration of an internal lottery table (three-sheet hanging) for a general (RT0) gaming state. This internal lottery table for the general (RT0) gaming state (three-card hanging) is referred to when the number of medals hung for the unit game is three in the general gaming state (RT0 gaming state). The general (RT0) game state internal lottery table (3 sheets) defines the relationship between the winning numbers "1" to "58" (various internal winning combinations), the corresponding lottery value (winning probability), and the data pointer. To do.

For example, in the general game state (RT0 game state), when the setting 1 of the internal lottery table (3 sheets) for the general (RT0) game state is referred to, the winning number "2" (internal winning combination "2MB") is the winning. The probability of doing so is "0". On the other hand, in the general game state (RT0 game state), when the setting 1 of the internal lottery table (3 sheets) for the general (RT0) game state is referred to, the winning number "3" (internal winning combination "3MB") is the winning. The probability of doing so is "17200/65536 (1 / 3.8)". Then, in this case, "0" is acquired as the small winning combination / replay data pointer, and "2" is acquired as the bonus data pointer. That is, in the present embodiment, when a three-card game is played in the general game state (RT0 game state), only "3 MB" is won as a bonus.

Further, for example, in the general game state (RT0 game state), when the setting 1 of the internal lottery table (3 sheets) for the general (RT0) game state is referred to, the winning number "4" (internal winning combination "normal lip 1") is referred to. The probability of winning ") is" 374/65536 (1 / 175.2) ". Then, in this case, "1" is acquired as the small winning combination / replay data pointer, and "0" is acquired as the bonus data pointer.

(2) Between 2MB flags (RT1) Internal lottery table for game status (3 sheets)
FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a configuration of an internal lottery table (for 3 sheets) for a game state between 2MB flags (RT1). The internal lottery table for the 2MB flag (RT1) game state (3 cards) is referred to when the number of medals for the unit game is 3 in the 2MB flag state (RT1 game state). The relationship between the winning numbers "1" to "58" (various internal winning combinations), the corresponding lottery value (winning probability), and the data pointer in the internal lottery table for the game state (RT1) between the 2MB flags (RT1). To specify.

For example, in the 2MB flag state (RT1 game state), when the setting 1 of the internal lottery table (3 sheets) for the 2MB flag (RT1) game state is referred to, the winning number "2" (internal winning combination "2MB") is referred to. ) Or the winning number "3" (internal winning combination "3MB") has a winning probability of "0". That is, in the present embodiment, when the game is played with three cards in the state between the 2MB flags (RT1 game state), the bonuses of "2MB" and "3MB" are not won.

Further, for example, when the setting 1 of the internal lottery table (3 sheets) for the 2MB flag (RT1) game state is referred to in the 2MB flag state (RT1 game state), the winning number "4" (internal winning combination "" The probability of winning the normal lip 1 ") is" 2048/65536 (1/32) ". Then, in this case, "1" is acquired as the small winning combination / replay data pointer, and "0" is acquired as the bonus data pointer.

It should be noted that the winning probabilities of the winning numbers "4" to "16" of the general (RT0) gaming state internal lottery table (3 sheets) shown in FIG. 13 and the 2MB flag (RT1) gaming state internal shown in FIG. As is clear from comparison with those of the lottery table (3 sheets), the winning probability of the replay combination in the 2MB flag state (RT1 game state) is higher than that in the general game state (RT0 game state).

(3) Between 3MB flags (RT2) Internal lottery table for game status (3 sheets)
FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a configuration of an internal lottery table (for 3 sheets) for a game state between 3MB flags (RT2). This internal lottery table for 3MB flag-to-game state (RT2 game state) is referred to when the number of medals to be hung for a unit game is 3 in the 3MB flag-to-game state (RT2 game state). The relationship between the winning numbers "1" to "58" (various internal winning combinations), the corresponding lottery value (winning probability), and the data pointer in the internal lottery table for the game state (RT2) between the 3MB flags (RT2). To specify.

For example, in the 3MB flag state (RT2 game state), when the setting 1 of the internal lottery table (3 sheets) for the 3MB flag (RT2) game state is referred to, the winning number "2" (internal winning combination "2MB") is referred to. ) Or the winning number "3" (internal winning combination "3MB") has a winning probability of "0". That is, in the present embodiment, when the game is played with three cards in the state between the 3MB flags (RT2 game state), the bonuses of "2MB" and "3MB" are not won.

Further, for example, when the setting 1 of the internal lottery table (3 sheets) for the 3MB flag (RT2) game state is referred to in the 3MB flag state (RT2 game state), the winning number "4" (internal winning combination "" The probability of winning the normal lip 1 ") is" 500/65536 (1/131) ". Then, in this case, "1" is acquired as the small winning combination / replay data pointer, and "0" is acquired as the bonus data pointer.

It should be noted that the winning probabilities of the winning numbers "4" to "16" of the general (RT0) gaming state internal lottery table (3 sheets) shown in FIG. 13 and the 3MB flag (RT2) gaming state internal shown in FIG. As is clear from comparison with those of the lottery table (3 sheets), the winning probability of the replay combination in the 3MB flag state (RT2 game state) is higher than that in the general game state (RT0 game state). Further, the winning probabilities of the winning numbers "4" to "16" of the internal lottery table (3 sheets) for the 2MB flag (RT1) gaming state shown in FIG. 14 and the 3MB flag (RT2) gaming state shown in FIG. As is clear from comparison with those of the internal lottery table (3 sheets), the winning probability of the replay role in the 3MB flag state (RT2 game state) is lower than that in the 2MB flag state (RT1 game state). Become.

(4) General (RT0) Internal lottery table for game status (2 sheets)
FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a configuration of an internal lottery table (for two sheets) for a general (RT0) gaming state. This internal lottery table for the general (RT0) gaming state (two medals) is referred to when the number of medals hung for the unit game is two in the general gaming state (RT0 gaming state). The general (RT0) gaming state internal lottery table (two-ply) defines the relationship between the winning numbers "1" to "5" (various internal winning combinations) and the corresponding lottery value (winning probability). The internal winning combination of the name "two bells" in FIG. 16 corresponds to all small combinations.

For example, in the general gaming state (RT0 gaming state), when the setting 1 of the internal lottery table for the general (RT0) gaming state (hanging two sheets) is referred to, the winning number "2" (internal winning combination "2MB") is the winning. The probability of doing so is "26000/65536 (1 / 2.52)". On the other hand, in the general gaming state (RT0 gaming state), when the setting 1 of the internal lottery table for the general (RT0) gaming state (hanging two cards) is referred to, the winning number "3" (internal winning combination "3MB") is the winning. The probability of doing so is "0". That is, in the present embodiment, when a two-card game is played in the general game state (RT0 game state), only "2 MB" is won as a bonus.

Further, for example, in the general gaming state (RT0 gaming state), when the setting 1 of the internal lottery table for the general (RT0) gaming state (hanging two sheets) is referred to, the winning number "4" (internal winning combination "normal lip 1") is referred to. The probability of winning ") is" 8978/65536 (1 / 7.3) ".

(5) Between 2MB flags (RT1) Internal lottery table for game status (2 sheets)
FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a configuration of an internal lottery table (for two sheets) for a game state between 2MB flags (RT1). The internal lottery table for the 2MB flag-to-game state (RT1) game state (two-card hanging) is referred to when the number of medals to be hung for the unit game is two in the two-MB flag-to-game state (RT1 game state). The internal lottery table for the 2MB flag (RT1) game state (two pieces) defines the relationship between the winning numbers "1" to "5" (various internal winning combinations) and the corresponding lottery value (winning probability). .. In addition, for example, the name "2MB + 2 bells" in FIG. 17 corresponds to the case where the internal winning combination of the name "2 bells" (all small roles) wins while the "2MB" is carried over.

For example, in the 2MB flag state (RT1 game state), when the setting 1 of the internal lottery table (2 sheets) for the 2MB flag (RT1) game state is referred to, the winning number "2" (internal winning combination "2MB") is referred to. ) Or the winning number "3" (internal winning combination "3MB") has a winning probability of "0". That is, in the present embodiment, when the game is played with two cards in the state between the 2MB flags (RT1 game state), the bonuses of "2MB" and "3MB" are not won.

Further, for example, when the setting 1 of the internal lottery table (for two sheets) for the 2MB flag (RT1) game state is referred to in the 2MB flag state (RT1 game state), the winning number "4" (internal winning combination "" The probability of winning 2MB + normal lip 1 ”) is“ 32978/65536 (1 / 1.99) ”.

It should be noted that the winning probability of the winning number "4" of the general (RT0) gaming state internal lottery table (2 sheets) shown in FIG. 16 and the 2MB flag (RT1) gaming state internal lottery table (2) shown in FIG. As is clear from a comparison with that of the two-card game, the winning probability of the replay role in the 2MB flag state (RT1 game state) is higher than that of the general game state (RT0 game state). Become.

(6) Between 3MB flags (RT2) Internal lottery table for game status (2 sheets)
FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a configuration of an internal lottery table (for two sheets) for a game state between 3MB flags (RT2). The internal lottery table for the 3MB flag-to-game state (RT2 game state) is referred to when the number of medals to be hung for the unit game is two in the 3MB flag-to-game state (RT2 game state). The internal lottery table for the 3MB flag (RT2) game state (two pieces) defines the relationship between the winning numbers "1" to "5" (various internal winning combinations) and the corresponding lottery value (winning probability). .. In addition, for example, the name "3MB + 2 bells" in FIG. 18 corresponds to the case where the internal winning combination of the name "2 bells" (all small roles) wins while the "3MB" is carried over.

For example, in the 3MB flag state (RT2 game state), when the setting 1 of the internal lottery table (2 sheets) for the 3MB flag (RT2) game state is referred to, the winning number "2" (internal winning combination "2MB") is referred to. ) Or the winning number "3" (internal winning combination "3MB") has a winning probability of "0". That is, in the present embodiment, when the game is played with two cards in the state between the 3MB flags (RT2 game state), the bonuses of "2MB" and "3MB" are not won.

Further, for example, in the state between 3MB flags (RT2 gaming state), when the setting 1 of the internal lottery table (hanging 2 sheets) for the game state between 3MB flags (RT2) is referred to, the winning number "4" (internal winning combination " The probability of winning 3MB + normal lip 1 ") is" 8980/65536 (1 / 7.3) ".

It should be noted that the winning probability of the winning number "4" of the general (RT0) gaming state internal lottery table (2 sheets) shown in FIG. 16 and the 3MB flag-to-3MB flag (RT2) gaming state internal lottery table (2) shown in FIG. As is clear from a comparison with that of the two-card game, the winning probability of the replay role in the 3MB flag state (RT2 game state) is higher than that of the general game state (RT0 game state). Become. Further, the winning probability of the winning number "4" of the internal lottery table for the game state (RT1) between the 2MB flags shown in FIG. 17 and the internal lottery table for the game state between the 3MB flags (RT2) shown in FIG. As is clear from the comparison with that of (2 cards), the winning probability of the replay role in the 3MB flag state (RT2 game state) is the 2MB flag state (RT1 game state) even in the 2-card game. It will be lower than that.

(7) Internal lottery table for 2MB gaming state FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a configuration of an internal lottery table for 2MB gaming state. This 2MB game state internal lottery table is referred to when the middle bonus "2MB" is activated (when the game state is the 2MB game state). The internal lottery table for the 2MB gaming state defines the relationship between the winning numbers "1" and "2" and the corresponding lottery value (winning probability).

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 19, when the gaming state is the 2MB gaming state, the internal winning combination of the name "CB combination" is always won. The internal winning role of the name "CB role" corresponds to all small roles.

(8) Internal lottery table for 3MB gaming state FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a configuration of an internal lottery table for 3MB gaming state. This internal lottery table for the 3MB gaming state is referred to when the middle bonus "3MB" is activated (when the gaming state is the 3MB gaming state). The internal lottery table for the 3MB gaming state defines the relationship between the winning numbers "1" and "2" and the corresponding lottery value (winning probability).

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 20, when the gaming state is the 3MB gaming state, the internal winning combination of the name “CB combination” is always won.

[Design combination determination table]
Next, the symbol combination determination table will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 23. The symbol combination determination table defines the correspondence between the internal winning combination and the symbol combination (combination) that can be displayed on the effective line (center line). Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the internal winning combination is determined, the type of symbol combination that can be displayed on the effective line based on the symbol combination determination table, that is, the type of display combination that can be won is uniquely determined. Will be done. The black circles in each symbol combination determination table indicate the symbol combinations (combinations) that can be displayed on the effective line (center line) in the winning internal winning combination.

For example, when the internal winning combination is "normal lip 1", the names "CT lip", "CU lip", "bell lip 1" to "bell lip 8", "BTBAR1" to "BTBAR6", "CTSVN1", The symbol combination of "CTSVN2", "CDSVN2" and "CDSVN3" can be stopped and displayed. Further, for example, when the internal winning combination is "213 bell 1", the symbol combination of the names "CT bell" and "control combination 1" to "control combination 10" can be stopped and displayed. Further, for example, when the internal winning combination is the combination of the name "CB combination", the symbol combinations of all the small combinations can be stopped and displayed.

It should be noted that the symbol combination determination table does not specify the case where the "internal winning combination" is "lost", but this is all the symbols defined by the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. 10 to 12. Indicates that the display of combinations is not allowed.

<Structure of storage area provided in main RAM>
Next, the configurations of various storage areas provided in the main RAM 95 will be described with reference to FIGS. 24 to 30. Although description is omitted here, storage areas for various control data, various flags, various counters, etc. used in various reel effects (various game locks) are also provided in the main RAM 95.

[Internal winning combination storage area]
First, the configuration of the internal winning combination storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 24. In the present embodiment, the internal winning combination storage area is composed of the internal winning combination storage areas 0 to 7 represented by 1 byte of data, respectively.

When "1" is stored in a predetermined bit in each of the internal winning combination storage areas 0 to 7, it indicates that the internal winning combination corresponding to the predetermined bit has won the internal winning combination. The internal winning combination storage area shown in FIG. 24 does not specify a storage area corresponding to the internal winning combination of the names "two bells" and "CB combination", but when these internal winning combinations are won. In, "1" is stored in the storage area (bit) of all the internal winning combinations related to the small winning combination.

[Display combination storage area]
Next, the configuration of the display combination storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 25. In the present embodiment, each display combination storage area is composed of display combination storage areas 0 to 7 represented by 1 byte of data.

When "1" is stored in a predetermined bit in each of the display combination storage areas 0 to 7, it indicates that various symbol combinations of the internal winning combination corresponding to the predetermined bit are displayed on the valid line. ..

[Carryover storage area]
Next, the configuration of the carry-over combination storage area will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, the carry-over combination storage area is composed of a 1-byte data storage area.

As a result of the internal lottery, when either "2MB" or "3MB" is determined as the internal winning combination, the internal winning combination is stored in the carry-over combination storage area as the carry-over combination. The carry-over combination stored in the carry-over combination storage area is retained without being cleared until the corresponding symbol combination is displayed on the valid line. Further, while the carry-over combination is stored in the carry-over combination storage area, the carry-over combination is stored in the internal winning combination storage area in addition to the internal winning combination determined by the internal lottery.

[Game status flag storage area]
Next, the configuration of the game state flag storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 27. The game state flag storage area is composed of a 1-byte data storage area. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 27, a unique bonus type or RT type is assigned to each bit in the game state flag storage area.

When "1" is stored in a predetermined bit in the game state flag storage area, it indicates that the bonus game or RT corresponding to the predetermined bit is being operated. For example, when "1" is stored in bit 0 of the game state flag storage area, the middle bonus "2MB" is being operated, indicating that the game state is the 2MB game state.

[Operation stop button storage area]
Next, the configuration of the operation stop button storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 28. The operation stop button storage area is composed of a 1-byte data storage area, and stores an operation stop button flag consisting of 1 byte. In the operation stop button flag, the operation state of the stop button is assigned to each bit.

For example, when the left stop button 19L is the stop button pressed this time, that is, the operation stop button, "1" is stored in bit 0 of the operation stop button storage area. Further, for example, when the left stop button 19L is a stop button that has not yet been pressed, that is, an effective stop button, "1" is stored in bit 4. The main CPU 93 distinguishes between the stop button pressed this time and the stop button that has not yet been pressed, based on the data stored in the operation stop button storage area.

[Press order storage area]
Next, the configuration of the pressing order storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 29. The press order storage area is composed of a 1-byte data storage area, and stores a press order flag consisting of 1 byte.

In the pressing order flag, each bit is assigned the type of pressing order of the stop button. For example, when the pressing order of the stop button is "left middle right", "1" is stored in bit 0 of the pressing order storage area.

[Design code storage area]
Next, the configuration of the symbol code storage area will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, each of the symbol code storage areas is composed of symbol code storage areas 0 to 14 represented by 1 byte of data.

In the symbol code storage area, "1" is stored in the bit corresponding to the display combination (symbol combination) that can be stopped on the effective line. After all the reels are stopped, the symbol code corresponding to the display combination is stored in the symbol code storage areas 0 to 14.

<Various sub-game states>
Next, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, various sub-gaming states related to the effect controlled by the sub-control circuit 101 (sub-CPU 102) in the 2MB flag-to-2MB flag state (RT1 gaming state) will be described.

In the present embodiment, as sub-game states during the 2MB flag state, mainly states called "non-AT state", "AT preparation state", "AT state" and "pseudo BB (big bonus) state" are provided. Be done. The game in the "pseudo BB state" is performed as an interrupt process when the pseudo BB lottery performed in the "non-AT state", "AT preparation state", and "AT state" is won.

Further, in the present embodiment, although detailed description is omitted, as a sub-game state in the state between 2MB flags, a state called "W chance state" that can be shifted from "AT state", "AT state" or "AT state" or ". A state called "additional challenge state" that can be transferred from "pseudo BB state" is also provided. Hereinafter, the contents of each sub-game state will be specifically described.

As described below, the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a predetermined privilege (shortening the cycle of the non-AT state or adding the number of AT games) at the time of winning the "loss" in various sub-game states during the state between the 2MB flags. ) Is provided. Then, this privilege giving function is controlled by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a means for determining whether or not to grant a predetermined privilege at the time of winning the "loss" (privilege grant determining means).

[Non-AT state]
The non-AT state is composed of a "normal state" and a "transition effect state" to the AT state. Then, in the non-AT state, basically, the games in the normal state and the transition effect state are periodically repeated with a predetermined unit number of games (190 games in the present embodiment).

Specifically, in a non-AT one-cycle game, first, a game in a normal state (hereinafter referred to as a "normal game") in which the number of games in one set is 180 games (the number of first unit games) is performed. It is said. Next, after the normal game is digested, a game in the transition effect state (hereinafter referred to as “transition effect game”) is performed for a period of 10 games.

Then, at the start of the transition effect game, an AT lottery is performed, and if the lottery result is an AT win, an effect corresponding to the AT win is performed during the transition effect game, and then the sub game state is the AT preparation state. Move to. On the other hand, if the result of the AT lottery is AT non-winning, the production corresponding to AT non-winning is performed during the transition production game period, and then the next set of normal games (games in the non-AT state of the next cycle) are performed. To be started.

As described above, when the result of the AT lottery in the transition effect game is non-winning, the normal game and the transition effect game are periodically repeated in a predetermined number of games (190 games). Then, in this periodic game digestion process, basically, after the normal game is digested (after 180 games are digested), a chance to shift to the AT state is always given. That is, in the non-AT state, a chance to shift to the AT state is given periodically. Hereinafter, the contents of the normal game and the transition effect game will be described in more detail.

(1) Normal game In the normal game, the winning / non-winning lottery of the game in the pseudo BB state (hereinafter referred to as "pseudo BB game") based on the internal winning combination for each game (for each unit game) (hereinafter, """Pseudo BB lottery") is performed.

Then, in the normal game, when the pseudo BB lottery is won, the pseudo BB game is started as an interrupt process. During the period of the pseudo BB game, the number of games of the normal game is not counted (subtracted). Then, when the pseudo BB game is digested, the sub-game state returns to the normal state. At this time, the normal game is restarted from the state before the start of the pseudo BB game.

In addition, in a normal game, a "loss" or a specific internal winning combination (in this embodiment, any one of "normal lip", "weak che", "strong che", and "rare role") is internally won once. In this case or in the case of continuous winning, a subtraction lottery for the number of remaining games in the normal game of the current set, that is, a lottery for shortening the game period in the non-AT state of the current cycle (hereinafter, referred to as "cycle shortening lottery") is performed. Therefore, if the cycle shortening lottery is won in the normal game, the period until the transition effect game is started in the non-AT state game period of the current cycle is shortened. That is, there is a possibility that the period until the start of the game in the AT state will be shorter.

In the present embodiment, when the cycle shortening lottery is won in the normal game during the period in which the number of remaining games of the normal game of the current set is a predetermined number of games (predetermined number of unit games: 10 games in the present embodiment). Is the number of winning shortened games (subtraction number) subtracted from the number of remaining games of the normal game of the current set. At this time, if the subtraction result is less than the predetermined number of games (10 games) (the subtraction result may be a negative value), the absolute value of the number of games of the subtraction result is a shortened game of the surplus in the current set. It is stocked as a number (surplus unit number of games). On the other hand, if the cycle shortening lottery is won in the normal game during the period when the remaining number of normal games in the current set is less than the predetermined number of games (10 games), the number of shortened games won is the number of surplus shortened games. Stocked as.

For example, if the predetermined number of games is 10 games, the remaining number of normal games in the current set is 30 games, and the number of winning shortened games is 50 games, the subtraction result is -20 games. Therefore, the number of games stocked as the number of shortened games for the surplus is 20 games. At this time, the standard of the number of shortened games stocked as the surplus is set to the predetermined number of games (10 games), and the difference between the value of the predetermined number of games (10) and the value of the subtraction result (-20) is supported. The number of games to be played (30 games) may be the number of shortened games for the surplus. Further, for example, when the predetermined number of games is 10 games, the number of remaining games of the normal game of the current set is 5 games, and the number of winning shortened games is 50 games, the number of shortened games for the surplus is set. The number of games stocked will be 50 games.

Then, the number of shortened games of the stocked surplus is applied at the start of the non-AT state game of the next cycle, that is, at the start of the normal game of the next set, and at that time, the game period of the normal state (non-AT state). Is shortened. In this case, in the non-AT state game period of the next cycle, the period until the transition effect game is started is shortened. That is, when a surplus number of shortened games is generated as a result of the cycle shortening lottery, there is a possibility that the period until the start of the game in the AT state will be shorter even in the next cycle. Further, for example, depending on the number of shortened games (the number of stocked shortened games) obtained by the cycle shortening lottery, there is a possibility that the transition effect game is started from the beginning in the non-AT state game period of the next cycle.

(2) Transition effect state In the transition effect game, the effect (notification) game indicating the result (win / non-win) of the AT lottery performed at the start of the game period is a specific number of games (third unit number of games: book). In the embodiment, it is played over 10 games). In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the transition effect game, an effect (race effect) in which a plurality of ally characters and an enemy character race is performed as an effect showing the result of the AT lottery. The race effect is mainly performed by displaying the race image on the liquid crystal display device 11. Here, the content of the race effect (transition effect to the AT state) performed in the transition effect game will be described more specifically.

Specifically, first, at the start of the race production (transition production game), a lottery (race result lottery) is performed to determine whether or not a predetermined ally character set as a race victory target (candidate) in advance wins the race. Do. Then, in this race result lottery, if the race victory of the predetermined ally character is won, the AT is won, and if the race victory of the predetermined ally character is non-winning, the AT is not won.

In addition, at the start of the race production (transition production game), a plurality of ally characters including a predetermined ally character set as a race victory target (candidate) and an enemy character are displayed on the liquid crystal display as race participants. It is displayed in 11. Then, during the subsequent game period of the race effect, the liquid crystal display device 11 performs an image effect in which the predetermined ally character wins the race at the time of AT winning, and an image effect in which the enemy character wins the race at the time of AT non-winning. This is done by the liquid crystal display device 11.

Therefore, as a result of the race production performed in the transition production game, if a predetermined ally character wins, the sub-game state shifts from the transition production state to the AT preparation state, and if the enemy character wins, the next set ( The normal game (game in the non-AT state) of the next cycle) is started. In the present embodiment, the number of basic stay games in the AT state to be played after that changes depending on the type of the ally character who won the race, and this point will be described in detail later.

Further, in the present embodiment, six types of ally characters are provided: "male A", "male B", "female A", "kappa", "tengu", and "male A / male B". Information on the type of ally character who is the target (candidate) for winning the race in the race production of the transition production game and the content of the race production regarding the race win rate of the ally character is the race in the non-AT state game of the current cycle. When the information related to the content of the production is not set (when the race runner MAP described later is not set (initial state) or when the race information MAP data described later is "0"), the non-AT state of the current cycle It is determined by lottery at the start of the game (at the start of the game period of the normal game). Further, at this time, in the present embodiment, not only the information on the content of the race effect of the current set (first race) but also the information on the content of the race effect up to the fourth set ahead (fifth game) is determined.

Further, in the transition effect game, a pseudo BB lottery is performed every game based on the internal winning combination. Then, in the transition effect game, when the pseudo BB lottery is won, the pseudo BB game is started as an interrupt process, and when the pseudo BB game is digested, the sub game state shifts to the AT preparation state.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a specific condition is satisfied during the game period (during the race effect period) in the transition effect state (when the pseudo BB state becomes "between BB flags" or "waiting for BB operation": described later. (Refer to FIG. 124), an additional lottery for the number of AT games is performed, and when the lottery is won, a predetermined number of additional AT games is obtained.

The operation control of the above-mentioned normal game and transition effect game is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a means for controlling the operation of the normal game and the transition effect game (normal game control means and the transition effect game control means).

[AT ready state]
In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the sub-game state shifts from the transition effect state to the AT state, the sub-game state shifts to the AT state via the AT preparation state. In the AT preparation state, a game (hereinafter, referred to as “AT start game number determination game”) for determining the number of basic stay games in the AT state (hereinafter, referred to as “AT start game number”) is performed. In the AT start game number determination game (notified game number determination game), a pseudo BB lottery is also performed for each game based on the internal winning combination.

In the present embodiment, the number of AT start games (the number of basic unit games) is the type of ally character (“male A”, “male B”, “female A”, “kappa”, etc. It changes according to "tengu" or "male A / male B"). Specifically, it is as follows.

(1) When "Man A" wins When "Man A" wins in the race production, the AT start game is based on the internal winning role, triggered by the lever operation performed in the game start game to determine the number of AT start games. A number of lottery is performed, and a predetermined number of AT start games (50 to 300 games) is determined.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of AT start games may not be determined in the start game of the AT start game number determination game when "Man A" wins. In this case, the AT start game number determination game is continued. When the lever is operated in the next game, the number of AT start games is drawn again. At this time, the number of times the AT start game number determination game is continued (once or twice in this embodiment) changes according to the internal winning combination determined in the AT start game number determination game start game. Then, in the game for determining the number of AT start games when "Man A" wins, a lottery table (not shown) for the number of AT start games is appropriately set so that the number of AT start games to be acquired increases as the number of continuations increases. ing.

(2) When "Man B" wins If "Man B" wins in the race production, the number of AT start games will be drawn by the lever operation performed in the game start game. We, the predetermined number of AT start games (50 to 300 games) is determined. In the game of determining the number of AT start games when "Man B" wins, the number of AT start games is determined in one game. The lottery value of the number of AT start games used in the lottery for determining the number of AT start games when "Man B" wins is the same regardless of the internal winning combination.

(3) When "Woman A" wins When "Woman A" wins in the race production, the number of AT start games is determined by the continuous hitting operation of the MAX bet button 21. In the AT start game number determination game when "Woman A" wins in this embodiment, two types of AT start game number determination modes (determination modes) are prepared.

Specifically, a first mode in which 50 AT start games are added by one MAX bet operation, and a second mode in which 5 AT start games are added by one MAX bet operation. Is prepared. In both modes, a continuous lottery for adding the number of AT start games is performed for each MAX bet operation. In the first mode, the continuation probability is 50%, and in the second mode, the continuation probability is 95%. Become. The determination form (determination mode) of the number of AT start games is selected by the player at the start of the AT start game number determination game (game in the AT ready state).

In the game for determining the number of AT start games when "Woman A" wins, first, at the end of the next game (after all reels are stopped) after the liquid crystal display device 11 notifies the victory of "Woman A", the AT start game Information indicating that the number determination mode (determination mode) is to be selected is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. Next, by operating the player's selection button 25, one of the first mode and the second mode is selected as the AT start game number determination mode. Next, when the lever operation of the next game of the game in which the selection operation of the AT start game number determination mode is performed is performed, the AT start game number determination mode (first mode or second mode) selected by the player is performed. Mode) is confirmed (determined). Then, in the game in which the determination operation of the determination mode of the number of AT start games is performed, after the reels are completely stopped, the number of AT start games is added by the continuous operation of the MAX bet button 21. That is, the AT start game number determination game when the "woman A" wins is performed over two games after the liquid crystal display device 11 notifies the victory of the "woman A".

Then, in the game for determining the number of AT start games when "Woman A" wins, a predetermined number is determined for each MAX bet operation until the result of the continuous lottery of the addition process of the number of AT start games performed for each MAX bet operation becomes non-winning. The number of AT games (50 games or 5 games) is added to the number of AT start games. It should be noted that the number of AT start games is added only at the time of the MAX bet operation when the continuous lottery of the AT start game number addition process is won. Therefore, for example, in the AT start game number determination game when "Woman A" wins, the first mode is selected, and the result of the continuous lottery of the AT start game number addition process in the sixth MAX bet operation. If is not won, the number of AT start games will be 250 games.

In addition, when the first mode is selected, if the result of the continuous lottery of the addition process of the number of AT start games is unwinned in the first MAX bet operation, the number of AT start games is reduced to 50 games. Set. That is, when the first mode is selected, the number of AT start games of 50 games is guaranteed. Further, when the second mode is selected, the number of additional games for each MAX bet operation is small, so that the MAX bet operation for a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 games) is guaranteed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the game for determining the number of AT start games when "Woman A" wins, the number of AT start games is determined by the continuous hit operation (continuous hit lottery) of the MAX bet button 21. However, due to an erroneous operation of the player, for example, the pressing operation of the MAX bet button 21 is not executed at all, or the player presses the MAX bet button 21 in the middle of the continuous lottery (before the continuous lottery becomes non-winning). In some cases, the operation may be stopped. In this case, the number of AT start games is undecided.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the above situation occurs, an additional loop lottery for the number of AT start games is performed by internal processing when the start lever of the next game (AT game start game) of the AT start game number determination game is operated. Is automatically performed to determine the number of AT start games when "Woman A" wins.

By providing such a recovery function for the additional lottery process for the number of AT start games, the AT game can be played before the additional lottery for the number of AT start games using the MAX bet button 21 is completed due to, for example, an erroneous operation by the player. Even if it is started, the profit of the AT game that should be obtained when "Woman A" wins is guaranteed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being uncomfortable and to motivate the player to continue the game.

(4) When "Tengu" wins When "Tengu" wins in the race production, the lever operation performed in the start game of the AT start game number determination game is used as an opportunity, as in the case of "Man B" victory. The number of AT start games is drawn, and a predetermined number of AT start games is determined. Also in this case, the number of AT start games is determined by one game.

However, in the game for determining the number of AT start games when the "tengu" wins, the number of AT start games of 100 games or more is determined, unlike when the "man B" wins (the number of AT start games of 50 or more games is determined).

(5) When "Kappa" wins If "Kappa" wins in the race production, the video production of "Kappa" eating sushi (hereinafter referred to as "Kappa sushi production") will be performed in the AT start game number determination game. It is displayed by the liquid crystal display device 11 over a plurality of games. In this Kappa sushi production, the number of AT start games is added each time "Kappa" eats sushi, and the number of added games (additional unit number of games) is the sushi material (game information) eaten by "Kappa". It changes accordingly.

The types of sushi ingredients eaten by "kappa" in this embodiment are "squid", "tamago", "kappa roll", "salmon", "salmon roe", "tuna", "sea urchin" and "spiny lobster". Eight types are available. The higher the quality of the sushi material, the greater the number of additional games.

Here, the content of the AT start game number determination game (directed by Kappa sushi) at the time of winning "Kappa" will be described more concretely. First, when the AT start game number determination game is started, the appearance pattern of the sushi material from the 1st game to the 10th game (1st to 10th plates) is determined by lottery, and the determined 1st plate. Images of sushi ingredients up to the 10th plate (hereinafter referred to as "sushi ingredients symbol") are sequentially displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11.

After that, the effect of eating or not eating sushi of the sushi material in which "Kappa" is sequentially displayed is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 for each game, and when the effect of "Kappa" eating the sushi material is executed, The number of additional games is acquired. For example, as shown in the kappa game number acquisition lottery table of FIG. 54 described later, when "kappa" eats the sushi material "squid", 10 or 300 games are added to the number of AT start games depending on the lottery result. Is obtained as. Further, for example, when "Kappa" eats the sushi material "Ise lobster", 100, 150, 200 or 300 games are acquired as the number of additional games depending on the lottery result. Then, the total number of additional games corresponding to all the sushi ingredients eaten by "Kappa" by the end of the AT start game number determination game is set as the AT start game number.

In the above-mentioned kappa sushi production, whether or not to eat the sushi material with "kappa" is determined based on the type of internal winning role. Specifically, when the internal winning role is the "group 1 role" (for example, "213 bell 1" to "213 bell 8", etc.) described later, the "kappa" eats sushi material, and other than this. In the case of the internal winning role, "Kappa" does not eat sushi. That is, during the period of the game for determining the number of AT start games when the "Kappa" wins, the number of AT start games is added for each game in which the internal winning combination becomes the "group 1 combination" described later.

Further, in the present embodiment, every time "Kappa" eats sushi material in the Kappa sushi production, the sushi material symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 is reduced. However, when the sushi material symbol to be displayed at the 5th game destination (6th plate) is not displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11, that is, when the sushi material after the 6th game (6th plate) is not determined. At this point, the sushi ingredients from the 6th game (6th dish) onward are determined by lottery.

In addition, the end trigger of the AT start game number determination game at the time of "Kappa" victory is managed by the "Kappa end counter", and the value (end parameter) of the Kappa end counter becomes less than "0" (predetermined condition). In that case, the AT start game number determination game at the time of "Kappa" victory ends. In this embodiment, the initial value of the kappa end counter is set to "5".

The value of the kappa end counter is subtracted by "1" when "kappa" eats a specific sushi ingredient (sushi ingredient with wasabi), specifically "squid", "salmon" or "tuna". Will be done. That is, in the current game, the data of any sushi material of "squid", "salmon" and "tuna" is set as the sushi material to be eaten by "kappa", and the internal winning role is the "group" described later. In the case of "1 role", the number of additional games corresponding to the sushi material is acquired, but the value of the kappa end counter is subtracted by "1".

Further, in the present embodiment, when the "kappa" eats a predetermined sushi material, specifically, the "kappa roll", the value of the kappa end counter is added by "1". However, in this case, the number of additional games is not acquired. That is, in the current game, if the data of the sushi material of "Kappa roll" is set as the sushi material to be eaten by "Kappa" and the internal winning role is "Group 1 role" described later, it is added. Although the number of games cannot be obtained, the value of the kappa end counter is added by "1", and the period of the AT start game number determination game is extended.

In the present embodiment, when the value of the Kappa end counter becomes less than "0" in the game for determining the number of AT start games when "Kappa" is won, the player repeatedly hits the MAX bet button 21 to obtain "Kappa". A lottery will be held to revive the game that determines the number of AT start games when "Kappa" wins. Specifically, a revival lottery is performed by continuously pressing the MAX bet button 21 20 times. At this time, since the revival lottery is performed every time the MAX bet button 21 is pressed, the revival lottery is performed 20 times. Then, when the revival lottery by continuously pressing the MAX bet button 21 is won, the AT start game number determination game at the time of winning the "Kappa" is started again, and the number of AT start games can be further increased.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the game for determining the number of AT start games when the "Kappa" wins, the internal winning role is a specific role other than the "Group 1 role" described later ("Loss", "Reach eye lip", "Weak". If it is one of "Che", "Strong Che", "Watermelon", "Chance A", "Chance B" and "Definite role"), 5 games (2nd to 6th dishes) from the next game A lottery (data conversion generation lottery) is performed as to whether or not to perform data conversion of the sushi material (see FIG. 55 described later). Then, when the data conversion generation lottery of this sushi material is won, in the present embodiment, the number of added games associated with the converted sushi material (second additional game number information) is the sushi material before conversion (the second added game number information). The sushi material data is converted so that the value is equal to or greater than the number of added games associated with the first added game number information) (see FIGS. 56 to 60 described later).

When data conversion of a plurality of (5 games) of sushi material after the next game is performed, a plurality of sushi material symbols (first additional game number information) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 after the next game are displayed. The image) is also rewritten at the same time. This sushi material symbol rewriting display operation is a call sign data (sushi material symbol rewriting instruction) associated (linked) with a predetermined image frame (time frame) in the production sequence data (video data) of the Kappa sushi production. It is done based on the request). Specifically, if the sushi material data conversion generation lottery is won and the call sign data including the sushi material symbol rewriting instruction request is detected during the reproduction of the production sequence data of the Kawado sushi production, the call sign data is detected. The rewriting display data of a plurality of sushi material symbols (image of the second added game number information) is acquired at the timing, and the rewriting display of the plurality of sushi material symbols after the next game is performed.

When such a sushi material symbol rewriting display method is used, the timing of the sushi material symbol rewriting display operation is directly registered in the effect sequence data. Therefore, in this case, since special processing for synchronizing / adjusting the rewriting display operation on the program is not required, the rewriting display operation can be executed by a simpler process and the design can be easily changed. Moreover, it is possible to construct a program in which problems are unlikely to occur.

(6) When "Man A / Man B" wins In the game of determining the number of AT start games when "Man A / Man B" wins in the race production, first, in the first game, the number of AT start games is added as the number of games. 10 games will be won. After that, the number of additional games that can be acquired for each game (every continuation) increases by "10" until the tenth game. That is, in the 1st game, the 2nd game, the 3rd game, ..., the 9th game, and the 10th game, the number of additional games that can be acquired is 10, 20, 30, ..., 90, 100 games, respectively. Further, the number of additional games that can be acquired after the 11th game is 100 games for each game.

Therefore, for example, in the AT start game number determination game at the time of "male A / male B" victory, if the game is continued until the tenth game, 550 games are acquired as the number of AT start games. Further, if the game is continued after the 11th game, the number of AT start games is increased by 100 games for each game (the number of AT start games is 650 games, 750 games, ...).

In addition, the continuation probability of each game of the AT start game number determination game at the time of "male A / male B" victory is 80%, and when this continuous lottery is not won, "male A / male B" wins. At the time of AT start The game for determining the number of games ends.

Further, in the AT start game number determination game when the "male A / male B" of the present embodiment is won, the continuation confirmation until the second game is guaranteed. However, if the continuous lottery is not won in the second game, the number of AT start games is 30 games. In this case, the number of AT start games is set to 50 games. That is, in the game for determining the number of AT start games when "male A / male B" wins, the acquisition of the number of AT start games of 50 games is guaranteed at a minimum.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of AT start games that can be obtained when "Tengu", "Kappa", or "Man A / Man B" wins in the race production of the transition production game is "Man A". , "Man B" or "Woman A" is set to be more than that when winning. Therefore, if the runners displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 at the start of the race production of the transition production game include "tengu", "kappa", or "male A / male B", more ATs will start. It is possible to expect the player to acquire the number of games.

The operation control of the various AT start game number determination games described above is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a means for controlling the operation of the AT start game number determination game (notification number determination game control means).

[AT state]
The number of AT start games is determined in the AT-prepared game (AT start game number determination game), and when the AT-prepared game ends, the specific number of games (second unit game number: AT start game number + additional AT game) A game in the AT state (hereinafter referred to as "AT game") in which the push order of the small winning combination is notified over the number) is started.

In the AT game (notification game), a pseudo BB lottery is performed every game based on the internal winning combination, and when the pseudo BB lottery is won, the pseudo BB game is started as an interrupt process, and the pseudo BB game is digested. Then, the sub-game state returns to the AT state. At this time, the number of AT games (the number of AT games) is not counted (subtracted) during the interrupt period of the pseudo BB game.

Further, in the AT game, an additional lottery for the number of AT games is performed based on each game, the type of the internal winning combination, and the winning history of the internal winning combination. Specifically, in the present embodiment, in the AT game, when the "loss", "reach eye lip" or "rare role" is internally won once, or when the "loss" or "normal lip" is continuously won. In some cases, an additional lottery is performed for the number of AT games. Then, when the additional lottery of the number of AT games is won, the number of additional AT games (0 to 300 games) corresponding to the winning result is added to the number of AT games currently remaining (the number of remaining AT games).

Further, in the AT game, a predetermined symbol combination (in this embodiment, "black BAR"-"black BAR"-"black BAR" or "black cherry"-"black BAR"-"black BAR") is on the effective line. When the stop display is displayed, the sub-game state shifts to the "W chance state". Then, after the game in the "W chance state" is digested, the AT game is restarted. The number of AT games is not counted (subtracted) during the game period of the "W chance state".

In the "W chance state", a game is played in which an increase in medal payout can be expected. In the "W chance state" game, the end condition is not the number of digested games, but when a specific small role ("CT bell" capable of paying out 10 medals in this embodiment) wins internally. It is defined by the number of times the stop button is pressed in the order of navigation (hereinafter referred to as the "bell navigation number"). That is, in the game in the "W chance state", the end condition is managed by the number of bell navigations, and when the number of bell navigations reaches a predetermined number, the game in the "W chance state" ends. In this embodiment, the number of bell navigations in the "W chance state" game is set to five.

Further, in the AT game, when a specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed on a predetermined line (in the present embodiment, "yellow BAR"-"yellow BAR"-on the center line (effective line) or on the cross-up. (When "Yellow BAR" is complete), the sub-game state shifts to the "additional challenge state". Then, after the game in the "additional challenge state" is digested, the AT game is restarted.

In addition, in the game of the "additional challenge state", the pseudo BB game is won and stocked with a high probability over a predetermined number of games. In addition, the number of AT games is not counted (subtracted) during the play period of the "additional challenge state".

Further, when the AT game is completed, the sub-game state always shifts to the transition effect state, and the above-mentioned transition effect game (race effect) is performed. In this case, the information regarding the type of the ally character who is the race victory target (candidate) in the race production of the transition production game and the content of the race production regarding the race win rate of the ally character is provided at the start of the game in the AT state before the transition. Determined by lottery.

The operation control of the AT game described above is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a means (notifying game control means) for controlling the operation of the AT game.

[Pseudo BB state]
In the pseudo BB game (special game), a specific replay combination (either "normal lip 1" to "normal lip 8") is won, and the stop button pressing order is associated with the winning replay combination. When the predetermined push order is set (when the push order is correct), a game called "JACGAME" (specific game), in which an increase in medal payout can be expected, is executed.

In the game of "JACGAME", the end condition is not the number of digestion games, but the stop button that is performed when a specific small role ("CT bell" that can pay out 10 medals in this embodiment) wins internally. It is defined by the number of push order navigations (number of bell navigations). That is, in the game of "JACGAME", the end condition is managed by the number of times of bell navigation, and when the number of times of bell navigation reaches a specific number of times, the game of "JACGAME" ends. In the present embodiment, the specific number of times of bell navigation in "JACGAME" is set to 5 times.

Further, the gaming period in the pseudo BB state is divided into a period called "JACGAME guaranteed section" and a period called "JACIN challenge section" to be performed after that.

In the "JACGAME guaranteed section", the game is always continued (the period is indefinite) until the predetermined number of times (twice in this embodiment) of "JACGAME" is consumed. Then, in the "JACGAME guaranteed section", when a specific replay combination (whether "normal lip 1" to "normal lip 8" is won), the stop button associated with the winning replay combination is displayed. The push order is notified (navigation), and the execution of "JACGAME" is guaranteed.

The game mode of the "JACGAME guaranteed section" is the same regardless of the transition route of the sub-game state to the pseudo BB state. That is, the game mode of the "JACGAME guaranteed section" is the same regardless of whether the sub-game state shifts from the non-AT state to the pseudo BB state or the sub-game state shifts from the AT state to the pseudo BB state. On the other hand, the game form of the "JACIN challenge section" differs depending on the transition route of the sub-game state to the pseudo BB state.

In the game of the "JACIN challenge section" when the sub-game state shifts from the non-AT state to the pseudo BB state, a specific replay combination (a specific number of games: 10 games in the present embodiment) is used. In the game in which "normal lip 1" to "normal lip 8" is won, a two-choice challenge effect is performed in the order in which the stop buttons are pressed. Then, if the correct answer is given to the two-choice challenge effect, "JACGAME" is executed as an interrupt process (interrupt game).

On the other hand, in the game of the "JACIN challenge section" when the sub-game state shifts from the AT state to the pseudo BB state, a specific replay combination ("normal lip") is performed during a period of a specific number of games (10 games in this embodiment). In the game in which "1" to "normal lip 8" is won, the order of pressing the stop button associated with the winning replay combination is always notified (navigation). That is, when the sub-game state shifts from the AT state to the pseudo BB state, "JACGAME" is always executed as an interrupt process if a specific replay combination is won in the "JACIN challenge section". Therefore, in this case, more medals can be obtained as compared with the case where the sub-game state shifts from the non-AT state to the pseudo BB state.

Further, in the pseudo BB game when the sub-game state shifts from the non-AT state to the pseudo BB state, the cycle of the game period in the non-AT state is based on each game, the type of the internal winning combination, and the winning history of the internal winning combination. A shortened lottery will be held. Specifically, in the pseudo BB game when the sub game state shifts from the non-AT state to the pseudo BB state, when the "loss", "reach eye lip" or "rare role" wins once internally, or When "missing" or "normal lip" is won continuously, a cycle shortening lottery is performed. Then, if the cycle shortening lottery is won, a predetermined number of shortened games (0 to 170 games) corresponding to the winning result is subtracted from the number of remaining games of the normal game of the current set. That is, even in the pseudo BB state, there is a possibility that the privilege of shortening the game period in the non-AT state of the current cycle can be obtained.

Further, in the pseudo BB game, when the cycle shortening lottery is won and the result of subtracting the number of shortened games from the current number of remaining games of the normal game is less than "0", the absolute value of the number of games of the subtraction result is determined. It is stocked as the number of shortened games for the surplus in the current set. Then, the number of shortened games for the surplus stock is applied at the start of the normal game of the next set, and at that time, the game period in the non-AT state (normal state) is shortened.

On the other hand, in the pseudo BB game when the sub-game state shifts from the AT state to the pseudo BB state, an additional lottery for the number of AT games is performed based on each game, the type of the internal winning combination, and the winning history of the internal winning combination. .. Specifically, in the pseudo BB game when the sub game state shifts from the AT state to the pseudo BB state, when the "loss", "reach eye lip" or "rare role" is hit once internally, or " If "Loss" or "Normal Lip" is won in succession, the number of AT games will be added to the lottery. Then, if the additional lottery is won, a predetermined number of additional AT games (0 to 300 games) corresponding to the winning result is added to the current number of remaining AT games. That is, even in the pseudo BB state, there is a possibility that the privilege of adding the number of AT games can be obtained.

The pseudo BB game and the operation control of the "JACGAME" described above are executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a means (special game control means and specific game control means) for controlling the operation of the pseudo BB game and the "JACGAME".

<Structure of data table stored in ROM cartridge board>
Next, the configuration of various data tables stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 86 will be described. The correspondence between the abbreviations of the internal winning combinations used in the various processes controlled by the sub CPU 102 and the various tables managed by the sub CPU 102 and the above-mentioned names and abbreviations of the internal winning combinations managed by the main CPU 93, which will be described below, is shown in FIG. 31. It is as shown in the correspondence table of.

[Race runner MAP lottery table]
First, the race runner MAP lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing the configuration of a race runner MAP lottery table. The race runner MAP lottery table is, for example, the race runner MAP during the race information lottery process (see FIG. 94 described later) performed at the start of one cycle of the non-AT state (at the start of the normal game). It is referred to in lottery processing (S391) and the like.

The race runner MAP lottery table defines the correspondence between the race runner MAP MAP numbers (“1” to “39”) and the lottery value. As will be described later, the race runner MAP (race information MAP) is the target of the race victory of the race production from the current cycle of the non-AT state to the 5th cycle (from the 1st race to the 5th race). Data (“1” to “10”) for determining the candidate) person is defined.

In the race runner MAP lottery process using the race runner MAP lottery table, first, a random number value for production extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) is used. , The lottery value corresponding to each race runner MAP number specified in the race runner MAP lottery table is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the MAP number of the race runner MAP at that time has been won. For example, in the race runner MAP lottery process, the probability of winning the MAP number "1" is 1974/32768.

[Race information MAP data table]
Next, the race information MAP data table will be described with reference to FIG. 33. FIG. 33 is a diagram showing the structure of the race information MAP data table. The race information MAP data table is referred to, for example, in the data acquisition process (S393) of the "target table" in the race information lottery process (see FIG. 94 described later) described later.

In the race information MAP data table, from the current cycle to the 5th cycle for each MAP number of the race runner MAP (race information MAP) determined by the race runner MAP lottery process using the race runner MAP lottery table. Data (“1” to “10”: hereinafter referred to as race information MAP data) for determining the race winners (from the first race to the fifth race) are defined. The race information MAP data is data corresponding to the type of "target table" defined in the winning target person lottery table (see FIG. 34 described later) described later. Specifically, the race information MAP data "1" to "10" correspond to "target table A" to "target table J" defined in the winning target person lottery table described later, respectively.

In the data acquisition process of the "target table" using the race information MAP data table, for example, when the MAP number of the race runner MAP (race information MAP) is "7", the first race to the fifth race As race information MAP data, "2" (target table B), "1" (target table A), "2" (target table B), "1" (target table A), "8" (target table H), respectively. ) Is acquired.

[Victory target lottery table]
Next, the winning target lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 34. FIG. 34 is a diagram showing the configuration of a winning target lottery table. The winning target person lottery table is referred to, for example, in the winning target person lottery process (S395) in the race information lottery process (see FIG. 94 described later) described later.

The winner lottery table is for each type of target table, and the race winners ("male A", "male B", "female A", "kappa", "tengu") of the race production performed in the transition production game. And "male A / male B") and its lottery value are defined. In addition, in this embodiment, since the race production of the transition production game is performed even after the end of the AT game, the target table determined by the race information MAP data table is set in the winning target person lottery table as shown in FIG. 34. In addition to A to J, a dedicated table "after AT" is also specified.

In the winning target lottery process using the winning target lottery table, first, the random number value for production extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is won. The lottery value corresponding to each race winner specified in the target person lottery table is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, if the subtraction result becomes negative (a "digit" occurs), it means that the race winner at that time has won.

For example, when the target table A is referred to in the winning target lottery process (when the race information MAP data is "1"), the probability that "Kappa" will be the race winning target is 328/32768. Become. However, for example, when the target table G is referred to in the winning target lottery process (when the race information MAP data is "7"), the probability that "Kappa" will be the race winning target is 0 /. It will be 32768, and "Kappa" will not win the race.

[Race win rate MAP lottery table]
Next, the race win rate MAP lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 35. FIG. 35 is a diagram showing the configuration of a race win rate MAP lottery table. The race win rate MAP lottery table is referred to, for example, in the race win rate MAP lottery process (S397) in the race information lottery process (see FIG. 94 described later) described later.

The race win rate MAP lottery table defines the correspondence between the race win rate MAP and the lottery value for each set value (1 to 6). In this embodiment, the race win rate MAP is "race win rate 5%", "race win rate 10%", "race win rate 20%", "race win rate 30%", "race win rate 50%", "race win rate". "66%", "Race win rate 80%", "Race win rate 100%", "Race win rate 2nd race 50%"-"Race win rate 5th race 50%", "Race win rate 2nd race 66%"-"Race Twenty types will be provided: "Win rate 5th race 66%" and "Race win rate 2nd race 80%" to "Race win rate 5th race 80%".

In the race win rate MAP lottery process using the race win rate MAP lottery table, first, the production random value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is raced. Win rate MAP The lottery value corresponding to each race win rate MAP specified in the lottery table is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), the race win rate MAP at that time is won. For example, when the set value is "1", the probability that the race win rate MAP of "race win rate 5th race 50%" will be won is 4410/32768.

[Race win rate MAP data table]
Next, the race win rate MAP data table will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37. FIG. 36 is a diagram showing the structure of the race win rate MAP data table. Further, FIG. 37 is obtained by rewriting the race win rate data (“1” to “8”) defined in the race win rate MAP data table shown in FIG. 36 into a specific win rate value (percentage display). The race win rate MAP data table is referred to, for example, in the race win rate data acquisition process (S399) in the race information lottery process (see FIG. 94 described later) described later.

In the race win rate MAP data table, predetermined race win rate data ("1" to "8") is stored for each race win rate MAP determined by the race win rate MAP lottery process. The race win rate data "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7" and "8" have a win rate of 5%, a win rate of 10% and a win rate of 20, respectively. %, Win rate 30%, Win rate 50%, Win rate 66%, Win rate 80% and Win rate 100%.

Specifically, the race win rate MAP is "race win rate 5%", "race win rate 10%", "race win rate 20%", "race win rate 30%", "race win rate 50%", "race win rate 66%". , "Race win rate 80%" and "Race win rate 100%", only the race win rate data of the race production of the current cycle (first race) is defined in the race win rate MAP data table. If the race win rate MAP is any of "race win rate 2nd race 50%", "race win rate 2nd race 66%" and "race win rate 2nd race 80%", the 1st race and 2 The race win rate data for the first race (the race one cycle ahead) is specified in the race win rate MAP data table. If the race win rate MAP is any of "race win rate 3rd race 50%", "race win rate 3rd race 66%" and "race win rate 3rd race 80%", the race win rate is 3 from the first race. The race win rate data up to the race (the race two cycles ahead) is specified in the race win rate MAP data table. If the race win rate MAP is any of "race win rate 4th race 50%", "race win rate 4th race 66%" and "race win rate 4th race 80%", the race win rate is 4 from the first race. The race win rate data up to the third race (the race three cycles ahead) is specified in the race win rate MAP data table. Further, if the race win rate MAP is any of "race win rate 5th race 50%", "race win rate 5th race 66%" and "race win rate 5th race 80%", the race win rate is 5 from the first race. The race win rate data up to the race (the race four cycles ahead) is specified in the race win rate MAP data table.

Then, in the process of acquiring the race win rate data using the race win rate MAP data table, for example, when the race win rate MAP is "race win rate 5th race 50%", the race win rate data of the 1st race to the 5th race As a result, "2" (win rate 10%), "2" (win rate 10%), "2" (win rate 10%), "2" (win rate 10%), and "5" (win rate 50%) are acquired, respectively. To.

[Race result lottery table]
Next, the race result lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 38. FIG. 38 is a diagram showing the configuration of the race result lottery table. The race result lottery table is referred to, for example, in the race result lottery process (S745) during the race-game start processing (see FIG. 124 described later) described later.

The race result lottery table defines the correspondence between the race result (winning / non-winning) and the lottery value for each race winning percentage.

In the race result lottery process using the race result lottery table, first, a random number value for production extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) is selected for the race result lottery. The lottery value corresponding to each race result (winning / non-winning) specified in the table is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (a "digit" occurs), the race result at that time is won.

[Post-AT race victory expectation data selection lottery table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the post-AT race victory expectation data selection lottery table will be described. FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a configuration of a post-AT race victory expectation data selection lottery table. The post-AT race victory expectation data selection lottery table is referred to, for example, in the post-AT race victory expectation data selection lottery process (S830) during the post-AT race _ game start processing (see FIG. 128 described later) described later. To.

The post-AT race win expectation data selection lottery table defines the correspondence between the race win rate and the lottery value. The post-AT race victory expectation data selection lottery table is commonly referred to regardless of the set values (1 to 6).

In the post-AT race victory expectation data selection lottery process using the post-AT race victory expectation data selection lottery table, first, from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random denominator = 32768 in this embodiment). The extracted random number values for production are sequentially subtracted by the lottery values corresponding to each win rate defined in the post-AT race victory expectation data selection lottery table. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), the winning percentage at that time is won. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 39, the race win rates selected after AT are "win rate 5%", "win rate 10%", "win rate 30%", "win rate 50%" and "win rate 100". % ”.

[Race win rate data rewriting lottery (during penalty) table]
Next, the race win rate data rewriting lottery (during penalty) table will be described with reference to FIG. 40. FIG. 40 is a diagram showing the configuration of a race win rate data rewriting lottery (during penalty) table. The race win rate data rewriting lottery (during penalty) table is referred to, for example, in the race winning percentage data rewriting lottery process (S945) during the general penalty process (see FIG. 137 described later) described later.

The race win rate data rewrite lottery (during penalty) table defines the correspondence between the rewritten race win rate (including no rewrite) and the lottery value for each penalty counter value ("0" to "5"). To do. The value of the penalty counter is the number of illegal operations (for example, ignoring push order navigation) performed during a predetermined game period. Further, in the present embodiment, in the race win rate data rewrite lottery process, the race win rate data rewrite lottery (during penalty) table of FIG. 40 is commonly used regardless of the currently set race win rate.

In the race win rate data rewrite lottery process using the race win rate data rewrite lottery (during penalty) table, first, the effect extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random denominator = 32768 in this embodiment). The random value for each race is sequentially subtracted by the lottery value corresponding to each race win rate after rewriting specified in the race win rate data rewriting lottery (during penalty) table. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (a "digit" occurs), the race win rate at that time is won.

In this embodiment, the race win rate data rewriting lottery (during penalty) table shown in FIG. 40 is used regardless of the currently set race win rate. Therefore, the race win rate after rewriting is "no rewrite" and "win rate 0". One of "%" wins. That is, in the present embodiment, the race win rate during the penalty is the currently set race win rate or 0% (AT non-winning).

The configuration of the race win rate data rewriting lottery (during penalty) table is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 40. For example, as the winning type of the race win rate after rewriting, in addition to "no rewriting" and "win rate 0%", a predetermined race win rate within the range of greater than 0% and less than 5% may be included. , Instead of "win rate 0%", the predetermined race win rate may be won.

Further, for example, a race win rate data rewriting lottery (during penalty) table may be provided for each race win rate currently set. In this case, a lottery value may be appropriately set in the race win rate column other than "win rate 0%" so that the rewritten race win rate is equal to or less than the currently set race win rate.

Further, in the race win rate data rewriting lottery (during penalty) table shown in FIG. 40, as the value of the penalty counter (number of times of illegal operation is executed) increases, the probability of lowering the race win rate (lottery value of "win rate 0%") also increases. Although a continuously increasing configuration example has been described, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, even if the probability of reducing the race win rate when the penalty counter value is "1" (the lottery value of "win rate 0%") is the same as that when the penalty counter value is "2". Good. That is, in the structure of the race win rate data rewriting lottery (during penalty) table, the probability of lowering the race win rate (the lottery value of "win rate 0%") as the value of the penalty counter (the number of times of illegal operation is executed) increases step by step. It may be configured to increase to.

[Pseudo BB lottery (general middle) table]
Next, the pseudo BB lottery (general middle) table will be described with reference to FIG. 41. FIG. 41 is a diagram showing the configuration of a pseudo BB lottery (general medium) table. The pseudo BB lottery (general middle) table is referred to, for example, when the sub-game state is the normal state in the pseudo BB lottery process (see FIG. 119 described later) described later.

The pseudo BB lottery (general middle) table defines the correspondence between the winning / non-winning (lottery result) of the pseudo BB game and the lottery value for each type of internal winning combination.

In the pseudo BB lottery process using the pseudo BB lottery (general medium) table, first, a random number value for production extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) is used. , Pseudo BB lottery (general middle) The lottery value of each lottery result specified in the table is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result (winning / non-winning of the pseudo BB game) at that time is won.

For example, in the pseudo BB lottery process using the pseudo BB lottery (general middle) table, when the internal winning combination is "normal lip", the non-winning of the pseudo BB game is always determined, and the internal winning combination is "determined". In the case of "role", the winning of the pseudo BB game is always determined.

[Pseudo BB lottery (AT, AT preparation, race) table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 42, a pseudo BB lottery (during AT, during AT preparation, during race) table will be described. FIG. 42 is a diagram showing the configuration of a pseudo BB lottery (during AT, during AT preparation, during race) table. The pseudo BB lottery (during AT, during AT preparation, during race) table is, for example, when the sub-game state is other than the normal state in the pseudo-BB lottery process (see FIG. 119 described later) described later (sub-game state). Is in the AT state, AT preparation state, or transition effect state).

The pseudo BB lottery (during AT / preparing / racing) table also has the same configuration as the pseudo BB lottery (general middle) table, and the pseudo BB lottery process is performed by the same method. Therefore, here, the configuration of the pseudo BB lottery (during AT / preparing / racing) table and the method of the pseudo BB lottery processing using the pseudo BB lottery (during AT / preparing / racing) table will be described. Is omitted.

[Pseudo BB precursor lottery table]
Next, the pseudo BB precursor lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 43. FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a configuration of a pseudo BB precursor lottery table. The pseudo BB precursor lottery table is referred to, for example, in the pseudo BB precursor lottery process (S677) in the pseudo BB lottery process (see FIG. 119 described later) described later.

The pseudo BB precursor lottery table defines the correspondence between the number of precursor games (including no precursor) at the time of winning the pseudo BB game and the lottery value for each type of internal winning combination.

In the pseudo BB precursor lottery process using the pseudo BB precursor lottery table, first, a random number value for production extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) is simulated. The lottery value of each precursor game number specified in the BB precursor lottery table is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the number of precursor games at that time has been won.

For example, in the pseudo BB precursor lottery process using the pseudo BB precursor lottery table, if the internal winning combination is "weak che", the probability of winning the precursor game of one game is 512/32768 with a probability of 128/32768. The probability of winning is the number of precursor games of 2 games, and the probability of 32128/3276 is the number of precursor games of 3 games.

[Period shortening lottery table]
Next, the cycle shortening lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 and 45. FIG. 44 is a diagram showing the configuration of the cycle shortening lottery table (No. 1), and FIG. 45 is a diagram showing the configuration of the cycle shortening lottery table (No. 2). The cycle shortening lottery table (No. 1 and No. 2) is referred to, for example, in the cycle shortening related process (S661) in the process at the start of the general middle-game (see FIGS. 117 and 118 described later) described later.

The cycle shortening lottery table defines the correspondence between the number of shortened games (the number of subtracted games of normal games) in the non-AT state game period (1 cycle) and the lottery value for each winning history data of the internal winning combination. .. In the cycle shortening lottery table, the number of shortened games is "0", "5", "10", "20", "30", "40", "50", "60", "70", "70". "100", "150" and "170" are provided.

The winning history data "Loss 2 consecutive" of the internal winning combination in the cycle shortening lottery table (No. 1) indicates a case where the internal winning combination "Loss" has won two games in a row. The winning history data "3 rips" indicates a case where the internal winning combination "normal rip" wins 3 games in a row. Further, the winning history data "3 bells" indicates a case where the internal winning combination "3 bells" (3 bells on the left and 3 bells on the middle right) wins 3 games in a row.

In addition, in the winning history data "weak 1st shot" and "strong 1st shot" of the internal winning combination in the cycle shortening lottery table (2), the internal winning combination of the current game is "weak che" and "strong", respectively. Shows the case of "Che". The winning history data "weak and weak 2 consecutive" indicates the case where the internal winning role "weak che" has won 2 games in a row, and the winning history data "strong and strong 2 consecutive" is the internal winning role "strong che". Shows the case where two games are won in a row. The winning history data "weak and strong 2 consecutive" indicates the case where the internal winning roles "weak che" and "strong che" are consecutively won in this order, and the winning history data "strong and weak 2 consecutive" is the internal winning. The case where the roles "strong che" and "weak che" are consecutively won in this order is shown. In addition, the winning history data "3 rare roles" is the internal winning role "rare role" ("weak che", "strong che", "watermelon", "chance eye A", "chance eye B" and "fixed role". ": The specified internal winning combination) indicates the case where the winning role is won for three consecutive games.

In the cycle shortening related processing using the cycle shortening lottery table, first, the random number value for production extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) is selected by the cycle shortening lottery. The lottery value of each shortened game number specified in the table is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), the number of shortened games at that time is won.

For example, in the cycle shortening related processing using the cycle shortening lottery table, when the winning history data is "3 lost games", the number of shortened games of 10 games is won with a probability of 30720/32768, and 1600/32768. It wins the number of shortened games of 30 games with a probability, and wins the number of shortened games of 50 games with a probability of 448/32768. That is, in the present embodiment, even if the internal winning combination "loss" is continuously won in the normal game, there is a possibility that the privilege of acquiring the number of shortened games (shortening the game period in the non-AT state) can be obtained.

[Pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 46, a pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery table will be described. FIG. 46 is a diagram showing a configuration of a pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery table. The pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery table is referred to, for example, in the pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery process (S689) in the general middle BB_game start processing (see FIG. 120 described later) described later.

In the pseudo BB cycle shortened lottery table, the correspondence between the number of shortened games (the number of subtracted games of normal games) in the non-AT state game period (1 cycle) and the lottery value for each internal winning combination or its winning history data. To specify. In the pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery table, "0", "5", "10", "20", "30", "50", "100" and "170" are provided as the number of shortened games. However, in the pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery process, if "170" is won as the number of shortened games, a privilege of 100% race win rate can be obtained.

In the pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery process using the pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery table, first, a random number value for production extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) is selected. , The lottery value of each number of shortened games specified in the pseudo BB cycle shortened lottery table is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), the number of shortened games at that time is won.

For example, in the pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery process using the pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery table, if the winning history data is "three lost games", the number of shortened games of 30 games is won with a probability of 32112/32768. The number of shortened games of 100 games with a probability of 656/32768 is won. That is, in the present embodiment, when the pseudo BB game is started during the normal game, the number of shortened games is acquired (in the non-AT state) even if the internal winning combination "loss" is continuously won in the pseudo BB game state. There is a possibility that you can get the benefit of shortening the game period). Further, for example, in the pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery process using the pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery table, when the internal winning combination is "reach eye lip", not only the number of shortened games of 170 games is always won, but also the number of shortened games is not always won. The race win rate set in the current set will be updated to 100% race win rate (AT win confirmed).

[Directly placed lottery table]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 47A to 47C, a lottery table placed directly on the table will be described.

FIG. 47A is a diagram showing a configuration of a direct addition lottery table that is referred to when the penalty flag is in the off state. FIG. 47B is a diagram showing a configuration of a direct addition lottery table referred to when the penalty flag is on and the sub-game state is the transition effect state (“during the race” described later). Further, FIG. 47C shows a state in which the penalty flag is on and the pseudo BB game is started when the sub-game state is the AT state (“AT in progress” described later) or the AT state (“AT in BB” described later). It is a figure which shows the structure of the direct addition lottery table which is referred to in the case of). That is, when the current game is a game under penalty, the direct addition lottery table shown in FIG. 47B or 47C is used, and when the current game is not a penalty game, the direct addition lottery table shown in FIG. 47A is used. Is used.

It should be noted that these direct-mounted lottery tables are, for example, during the race_game start process (see FIG. 124 described later), during the AT_game start process (see FIG. 128 below), and during the AT BB_game. It is referred to when determining the number of additional AT games in the direct addition lottery processing during the start processing (see FIG. 129 described later).

Each direct-added lottery table defines the correspondence between the number of added AT games and the lottery value for each internal winning combination or its winning history data. In the present embodiment, the number of additional AT games is "0" (without addition), "10", "20", "30", "50", "100", "150", "200" and "200". 300 ”is provided.

In the direct addition lottery process using the direct addition lottery table, first, a random number value for production extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) is directly added to the lottery. The lottery value of each additional AT game specified in the table is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the number of additional AT games at that time is won.

For example, in the direct addition lottery process using the direct addition lottery (penalty flag OFF) table shown in FIG. 47A, if the winning history data is "three lost games", there is a probability of 32736/32768 additional AT of 20 games. Win the number of games, and win the number of additional AT games with a probability of 32/32768 of 100 games. That is, in the present embodiment, when the pseudo BB game is started during the AT game, even if the internal winning combination "loss" is continuously won in the pseudo BB game state, the privilege of adding the number of AT games can be obtained. there is a possibility.

Further, for example, in the direct addition lottery process (direct addition lottery processing during the penalty) using the direct addition lottery (penalty flag ON: during the race) table shown in FIG. 47B, the internal winning combination is "reach eye lip" and "determined". If it is other than "role", the privilege of adding the number of AT games cannot be obtained. Further, for example, in the direct addition lottery processing (direct addition lottery processing during the penalty) using the direct addition lottery (penalty flag ON: during AT, during AT BB) table shown in FIG. 47C, regardless of the type of the internal winning combination. , I can't get the extra benefit of the number of AT games.

[AT start game number lottery (when woman A wins) table]
Next, the AT start game number lottery (at the time of female A victory) table will be described with reference to FIGS. 48A and 48B.

FIG. 48A is referred to when the first mode (the continuation probability is 50% and the number of additional games for each MAX bet operation is 50 games) is selected as the mode for determining the number of AT start games when "Woman A" wins. It is a figure which shows the structure of the AT start game number lottery (at the time of woman A victory) table. Further, FIG. 48B shows when the second mode (continuation probability is 95%, the number of additional games for each MAX bet operation is 5 games) is selected as the mode for determining the number of AT start games when "Woman A" wins. It is a figure which shows the structure of the reference AT start game number lottery (at the time of woman A victory) table.

The AT start game number lottery (at the time of woman A victory) table is referred to, for example, in the woman A_AT start game number lottery process (S1062) in the woman A_AT start game number determination process (see FIG. 148 described later) described later. Will be done. Further, the process of selecting one of the AT start game number lottery (when female A wins) table shown in FIGS. 48A and 48B is, for example, the AT in the AT preparation button pressing process (see FIG. 147 described later) described later. It is performed in the start game number lottery table switching process (S1054).

Each AT start game number lottery (when woman A wins) table shows the type of lottery result (winning (continuation) / non-winning (end)) of the AT start game number addition lottery performed each time the MAX bet button 21 is pressed. , Define the correspondence with the lottery value of each lottery result.

AT start game number lottery (when woman A wins) In the woman A_AT start game number lottery process using the table, first, it is extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment). The generated random number value for production is sequentially subtracted by the lottery value of each lottery result type specified in the AT start game number lottery (when woman A wins) table. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), the lottery result (continuation / non-winning) at that time is won.

If the lottery for adding the number of AT start games when "Woman A" wins is won, the number of AT games (5 games or 50 games) corresponding to the selected mode is determined at that time. Along with being added to the number of games, the execution (continuation) of the AT start game number addition lottery is determined again. On the other hand, if the result of the AT start game number addition lottery when "Woman A" wins is non-winning, the number of AT games is not added and the AT start game number addition lottery (when "Woman A" wins). The AT start game number determination game) also ends. However, as for the number of AT games, 50 games are guaranteed as the minimum guaranteed value regardless of the lottery result of the AT start game number addition lottery. Therefore, for example, when the second mode is selected and the lottery result of the AT start game number addition lottery is non-winning (end) at the time of pressing the MAX bet 21 for the fifth time, the number of winnings is Since it is 4 times, if the number of AT start games is determined based on the corresponding number of lottery, it becomes 20 games (5 games × 4 times), but in the present embodiment, the number of AT start games is rewritten to 50 games.

[AT start game number lottery (when Kappa wins) table]
Next, the AT start game number lottery (at the time of winning the kappa) table will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 52. 49 to 52 are diagrams showing the configurations of the AT start game number lottery (Kappa win) table (No. 1) to the AT start game number lottery (Kappa win) table (No. 4), respectively. It should be noted that these AT start game number lottery (at the time of Kappa victory) table is referred to, for example, in the Kappa sushi MAP lottery processing (S793) in the later-described Kappa victory_game start processing (see FIG. 127 described later). To.

The AT start game number lottery (at the time of Kappa victory) table defines the correspondence between the sushi MAP number and the lottery value for each sushi MAP number currently set. The sushi MAP corresponds to the sushi material from the first dish to the first to the first dish displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 in the above-mentioned kappa sushi production (game for determining the number of AT start games when "Kappa" wins). This is a MAP that defines the data (see FIG. 53 below).

In the AT start game number lottery (when Kappa wins) table, "1" to "45" are specified as the sushi MAP numbers. Further, since the sushi MAP is not set in the initial state, in this case, the lottery value in the "first time" column in the AT start game number lottery (at the time of winning the kappa) table is referred to (see FIG. 52).

In the Kappa sushi MAP lottery process using the AT start game number lottery (at the time of Kappa victory) table, first, the production extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment). The random value for each sushi is sequentially subtracted from the lottery value of each sushi MAP number specified in the AT start game number lottery (at the time of winning the kappa) table. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), the sushi MAP number at that time is won.

[Kado Sushi MAP Data Table]
Next, the Kawado sushi MAP data table will be described with reference to FIG. 53. FIG. 53 is a diagram showing the structure of the Kawado Sushi MAP data table. The Kappa sushi MAP data table is referred to, for example, in the Kappa sushi MAP data acquisition process (S794) during the Kappa sushi victory_game start process (see FIG. 127 described later) described later.

In the Kappa sushi MAP data table, the Kappa sushi MAP data ("1" to "1" to " 8 ") is stored. That is, the Kappa sushi MAP data table is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 11 in the AT start game number determination game (Kappa sushi production) performed when "Kappa" wins in the race production of the transition production game. The types of sushi ingredients from the first game to the tenth game are specified.

In the Kappa sushi MAP data table, the sushi material corresponding to the Kappa sushi MAP data "1" is "squid", and the sushi material corresponding to the Kappa sushi MAP data "2" is "tamago". The sushi material corresponding to the data "3" is "Kappa roll", and the sushi material corresponding to the Kappa sushi MAP data "4" is "salmon". The sushi material corresponding to the Kawado sushi MAP data "5" is "Ikura", and the sushi material corresponding to the Kawado sushi MAP data "6" is "Tuna", which corresponds to the Kawado sushi MAP data "7". The sushi material is "Uni", and the sushi material corresponding to Kawado Sushi MAP data "8" is "Ise Ebi".

Then, in the Kawado sushi MAP data acquisition process using the Kawado sushi MAP data table, for example, when the sushi MAP number is "1", the sushi MAP data for the first to tenth dishes are "1". 1 "(squid)," 1 "(squid)," 2 "(squid)," 1 "(squid)," 4 "(salmon)," 1 "(squid)," 2 "(tamago)," 1 " "(Squid)," 1 "(squid) and" 5 "(squid) are acquired.

[Kappa game number acquisition lottery table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 54, a lottery table for acquiring the number of kappa games will be described. FIG. 54 is a diagram showing the configuration of a lottery table for acquiring the number of kappa games. The kappa game number acquisition lottery table is referred to, for example, in the kappa game number acquisition lottery process (S806) during the kappa victory time_game start process (see FIG. 127 described later) described later.

The kappa game number acquisition lottery table defines the correspondence between the number of AT start games when "kappa" wins and the lottery value for each kappa sushi MAP data ("1" to "8"). In the present embodiment, "10", "20", "30", "100", "150", "200" and "300" are provided as the number of AT start games when the "Kappa" wins. Further, in the kappa game number acquisition lottery table, the lottery value of "LIFE up" is also defined for each kappa sushi MAP data ("1" to "8"). When the "LIFE up" is won, the value of the kappa end counter that manages the end trigger of the kappa sushi production (AT start game number determination game) is added by "1".

In the Kawado game number acquisition lottery process using the Kawado game number acquisition lottery table, first, a random number value for production extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) is used. , The number of each AT start game specified in the lottery table for acquiring the number of Kawado games or the lottery value of "LIFE up" is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the number of AT start games or “LIFE up” at that time has been won.

For example, if the set Kappa sushi MAP data is "1" (squid) and the video effect of "Kappa" eating the sushi material "Squid" is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11, a lottery to acquire the number of Kappa games. In the kappa game number acquisition lottery process using the table, the number of AT start games of 10 games is won with a probability of 32672/32768, and the number of AT start games of 300 games with a probability of 96/32768 is won. Further, for example, when the set kappa sushi MAP data is "3" (kappa roll) and the image effect of "kappa" eating the sushi material "kappa roll" is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11, the kappa is displayed. In the kappa game number acquisition lottery process using the game number acquisition lottery table, the number of AT start games is not won, but "LIFE up" is always won.

Further, for example, when the set Kappa sushi MAP data is "8" (Ise Ebi) and the image effect of "Kappa" eating the sushi material "Ise Ebi" is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11, the Kappa In the kappa game number acquisition lottery process using the game number acquisition lottery table, the number of AT start games of 100 games is won with a probability of 27854/32768, and the number of AT start games of 150, 200 or 300 games with a probability of 1638/32768. Wins. That is, in the present embodiment, in the Kappa sushi production performed when the "Kappa" wins in the race production of the transition production game, if the "Kappa" is produced to eat the sushi material of high-quality ingredients, it is more likely. Win a large number of AT start games.

[Kawado sushi data conversion generation lottery table]
Next, the Kawado sushi data conversion generation lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 55. FIG. 55 is a diagram showing the configuration of a lottery table for generating Kawado sushi data conversion. The kappa sushi data conversion generation lottery table is referred to, for example, in the kappa sushi data conversion generation lottery process (S802) during the kappa sushi data conversion generation lottery process (see FIG. 127 described later) during the kappa sushi data conversion generation lottery process described later.

The Kawado sushi data conversion generation lottery table defines the correspondence between the winning / non-winning (lottery result) of the Kawado sushi data conversion generation and the lottery value for each type of internal winning combination.

In the Kawado sushi data conversion generation lottery process using the Kawado sushi data conversion generation lottery table, first, the production randomness extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random denominator = 32768 in this embodiment). The numerical value is sequentially subtracted by the lottery value of each lottery result specified in the lottery table for generating Kawado sushi data conversion. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), it means that the lottery result at that time is won.

For example, in the Kawado sushi data conversion generation lottery process using the Kawado sushi data conversion generation lottery table, if the internal winning combination is "missing", the Kawado sushi data conversion generation will be non-winning with a probability of 31130/32768. There is a probability of 1638/32768 that the Kawado sushi data conversion will occur.

[Kado sushi data conversion lottery table]
Next, the Kawado sushi data conversion lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 to 60. 56 to 60 are diagrams showing the configuration of the Kappa sushi data conversion lottery (1 dish ahead) table to the Kappa sushi data conversion lottery (5 dishes ahead) table, respectively.

The Kappa sushi data conversion lottery (1 dish ahead) table shown in FIG. 56 shows the sushi material (Kappa) displayed in the game one game ahead (second dish) from the current game of the AT start game number determination game when "Kappa" wins. It is a conversion lottery table of sushi MAP data). The Kappa sushi data conversion lottery (2 dishes) table in FIG. 57 shows the conversion of sushi material displayed in the game 2 games ahead (3 dishes) from the current game of the AT start game number determination game when "Kappa" wins. It is a lottery table. The Kappa sushi data conversion lottery (3 dishes) table in FIG. 58 shows the conversion of sushi material displayed in the game 3 games ahead (4 dishes) from the current game of the AT start game number determination game when "Kappa" wins. It is a lottery table. The Kappa sushi data conversion lottery (4 dishes) table in Fig. 59 shows the conversion of sushi material displayed in the game 4 games ahead (5 dishes) from the current game of the AT start game number determination game when "Kappa" wins. It is a lottery table. Then, the Kappa sushi data conversion lottery (5 dishes) table in FIG. 60 shows the sushi material displayed in the game 5 games ahead (6th dish) from the current game of the AT start game number determination game when "Kappa" wins. It is a conversion lottery table of. Each kappa sushi data conversion lottery table is referred to, for example, in the kappa sushi data conversion lottery process (S804) during the kappa sushi data conversion lottery process (see FIG. 127 described later) during the kappa sushi data conversion lottery process described later.

Each kappa sushi data conversion lottery table has a correspondence relationship between the converted kappa sushi MAP data ("1" to "8") and the lottery value for each kappa sushi MAP data (sushi material) currently set. To specify.

In the Kawado sushi data conversion lottery process using each Kawado sushi data conversion lottery table, first, a random value for production extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment). Is sequentially subtracted by the lottery value of each converted Kawado sushi MAP data (sushi material) specified in each Kawado sushi data conversion lottery table. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“digits” occur), the converted Kappa sushi MAP data (sushi material) at that time is won.

For example, in the Kawado sushi data conversion lottery process using the Kawado sushi data conversion lottery (one plate ahead) table, if the currently set Kawado sushi MAP data (sushi material) is "5" (tuna), With a probability of 29492/32768, Kawado sushi MAP data (sushi material) is converted from "5" (tuna) to "7" (uni), and with a probability of 3276/32768, Kawado sushi MAP data (sushi material) is "5". Converted from (tuna) to "8" (Ise shrimp).

As shown in FIGS. 56 to 60, in the present embodiment, the value of the converted Kappa sushi MAP data is not smaller than the value of the converted Kappa sushi MAP data in the Kappa sushi data conversion lottery process. That is, the number of acquired AT games after conversion is not smaller than the number of acquired AT games before conversion by the Kawado sushi data conversion lottery process. However, for example, if the currently set Kappa sushi MAP data (sushi material) is "8" (Ise sushi), the Kappa sushi data conversion lottery process does not convert the Kappa sushi MAP data (sushi material). ..

[MAX bet button point off judgment table]
Next, the MAX bet button point extinguishing determination table will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62.

FIG. 61 is a diagram showing a configuration of a MAX bet button point extinguishing determination table referred to during a non-MB game (when the upper limit (valid specified number) of the number of medals that can be inserted is three). Further, FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a configuration of a MAX bet button point extinguishing determination table referred to during an MB game (when the upper limit of the number of medals that can be inserted is two). It should be noted that these MAX bet button point off determination tables are referred to, for example, in the LED on / off determination process of the MAX bet button 21 during the medal insertion command reception process (see FIG. 95 described later) described later.

Each MAX bet button point off judgment table is a combination of the number of medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 20 (0 to 3) and the number of medals credits (0 to 2 and 3 or more). , The correspondence relationship with the determination result of turning on / off the LED of the MAX bet button 21 is defined.

For example, when the number of inserted medals is two and the number of credits of medals is two during a non-MB game, the determination result of lighting / extinguishing the LED of the MAX bet button 21 is “lit” (FIG. 61), a lighting request is made to the LED of the MAX bet button 21. Further, for example, when the number of inserted medals is one and the number of credits of medals is one during a non-MB game, the determination result of turning on / off the LED of the MAX bet button 21 is "turning off". (See FIG. 61), a request is made to turn off the LED of the MAX bet button 21. As shown in FIG. 61, when the number of inserted medals is three during the non-MB game, the determination result of turning on / off the LED of the MAX bet button 21 is "regardless of the number of credits of the medals." It turns off.

<Explanation of operation of main control circuit>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 63 to 76, the contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 93 of the main control circuit 91 by using the program will be described.

[Main pachislot operation processing controlled by the main CPU]
First, the procedure of the main operation processing (processing after the power is turned on) of the pachi-slot machine 1 performed under the control of the main CPU 93 will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 63 (hereinafter referred to as the main flow).

First, when the power is turned on to the pachi-slot machine 1, the main CPU 93 performs the power-on processing (S1). In this process, it is determined whether the backup has been performed normally, whether the settings have been changed appropriately, and the like, and initialization is performed according to the determination result. The details of the power-on processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 64 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs an initialization process at the end of one game (S2). In this initialization process, the data in the designated storage area in the main RAM 95 is cleared. The designated storage area referred to here is a storage area in which data needs to be erased for each unit game (game) such as an internal winning combination storage area and a display combination storage area.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs medal reception / start check processing (S3). In this process, the input of the medal sensor (not shown) and the start switch 79 are checked. The details of the medal reception / start check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 65, which will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a random number value acquisition process (S4). In this process, the main CPU 93 extracts a random number value (0 to 65535) for the internal winning combination lottery, and stores the extracted random number value for the internal lottery in a random number value storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 95. To do. Further, in the present embodiment, in addition to the random value for internal lottery, various random values for production (0 to 65535 and / or 0 to 255) can be acquired, and various random values for production can be obtained as needed. May be acquired in S4.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs an internal lottery process (S5). In this process, the internal winning combination is determined by lottery based on the random number value for internal lottery extracted in S4. The details of the internal lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 67 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs the reel stop initial setting process (S6). The details of the reel stop initial setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 68 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a start command generation and storage process (S7). In this process, the main CPU 93 generates start command data to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. Further, the start command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 by the command data transmission process in the interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 76. It should be noted that the start command data includes various information necessary for the production of the internal winning combination and the like.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs weight processing (S8). In this process, if a predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has not elapsed since the start of the previous game, the main CPU 93 consumes the waiting time until the predetermined time elapses.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a reel rotation start process (S9). In this process, the main CPU 93 requests the start of rotation of all reels. Then, when the start of rotation of all reels is requested, three stepping motors (not shown) are driven by an interrupt process (see FIG. 76 described later) executed at a constant cycle (1.1172 msec). Controlled, the rotation of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R is started. At this time, each reel is accelerated and controlled until its rotation speed reaches a constant speed, and then the constant speed is maintained. Further, when it is decided to perform the reel effect (lock effect) during the reel acceleration period at the start of the game, the main CPU 93 sets the reel effect pattern in the reel rotation start process of S9 and produces the reel effect. It also controls.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a reel rotation start command generation / storage process (S10). In this process, the main CPU 93 generates data for a reel rotation start command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. The reel rotation start command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 by the command data transmission process in the interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 76. By this process, the sub-control circuit 101 can recognize the start of reel rotation, and can determine the timing and the like for executing various effects.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a pull-in priority storage process (S11). In this process, the main CPU 93 acquires the attraction priority data and stores it in the attraction priority data storage area. The details of the pull-in priority storage process will be described later with reference to FIG. 69 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a reel stop control process (S12). In this process, the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped based on the timing at which the left stop button 19L, the middle stop button 19C, and the right stop button 19R are pressed and the internal winning combination. The details of the reel stop control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 72 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a winning search process (S13). In this process, the main CPU 93 uses the symbol combination displayed on the effective line (winning determination line) after all the left reel 3L, middle reel 3C, and right reel 3R are stopped, and the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 10 to 12). ) And. Then, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the display combination is displayed on the effective line, and stores the determination result in the display combination storage area.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a winning operation command generation / storage process (S14). In this process, the main CPU 93 generates data of a winning operation command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. Further, the winning operation command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 by the command data transmission process in the interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 76. By this process, the sub-control circuit 101 can recognize the symbol combination displayed along the winning determination line, and can determine the timing and the like for executing various effects.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a medal payout process (S15). In this process, the hopper device 51 is driven, the number of credits is updated, and medals are paid out based on the number of payouts of the display combination determined in S13. At this time, in the present embodiment, the number of medals to be paid out differs depending on the display combination, but as shown in the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 10 to 12), when the number of medals to be inserted is three, the number of medals to be inserted is three. The maximum number of payouts (upper limit of payout) is 10.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a payout end command generation / storage process (S16). In this process, the main CPU 93 generates data for a payout end command to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 101, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. Further, the payout end command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 by the command data transmission process in the interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 76.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a bonus end check process (S17). In this process, the main CPU 93 checks whether or not to end the operation of the bonus game by referring to various counters (not shown) for managing the end trigger of the bonus game provided in the main RAM 95. The details of the bonus end check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 74 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a bonus operation check process (S18). In this process, the main CPU 93 checks whether or not to start the operation of the bonus game and whether or not to perform the replay. The details of the bonus operation check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 75 described later. Then, when the bonus operation check process is completed, the main CPU 93 returns the process to S2 and repeats the processes after S2.

[Processing when power is turned on]
Next, with reference to FIG. 64, the power-on processing performed in S1 in the main flow (see FIG. 63) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the backup is normal (S21). In this determination process, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the backup is normal by performing error detection using the checksum value.

For example, when the power is turned off, the set value of pachislot 1 (the value set for one of the six predetermined ball output rates) and the checksum value calculated from the set value are stored in the predetermined area of the main RAM 95 as backup data. It is stored. In the process of S21, the main CPU 93 reads out the set value and the checksum value stored in the main RAM 95. Next, the main CPU 93 compares the checksum value calculated from the read set value with the backed up checksum value. Then, if the sum values of both are the same, the main CPU 93 determines that the backup is normal.

In S21, when the main CPU 93 determines that the backup is not normal (when the determination in S21 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S23 described later. On the other hand, in S21, when the main CPU 93 determines that the backup is normal (when the determination in S21 is YES), the main CPU 93 sets the backed up set value in a predetermined area in the main RAM 95 (S22). As a result, if the backup is normal, the set value before the power is turned off is set in the main RAM 95.

After the processing of S22 or when the determination in S21 is NO, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the setting change switch (not shown) is in the ON state (S23). In S23, when the main CPU 93 determines that the setting change switch is not in the ON state (when the determination in S23 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S29 described later.

On the other hand, in S23, when the main CPU 93 determines that the setting change switch is in the ON state (when the determination in S23 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs a predetermined initialization process at the time of setting change (S24). In this process, the main CPU 93 clears, for example, the data stored in the internal winning combination storage area and the display combination storage area of the main RAM 95, and also clears the set value.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs an initialization command generation / storage process (S25). In this process, the main CPU 93 generates data for an initialization command to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 101, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. Further, the initialization command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 by the command data transmission process in the interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 76. The initialization command data includes whether or not the set value has been changed, set value information, and the like.

After the process of S25, the main CPU 93 executes the set value change process (S26). In this process, the main CPU 93 selects a set value from predetermined 1 to 6 according to the operation result of the reset switch, and sets a value based on the operation result of the start lever 23 operated thereafter. To confirm.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the setting change switch is in the ON state (S27).

In S27, when the main CPU 93 determines that the setting change switch is in the ON state (when the determination in S27 is YES), the main CPU 93 repeats the process of S27. If the setting change switch is in the ON state, it means that the operation of the setting change switch is not completed. In this case, the main CPU 93 processes S27 until the setting change switch is not in the ON state. repeat.

On the other hand, in S27, when the main CPU 93 determines that the setting change switch is not in the ON state (when the determination in S27 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the initialization command generation / storage process (S28). In this process, the main CPU 93 generates data for an initialization command to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 101, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. Then, after the processing of S28, the main CPU 93 ends the power-on processing and shifts the processing to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 63).

Here, returning to the process of S23 again, when the determination in S23 is NO, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the backup is normal (S29).

When the main CPU 93 determines in S29 that the backup is normal (when the determination in S29 is YES), the main CPU 93 returns the set value to the state before the power failure based on the backup data (S30). Then, after the processing of S30, the main CPU 93 ends the power-on processing and shifts the processing to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 63).

On the other hand, in S29, when the main CPU 93 determines that the backup is not normal (when the determination in S29 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs power-on error processing (S31). In this process, the main CPU 93 displays that the backup is not normal by displaying an error or the like.

In this embodiment, an error (backup error) that occurs when the backup is not normal is configured so that it cannot be canceled by operating the stop release switch or the reset switch, and a new setting change is made. It will be released.

[Medal reception / start check processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 65, the medal acceptance / start check process performed in S3 in the main flow (see FIG. 63) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not there is an automatic input request (S41). The presence / absence of the automatic closing request is determined by determining whether or not the automatic closing counter is "0". That is, when the automatic closing counter is "0", the main CPU 93 determines that there is no automatic closing request, and when the automatic closing counter is "1" or more, it determines that there is an automatic closing request.

The automatic input counter is data for identifying whether or not the display combination related to the replay is established in the previous unit game. When the display combination related to the re-game is established, the number of medals inserted in the previous unit game is automatically inserted into the automatic insertion counter.

In S41, when the main CPU 93 determines that there is no automatic input request (when the determination in S41 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S44 described later. On the other hand, in S41, when the main CPU 93 determines that there is an automatic closing request (when the determination in S41 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs the automatic closing process (S42). In this process, the value of the automatic input counter is copied to the input number counter, and then the value of the automatic input counter is cleared.

After the process of S42, the main CPU 93 performs the medal insertion command generation and storage process (S43). In this process, the main CPU 93 generates data of a medal insertion command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. Further, the medal insertion command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 by the command data transmission process in the interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 76. The medal insertion command data includes information such as the number of medals inserted and the number of credits.

After the processing of S43 or when the determination in S41 is NO, the main CPU 93 permits medal acceptance (S44). In this process, the solenoid of the selector 66 (see FIG. 5) is driven, and medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 20 are accepted. The accepted medals are counted and then guided to the hopper device 51.

Next, the main CPU 93 sets the maximum value of the number of inserted sheets according to the gaming state (S45). Specifically, when the gaming state is a non-MB gaming state (including the inter-flag state), the main CPU 93 sets the maximum value of the number of input sheets to "3". When the gaming state is the MB gaming state, the main CPU 93 sets the maximum value of the number of input sheets to "2".

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a MAXBET input process (S46). In this process, the main CPU 93 determines whether the MAX bet operation is valid / invalid based on the game state, the number of inserted medals and the number of credits (stored number). The details of the MAXBET input process will be described later with reference to FIG. 66 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the medal acceptance is permitted (S47). When it is determined in S47 that the main CPU 93 is not permitted to accept medals (when the determination in S47 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S52 described later.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S47 that the main CPU 93 is permitted to accept medals (when the determination in S47 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs a medal insertion check process (S48). In this process, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not a medal has been inserted, and if a medal has been inserted, adds "1" to the value of the inserted number counter.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a medal insertion command generation / storage process (S49). In this process, the main CPU 93 generates data of a medal insertion command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. Further, the medal insertion command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 by the command data transmission process in the interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 76.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the medal can be inserted or credited (S50). In S50, when it is determined that the main CPU 93 is in a state where medals can be inserted or credited (when the determination in S50 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S52 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined in S50 that the main CPU 93 is not in a state where medals can be inserted or credited (when the determination in S50 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs a medal acceptance prohibition process (S51). In this process, the solenoid of the selector 66 (see FIG. 5) is not driven, and the inserted medals are ejected from the medal payout outlet 32.

After the processing of S51, if S47 is a NO determination or S50 is a YES determination, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of input sheets is the number of sheets that can start the game (S52). Specifically, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of input sheets is set to "2".

In S52, when the main CPU 93 determines that the number of input sheets is not the number of sheets that can start the game (when the determination in S52 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S46 and repeats the processes after S46. On the other hand, in S52, when the main CPU 93 determines that the number of input sheets is the number of sheets that can start the game (when the determination in S52 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the start switch 79 is on (S53). ).

When the main CPU 93 determines in S53 that the start switch 79 is not on (when the determination in S53 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S46 and repeats the processes after S46. On the other hand, in S53, when the main CPU 93 determines that the start switch 79 is ON (when the determination in S53 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs a medal acceptance prohibition process (S54).

Then, after the processing of S54, the main CPU 93 ends the medal acceptance / start check processing, and shifts the processing to S4 of the main flow (see FIG. 63).

[MAXBET input processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the MAXBET insertion process performed in S46 during the medal reception / start check process (see FIG. 65) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the MAX bet operation has been performed (S61). Specifically, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the MAX bet button 21 has been pressed by the player.

When the main CPU 93 determines in S61 that the MAX bet operation has not been performed (when the determination in S61 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the MAXBET insertion process and performs the medal acceptance / start check process (FIG. 65). (See), move to S47.

On the other hand, in S61, when the main CPU 93 determines that the MAX bet operation has been performed (when the determination in S61 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not "2MB" or "3MB" is established (winning). Determine (S62). That is, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the 2MB flag-to-flag state or the 3MB-flag-to-flag state with reference to the carry-over combination storage area (see FIG. 26).

In S62, when the main CPU 93 determines that "2MB" or "3MB" is not established (winning) (when the determination in S62 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S65 described later. On the other hand, in S62, when the main CPU 93 determines that "2MB" or "3MB" is established (winning) (when the determination in S62 is YES), the main CPU 93 is the current number of inserted medals and the number of credits. It is determined whether or not the total with (the number of stored sheets) is "3" or more (S63).

In S63, when the main CPU 93 determines that the total of the current number of inserted medals and the number of credits (stored number) is not "3" or more (when the determination in S63 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the MAXBET insertion process. After finishing, the process is moved to S47 of the medal reception / start check process (see FIG. 65).

On the other hand, in S63, when the main CPU 93 determines that the total of the current number of inserted medals and the number of credits (stored number) is "3" or more (when the determination in S63 is YES), the main CPU 93 is multiplied. Set "3" to the number of sheets (S64). Then, after the processing of S64, the main CPU 93 ends the MAXBET input processing, and shifts the processing to S47 of the medal acceptance / start check processing (see FIG. 65).

As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the player performs the MAX bet operation in the 2MB flag state or the 3MB flag state, the total number of medals inserted and the credit number is multiplied by the MB flag state. If the maximum number of medals is less than "3", the number of medals to be hung is not set. That is, in this case, the MAX betting operation performed by the player becomes invalid.

Here, returning to the process of S62 again, when the determination in S62 is NO, the main CPU 93 is set with a predetermined number of credited medals (S65). At this time, the number of sheets to be multiplied by 2 or 3 is set. Then, after the processing of S65, the main CPU 93 ends the MAXBET input processing, and shifts the processing to S47 of the medal acceptance / start check processing (see FIG. 65).

As described above, in the MAXBET insertion process of the present embodiment, the maximum bet operation by the player is effective / based on the total number of the current number of inserted medals and the number of credits (stored number) in the state between the MB flags. An invalidity determination is made, and this process is executed by the main control circuit 91. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 is a means for determining whether the MAX bet operation is valid / invalid based on the total number of inserted medals and the number of credits (stored number) in the state between MB flags. Also serves as (bet operation determination means).

[Internal lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the internal lottery process performed in S5 in the main flow (see FIG. 63) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the game state is the MB game state with reference to the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 27) (S71).

In S71, when the main CPU 93 determines that the gaming state is the MB gaming state (when the determination in S71 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs the MB operating process (S72). As shown in the internal lottery tables for the 2MB gaming state and the 3MB gaming state in FIGS. 19 and 20, in the MB gaming state, the “CB combination”, that is, all the small combinations are always won. Therefore, in the process during MB operation, the main CPU 93 turns on all the bits of the small winning combination in the internal winning combination storage area (see FIG. 24). Then, after the processing of S72, the main CPU 93 ends the internal lottery processing, and shifts the processing to S6 of the main flow (see FIG. 63).

On the other hand, in S71, when the main CPU 93 determines that the gaming state is not the MB gaming state (when the determination in S71 is NO), the main CPU 93 sets an internal lottery table according to the gaming state (S73). In this process, the main CPU 93 grasps the current game state with reference to the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 27), and determines the type of the internal lottery table.

Next, the main CPU 93 acquires the internal lottery random number stored in the random number storage area (S74). Then, the main CPU 93 sets "1" as the initial value of the winning number.

Next, the main CPU 93 refers to the internal lottery table to acquire the lottery value corresponding to the winning number, and subtracts the lottery value from the internal lottery random number value (S75).

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the calculation result in S75 is less than "0" (negative value) (S76). In S76, when the main CPU 51 determines that the calculation result is less than "0" (when the determination in S76 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S79 described later.

On the other hand, in S76, when the main CPU 93 determines that the calculation result is not less than "0" (when the determination in S76 is NO), the main CPU 51 updates the internal lottery random number value and the winning number (S77). Specifically, the value of the calculation result is used as the random value for internal lottery, and the winning number is added by "1".

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not all the winning numbers have been checked (S78). When it is determined in S78 that the main CPU 93 has not checked all the winning numbers (when the determination in S78 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S75 and repeats the processes after S75.

On the other hand, in S78, when it is determined that the main CPU 93 has checked all the winning numbers (when the determination in S78 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S80 described later.

Here, returning to the processing of S76 again, if S76 is determined to be YES (when a digit is generated in the subtraction processing), the main CPU 93 is a small winning combination / replay data pointer corresponding to the winning number in which the digit is generated. And the bonus data pointer is acquired (S79).

After the processing of S79 or when the determination in S78 is YES, the main CPU 93 refers to the internal lottery table (see FIGS. 13 to 15, etc.) and acquires the internal winning combination based on the small winning combination / replay data pointer (S80). ). Next, the main CPU 93 stores the acquired internal winning combination in the carrying-over combination storage area (S81).

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the data stored in the carry-over combination storage area is "00000000000" (S82). In S82, when the main CPU 93 determines that the data stored in the carry-over combination storage area is not "00000000000" (when the determination in S82 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S87 described later.

On the other hand, in S82, when the main CPU 93 determines that the data stored in the carry-over combination storage area is "00000000000" (when the determination in S82 is YES), the main CPU 93 uses the internal lottery table (FIGS. 13 to 13). Refer to (see 15 etc.) and acquire the internal winning combination based on the bonus data pointer (S83).

Next, the main CPU 93 stores the acquired internal winning combination in the carrying-over combination storage area (S84).

Next, the main CPU 93 refers to the carry-over combination storage area and determines whether or not the MB (“2MB” or “3MB”) is being carried over (S85). In S85, when the main CPU 93 determines that the MB is not being carried over (when the determination in S85 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S87 described later.

On the other hand, in S85, when the main CPU 93 determines that the MB is being carried over (when the determination in S85 is YES), the main CPU 93 sets the RT gaming state corresponding to the type of the MB being carried over (S86). .. Specifically, when "2MB" is being carried over (between the 2MB flags), the main CPU 93 sets the RT1 gaming state as the RT state (bit 3 of the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 27)). Store (set) "1" in). On the other hand, when "3MB" is being carried over (between the 3MB flags), the main CPU 93 sets the RT2 gaming state as the RT state ("1" in bit 4 of the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 27). Is stored (set)).

After the processing of S86, or when S82 or S85 determines NO, the main CPU 93 updates the internal winning combination storage area based on the internal winning combination stored in the carry-over combination storage area (S87). After that, the main CPU 93 ends the internal lottery process, and shifts the process to S6 of the main flow (see FIG. 63).

As described above, the internal lottery process of the present embodiment is executed by the main control circuit 91. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 also serves as a means for executing the determination process of the internal winning combination (internal winning combination determining means). Further, in S86 during the internal lottery process described above, the RT gaming state corresponding to the type of MB being carried over is set. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 also serves as a means (replay time state control means) for controlling the transition of the RT gaming state.

[Reel stop initial setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 68, the reel stop initial setting process performed in S6 in the main flow (see FIG. 63) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the gaming state is the MB gaming state (S91).

In S91, when the main CPU 93 determines that the gaming state is the MB gaming state (when the determination in S91 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S93 described later. On the other hand, in S91, when the main CPU 93 determines that the gaming state is not the MB gaming state (when the determination in S91 is NO), the main CPU 93 sets the value of the small winning combination / replay data pointer as the rotation stop number. (S92).

After the processing of S92 or when the determination in S91 is YES, the main CPU 93 refers to the reel stop initial setting table (not shown), and based on the acquired rotation stop number, various information corresponding to the rotation stop number. (S93). In this process, the number of the stop table of the reels used during the first stop to the third stop and the information necessary for the control change process (when the reels are stopped in a specific order and the reels are stopped at a specific position). Information for reselecting the stop table) and the like are acquired again.

The reel stop initial setting table defines the correspondence between the reel stop stop number and various information such as the pull-in priority table selection data and the pull-in priority table number, which will be described later. Further, the stop table is a table that directly or indirectly defines information on the number of sliding pieces with respect to the pressed position of the stop button. In this stop table, the number of sliding pieces is used so that the reel stops at the stop position intended by the designer so as not to give a disadvantage to the player and to cause an erroneous winning by using the specified information. Is stipulated.

Next, the main CPU 93 stores the rotating identifier "0FFH (11111111B)" in the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 30) (S94).

Next, the main CPU 93 stores "3" in the stop button non-operation counter provided in the main RAM 95 (S95). After that, the main CPU 93 ends the reel stop initial setting process, and shifts the process to S7 of the main flow (see FIG. 63). The stop button non-operation counter is a counter for managing the number of stop buttons for which a stop operation has not been detected.

[Pull-in priority storage process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 69, the pull-in priority storage process performed in S11 in the main flow (see FIG. 63) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 stores the value of the stop button non-operation counter in the main RAM 95 as the number of searches (S101). Next, the main CPU 93 performs a search target reel determination process (S102). In this process, the main CPU 93 selects, for example, a predetermined reel from the rotating reels, and determines the selected reel as the search target reel.

For example, in the process of S102, when all (three) reels are rotated, the left reel 3L is first determined as the search target reel. After that, various processes up to S111, which will be described later, are performed on the left reel 3L, and when the process returns to S102 again, the middle reel 3C is next determined as the search target reel. Then, various processes up to S111, which will be described later, are performed on the middle reel 3C, and when the process returns to S102 again, the right reel 3R is next determined as the search target reel.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a pull-in priority table selection process (S103). In this process, the pull-in priority table is selected based on the internal winning combination (data pointer) and the operation stop button. The details of the pull-in priority table selection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 70 described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 sets "0" as the position data of the search symbol and sets "20" as the number of symbol checks (S104). Then, the main CPU 93 performs a symbol code storage process (S105). In this process, the symbol code corresponding to the position data of the current search symbol located on the effective line of the search target reel is stored in the symbol code storage area. At this time, the symbol codes for the number of valid lines are stored. The details of the symbol code storage process will be described later with reference to FIG. 71, which will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 updates the display combination storage area (see FIG. 25) based on the symbol code acquired in S105 and the data of the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 30) (S106). At this point, regardless of whether or not the internal winning combination is won, a combination of symbols that can be displayed (displayable combination) is stored in the display combination storage area based on the stopped symbol.

In the present embodiment, the information of the symbol code storage area (the symbol code and the corresponding displayable combination) is updated for each reel to be stopped. At this time, the displayable winning combination may be acquired from the data that defines the correspondence between the stopped reel symbol and the corresponding displayable winning combination, or the stopped reel symbol. And the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 10 to 12) may be collated and acquired. When the former method is used, the correspondence between the symbol and the displayable combination changes for each reel.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a pull-in priority data acquisition process (S107). In this process, the main CPU 93 gives priority to the combination in which the bit is "1" in the display combination storage area (see FIG. 25) and the bit is "1" in the internal winning combination storage area. Refer to the ranking table (not shown) to acquire the pull-in priority data.

The attraction priority table is a table that defines the correspondence between the attraction priority data for each storage area type and the predetermined priority in each attraction priority table number. The pull-in priority table is used to search for a more appropriate number of slip pieces in addition to the number of slip pieces obtained based on the stop table. The priority order is data that defines the order in which the symbols are preferentially stopped and displayed (pulled in) among the types of symbol combinations related to winning. Normally, the order of priority is set in the order of replay, small win, and bonus from the highest.

Further, in the case of a symbol position that would result in an erroneous winning when stopped, "prohibition of use (000H)" is acquired as the attraction priority data in S107. Further, if the symbol position is not internally won but does not result in an erroneous winning even if it is stopped, "stop possible (001H)" is acquired as the pull-in priority data in S107.

Next, the main CPU 93 stores the acquired attraction priority data in the attraction priority data storage area (not shown) corresponding to the search target reel (S108). At this time, the attraction priority data is stored in the attraction priority data storage area so that the value of each priority and the bit of the storage area correspond to each other.

The pull-in priority data storage area is provided with a priority data storage area for each type of reel. In each attraction priority data storage area, the attraction priority data determined according to each symbol position "0" to "19" of the corresponding reel is stored. In the present embodiment, by referring to this attraction priority data storage area, it is searched whether or not a more appropriate number of sliding pieces exists in addition to the number of sliding pieces determined based on the stop table.

Further, the content of the priority pull-in data stored in the pull-in priority data storage area differs depending on the type of the pull-in priority table number in the pull-in priority table referred to when determining the pull-in priority data. Further, the pull-in priority data indicates that the larger the value, the higher the priority.

By referring to the pull-in priority data, it is possible to relatively evaluate the priority among the symbols arranged on the peripheral surface of the reel. That is, the symbol whose highest value is determined as the attraction priority data is the symbol having the highest priority. Therefore, it can be said that the pull-in priority data indicates the order between the symbols arranged on the peripheral surface of the reel. If there are a plurality of symbols having the same value of the pull-in priority data, one symbol is determined according to the priority order defined by the priority order table.

Next, the main CPU 93 adds "1" to the position data of the search symbol and subtracts "1" from the number of symbol checks (S109). Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of symbol checks is "0" (S110).

In S110, when the main CPU 93 determines that the number of symbol checks is not "0" (when the determination in S110 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S105 and repeats the processes after S105. On the other hand, in S110, when the main CPU 93 determines that the number of symbol checks is "0" (when the determination in S110 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the search has been performed for the number of searches (S111).

When it is determined in S111 that the main CPU 93 has not searched for the number of searches (when the determination in S111 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S102 and repeats the processes after S102. On the other hand, when it is determined in S111 that the main CPU 93 has searched for the number of searches (when the determination in S111 is YES), the main CPU 93 ends the pull-in priority storage process and performs the process in S12 of the main flow (see FIG. 63). Move to.

[Pull-in priority table selection process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 70, the attraction priority table selection process performed in S103 in the flowchart of the attraction priority storage process (see FIG. 69) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the pull-in priority table selection data is set (S121).

In S121, when the main CPU 93 determines that the attraction priority table selection data is set (when the determination in S121 is YES), the main CPU 93 has a pressing order storage area (see FIG. 29) and an operation stop button storage area. (See FIG. 28), the attraction priority table number corresponding to the attraction priority table selection data is set from the attraction priority table selection table (not shown) (S122). Then, after the processing of S122, the main CPU 93 ends the attraction priority table selection process, and shifts the process to S104 of the attraction priority storage process (see FIG. 69).

The attraction priority table selection table defines the correspondence between the combination of the attraction priority selection number and the pressing order of the stop button and the attraction priority table number in each combination. Further, the attraction priority table number is data for acquiring information regarding the priority of the display combination defined in the above-mentioned attraction priority table (not shown).

On the other hand, in S121, when the main CPU 93 determines that the attraction priority table selection data is not set (when the determination in S121 is NO), the main CPU 93 sets the attraction priority table corresponding to the attraction priority table number. Set (S123). Then, after the processing of S123, the main CPU 93 ends the attraction priority table selection process, and shifts the process to S104 of the attraction priority storage process (see FIG. 69).

[Design code storage process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 71, the symbol code storage process performed in S105 in the flowchart of the attraction priority storage process (see FIG. 69) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 sets valid line data (S131). In the present embodiment, the effective line is provided with one line (center line) as described above. Next, the main CPU 93 sets the check symbol position data of the search target reel based on the search symbol position and the effective line data (S132). For example, when the search target reel is the left reel 3L, since it is desired to acquire the information of the middle stage of the search target reel, the check symbol position data indicating the middle stage is set.

Next, the main CPU 93 acquires the symbol code of the check symbol position data (S133). Then, the main CPU 93 stores the acquired symbol code in the symbol code storage area, ends the symbol code storage process, and shifts the process to S106 of the pull-in priority storage process (see FIG. 69).

[Reel stop control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 72, the reel stop control process performed in S12 in the main flow (see FIG. 63) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not a valid stop button has been pressed (S141). In S141, when the main CPU 93 determines that the valid stop button has not been pressed (when the determination in S141 is NO), the main CPU 93 repeats the process of S141 and executes the pressing operation of the valid stop button. Wait until.

On the other hand, in S141, when the main CPU 93 determines that a valid stop button has been pressed (when the determination in S141 is YES), the main CPU 93 has a pressing order storage area (see FIG. 29) and an operation stop button storage area (FIG. 29). 28) is updated (S142). Next, the main CPU 93 subtracts "1" from the value of the stop button non-operation counter (S143).

Next, the main CPU 93 determines the search target reel from the operation stop button (S144). Then, the main CPU 93 stores the stop start position in the main RAM 95 based on the symbol counter (S145).

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a sliding piece number determination process (S146). In this process, the main CPU 93 acquires the number of slip pieces determination data based on the type of the stop button at the time of the first stop, various stop tables, and the like.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs the priority pull-in control process (S147). In this process, the pull-in priority data is compared according to each symbol position in the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces "4" or "1" from the stop start position, and the most appropriate number of sliding pieces is determined. The details of the priority pull-in control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 73, which will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a reel stop command generation / storage process (S148). In this process, the main CPU 93 generates data for a reel stop command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. Further, the reel stop command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 by the command data transmission process in the interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 76. The reel stop command transmitted in this process includes information such as the type of reel to be stopped, the number of slip pieces thereof, and the ON edge / OFF edge of the stop switch.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines the scheduled stop position based on the stop start position and the slide piece number determination data acquired in S146, and stores the determined stop schedule position in the main RAM 95 (S149). In this process, the main CPU 93 adds the number of sliding pieces to the stop start position, and sets the result as the scheduled stop position.

Next, the main CPU 93 sets the scheduled stop position determined in S149 as the search symbol position (S150). Next, the main CPU 93 performs the symbol code acquisition process described with reference to FIG. 71 (S151). After that, the main CPU 93 updates the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 30) using the acquired symbol code (S152).

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a control change process (S153). Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the stop button non-operation counter is "0" (S154). When the main CPU 93 determines in S154 that the inactive counter is not "0" (when the determination in S154 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the attraction priority storage process described with reference to FIG. 69 (S155). ). After that, the main CPU 93 returns the process to S141 and repeats the processes after S141.

On the other hand, in S154, when the main CPU 93 determines that the inactive counter is "0" (when the determination in S154 is YES), the main CPU 93 ends the reel stop control process and performs the process in the main flow (FIG. 63). (See), move to S13.

As described above, the reel stop control process of this embodiment is executed by the main control circuit 91. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 also serves as a means (stop control means) for executing stop control of reel rotation (display of fluctuations in symbols).

[Priority pull-in control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 73, the priority pull-in control process performed in S147 in the flowchart of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 72) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 sets the pull-in priority data storage area corresponding to the operation stop button (S161). Next, the main CPU 93 acquires the data of the stop start position (S162).

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the MB (“2MB” or “3MB”) is in operation (S163). In S163, when the main CPU 93 determines that the MB is not in operation (when the determination in S163 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S165 described later. On the other hand, in S163, when the main CPU 93 determines that the MB is operating (when the determination in S163 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the search target reel is the left reel 3L (S164). ..

In S164, when the main CPU 93 determines that the search target reel is not the left reel 3L (when the determination in S164 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S165 described later. On the other hand, in S164, when the main CPU 93 determines that the search target reel is the left reel 3L (when the determination in S164 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S167 described later.

When the determination in S163 or S164 is NO (when the maximum number of sliding pieces is 4 and the reel stop control is performed), the main CPU 93 sets the priority table corresponding to the number of sliding pieces determination data (S165).

The priority order table includes data for determining the number of sliding pieces obtained based on the stop table and a range of numerical values predetermined as the number of sliding pieces (when the maximum number of sliding pieces is 4, "0" to "4". ”) Priority is specified in the order of application (hereinafter referred to as“ priority order ”). That is, in the priority order table, the order of the number of slip pieces to be preferentially applied is determined for each slip piece number determination data. In this embodiment, each numerical value is searched (checked) sequentially from the lower priority order "5" in the priority order table, and the numerical value corresponding to the priority order "1" is preferentially applied as the number of slip pieces. To do so. Then, in the processing of S165, for example, when the number of sliding pieces determination data is "4", the priority data defined in the address in the priority order table corresponding to the number of sliding pieces determination data "4" is obtained. It is set.

After the processing of S165, the main CPU 93 sets "5" in the initial value of the priority order and the number of checks (S166). By this process, the priority order is checked (searched) 5 times in the range of 0 to 4 frames. Then, after the processing of S166, the main CPU 93 performs the processing of S169 described later.

Further, when the determination in S164 is YES (when the maximum number of sliding pieces is one and the reel stop control is performed), the main CPU 93 sets the priority table for the MB gaming state corresponding to the number of sliding pieces determination data. (S167). Next, the main CPU 93 sets "3" to the initial value of the priority order and sets "2" to the number of checks (S168). By this process, the priority order is checked (searched) twice in the range of 0 to 1 frame. Then, after the processing of S168, the main CPU 93 performs the processing of S169 described later.

After the processing of S166 or S168, the main CPU 93 sets the number of sliding pieces determination data as the number of sliding pieces (S169).

Next, the main CPU 93 extracts the stop search position based on the stop start position and the priority order (S170). Next, the main CPU 93 acquires the pull-in priority data of the stop search position (S171).

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the value of the attraction priority data acquired in S171 is equal to or greater than the value of the attraction priority data acquired earlier (S172). In S172, when the main CPU 93 determines that the attraction priority data acquired in S171 is not equal to or higher than the attraction priority data acquired earlier (when the determination in S172 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S174 described later. ..

On the other hand, in S172, when the main CPU 93 determines that the attraction priority data acquired in S171 is equal to or higher than the attraction priority data acquired earlier (when the determination in S172 is YES), the main CPU 93 determines the number of slip pieces. Update (S173).

After the processing of S173 or when the determination in S172 is NO, the main CPU 93 subtracts the value of the priority order and the number of checks by "1" (S174).

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of checks is "0" (S175). When the main CPU 93 determines in S175 that the number of checks is not "0" (when the determination in S175 is NO), the main CPU 93 returns the process to S170 and repeats the processes after S170.

On the other hand, in S175, when the main CPU 93 determines that the number of checks is "0" (when the determination in S175 is YES), the main CPU 93 sets the finally updated number of sliding pieces (S176). Then, after the processing of S176, the main CPU 93 ends the priority pull-in control processing, and shifts the processing to S148 of the reel stop control processing (see FIG. 72).

[Bonus end check process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 74, the bonus end check process performed in S17 in the main flow (see FIG. 63) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the MB (“2MB” or “3MB”) is operating by referring to the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 27) (S181). In S181, when the main CPU 93 determines that the MB is not operating (when the determination in S181 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check process and shifts the process to S18 in the main flow (see FIG. 63). Transfer.

On the other hand, in S181, when the main CPU 93 determines that the MB is in operation (when the determination in S181 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs the CB termination process (S182). In this process, the game status flag (not shown) corresponding to "CB" is turned off, the winning counter and the game counter are cleared, and the like. Next, the main CPU 93 updates the value of the bonus end number counter (S183).

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the value of the bonus end number counter is less than "0" (S184). In S184, when the main CPU 93 determines that the value of the bonus end number counter is not less than "0" (when the determination in S184 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check process and performs the process in the main flow (FIG. 63) Move to S18.

On the other hand, in S184, when the main CPU 93 determines that the value of the bonus end number counter is less than "0" (when the determination in S184 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs the MB end process (S185). In this process, the main CPU 93 clears the bonus end number counter and turns off the game status flag (2MB game status flag or 3MB game status flag) corresponding to the operating MB (“2MB” or “3MB”). To do. When the value of the bonus end number counter is less than "0", the payout of medals exceeds 2 during the 2MB game state, or the payout of medals exceeds 30 during the 3MB game state. Means the case.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a bonus end command generation and storage process (S186). In this process, the main CPU 93 generates data of a bonus end command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. Further, the bonus end command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 by the command data transmission process in the interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 76. The bonus end command includes information indicating that the bonus game has ended.

Then, after the processing of S186, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check processing, and shifts the processing to S18 in the main flow (see FIG. 63).

[Bonus operation check process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 75, the bonus operation check process performed in S18 in the main flow (see FIG. 63) will be described.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the MB (“2MB” or “3MB”) is in operation (S191). In S191, when the main CPU 93 determines that the MB is not operating (when the determination in S191 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S193 described later.

On the other hand, in S191, when the main CPU 93 determines that the MB is operating (when the determination in S191 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs the CB operation process (S192). Then, after the processing of S192, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check processing, and shifts the processing to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 63).

Further, when the determination in S191 is NO, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the MB (“2MB” or “3MB”) is a prize (S193). In S193, when the main CPU 93 determines that the MB is not a prize (when the determination in S193 is NO), the main CPU 93 performs the process of S197 described later.

On the other hand, in S193, when the main CPU 93 determines that the MB has won a prize (when the determination in S193 is YES), the main CPU 93 performs an MB operation process corresponding to the type of the winning MB (S194). In this process, the main CPU 93 sets "1" to the corresponding bit in the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 27), and sets the value of the bonus end number counter to a predetermined value ("30" or "2"). Set to. Further, in this process, the main CPU 93 also performs the CB operation process of S192.

Next, the main CPU 93 clears the value of the carry-over combination storage area (S195). Next, the main CPU 93 performs a bonus start command generation / storage process (S196). In this process, the main CPU 93 generates data of a bonus start command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 95. Further, the bonus start command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 by the command data transmission process in the interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 76. The bonus start command includes information indicating that the bonus game has started.

Then, after the processing of S196, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check processing, and shifts the processing to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 63).

Further, when the determination in S193 is NO, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the winning combination related to the replay has won a prize (S197). In S197, when the main CPU 93 determines that the winning combination related to the re-game has not won a prize (when the determination in S197 is NO), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check process and performs the process in the main flow (see FIG. 63). Move to S2.

On the other hand, in S197, when the main CPU 93 determines that the winning combination related to the re-game has won a prize (when the determination in S197 is YES), the main CPU 93 requests the automatic insertion of medals (S198). That is, the main CPU 93 copies the input number counter to the automatic input number counter. Then, after the processing of S198, the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check processing, and shifts the processing to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 63).

[Interrupt processing controlled by the main CPU (1.1172 msec)]
Next, the interrupt process controlled by the main CPU 93 will be described with reference to FIG. 76. In the interrupt processing described below, the main control circuit 91 performs reel control processing and also performs various command data transmission processing. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 performs control processing of the fluctuation display operation of the symbol and also serves as a means (data transmission means) for transmitting various command data.

First, the main CPU 93 saves the register (S201). Next, the main CPU 93 performs an input port check process (S202). In this process, signals input from various switches such as a stop switch are checked.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a timer update process (S203). In this process, the main CPU 93 performs a process of subtracting the value of the lock timer for each interrupt process, for example. Then, when the value of the lock timer becomes 0, the main CPU 93 clears the game lock flag.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a reel control process (S204). In this process, the main CPU 51 starts rotating the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R when all the reels are requested to start rotating, and then each reel rotates at a constant speed. Drive and control three stepping motors. When the number of sliding pieces is determined, the main CPU 93 updates the symbol counter of the corresponding reel by the number of sliding pieces. Then, the main CPU 93 waits for the updated symbol counter to match the value corresponding to the scheduled stop position (the symbol at the scheduled stop position reaches the area on the effective line of the reel display window 4), and then corresponds to the corresponding value. The corresponding stepping motor is driven and controlled so that the rotation of the reel is decelerated and stopped. Further, in the present embodiment, in the processing of S204, in addition to the above-mentioned normal acceleration processing, constant speed processing and stop processing, when a reel effect pattern is set at the time of acceleration processing, the reel effect pattern is supported. It also performs reel production (reel action) and lock control processing.

Next, the main CPU 93 performs a command data transmission process (S205). In this process, the main CPU 93 transmits various command data stored in the communication data storage area to the sub control circuit 101. The command data transmission process is executed not in the 1.1172 msec cycle but in a cycle of about 16 msec (every 15 interrupt processes).

Next, the main CPU 93 performs the lamp 7-segment drive process (S206). In this process, the main CPU 93 drives and controls the 7-segment display 24 to display the number of payouts, the number of credits, and the like. Next, the main CPU 93 performs a register reset process (S207). Then, after that, the main CPU 93 ends the interrupt process.

<Outline of various characteristic processes executed by the sub CPU>
Here, before explaining the detailed operation of the sub-control circuit 101, an outline of various characteristic processes (including penalty processes) executed by the sub-control circuit 101 of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. More specific procedures and the like of various processes described below will be described in detail later with reference to various flowcharts.

[Initialization process of game information after power failure for a predetermined time]
As described above, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the advantage / disadvantage of the game (acquisition of chance of winning AT) depends on the digestion status (number of digestion games) of the normal game. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the pachi-slot machine 1 recovers from a power failure for a predetermined time or longer in order to prevent a deferred state of game information (number of digestion games, etc.) from occurring, for example, when a game store is opened. (For example, when the power is turned on when the game store is opened), the same initialization process as that performed when the setting change command is received is automatically performed.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, the setting change command is received when the elapsed time of the power failure calculated based on the time at the time of the latest power failure and the time at the time of recovery from the power failure is 4 hours or more. Performs the same initialization processing as the initialization processing sometimes performed, and returns the game information (number of digested games, etc.) to the initial state.

Normally (except for exceptional times such as the year-end and New Year holidays), there is no game store that operates the game machine for 24 hours, so there is a closed state of 8 to 10 hours. Then, the power of the gaming machine is turned off for most of the closed period. Therefore, if the threshold value of the elapsed power interruption time is set to 4 hours as in the present embodiment, the sub-control is automatically initialized at the start of business the next day, and the digestion status of the number of games is surely set to "0". You can start the game. However, the threshold value of the elapsed power interruption time is not limited to 4 hours, and can be arbitrarily set as long as it is a threshold value that can automatically initialize the game information at the time of opening the store, for example.

By performing the above-mentioned automatic initialization process of the game information, the game information (number of digested games, etc.) is automatically reset when the power is restored from the power failure for a predetermined time, and the deferred state of the game information is surely generated. Can be prevented. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of unfairness in the game. In addition, this process eliminates the need for the initialization process that the store clerk manually performs at the time of opening the store, so that the burden on the store clerk can be reduced.

[Subtraction display processing of the number of remaining cycle games]
In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the number of remaining games of the normal game (hereinafter referred to as “the number of remaining cycle games”) during the normal game until the start of the transition effect game in the current cycle is displayed on the liquid crystal screen of the liquid crystal display device 11. The liquid crystal display. Then, along with the digestion of the normal game, the number of remaining cycle games displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 is also subtracted and displayed (countdown display). However, in the normal game, when the cycle shortening lottery is won and the number of remaining cycle games is subtracted and displayed by the number of winning shortened games, if the subtraction display interval of the number of remaining cycle games is set to 1 game, the winning shortened game The subtraction display time varies greatly depending on the number, which may give a feeling of delay in the game.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the cycle shortening lottery is won in the normal game and the number of remaining cycle games is collectively subtracted and displayed by the number of winning shortened games, the number of remaining cycle games is displayed according to the number of winning shortened games. Change the subtraction display interval (interval between subtraction games). Specifically, in the present embodiment, the value obtained by adding "1" to the quotient when the number of winning shortened games is divided by "30" is used as the subtraction display interval of the number of remaining cycle games.

In this case, if the number of shortened games won is less than 30, the subtraction display interval of the number of remaining cycle games is "1", and the number of remaining cycle games is subtracted and displayed at one game interval. For example, when the number of remaining cycle games is 100 games and the number of shortened games of 20 games is won, the number of remaining cycle games is "100", "99", "98", ..., "81", "80". Is displayed as a subtraction.

On the other hand, when the number of winning shortened games is 30 games or more, the subtraction display interval of the number of remaining cycle games is "2" or more, and the number of remaining cycle games is subtracted and displayed at intervals of 2 games or more. For example, when the number of shortened games is "70", the subtraction display interval of the number of remaining cycle games is "3" ("2" (quotient of 70/30) + "1"). Therefore, for example, when the number of remaining cycle games is 100 games and the number of shortened games of 70 games is won, the number of remaining cycle games is "100", "97", "94", ..., "31". , Is displayed as a subtraction in the form of "30". If the number of remaining cycle games is subtracted from the number of remaining cycle games "31" at the subtraction display interval "3", the number of remaining cycle games is actually less than the number of remaining cycle games "30" ("28"). In such a case, after the number of remaining cycle games "31", the actual number of remaining cycle games "30" is displayed.

By performing the subtraction display processing of the number of remaining cycle games described above, the subtraction display time of the number of remaining cycle games can be set to substantially the same time regardless of the number of shortened games won. As a result, even if the normal game is advanced while the subtraction display of the number of remaining cycle games is performed, the feeling of extension during the normal game is lost, and the game can be advanced without making the player wait longer than necessary. The method for calculating the subtraction display interval of the number of remaining cycle games is not limited to the above-mentioned example, and the subtraction display time of the number of remaining cycle games can be set to approximately the same time regardless of the number of shortened games won. Any method can be used as long as it is a method for calculating the display interval. For example, a value other than "30" may be used as a value for dividing the number of winning shortened games.

[MAX bet button on / off control process]
In the present embodiment, as described above, the total number of medals stored in the credit and the current number of medals inserted in the 2MB flag state (RT1 game state) or the 3MB flag state (RT2 game state). If the number of cards is less than 3, even if the player presses the MAX bet button 21, the operation is treated as invalid.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the LED provided on the MAX bet button 21 is turned on / off in synchronization with the valid / invalid determination process of the player's pressing operation on the MAX bet button 21.

Specifically, in the state between MB flags (non-MB state), the total number of medals stored in the credit (1 or more) and the current number of medals inserted (2 or less) is less than 3. When the player presses the MAX bet button 21 in the situation (when the pressing operation of the MAX bet button 21 becomes invalid), the LED provided on the MAX bet button 21 is turned off. On the other hand, in the state between MB flags (non-MB state), the game is played in a situation where the total number of medals stored in the credit (1 or more) and the current number of medals inserted (2 or less) is 3 or more. When a person presses the MAX bet button 21 (when the pressing operation of the MAX bet button 21 becomes effective), the LED provided on the MAX bet button 21 is turned on.

Further, in the present embodiment, similarly, in the MB game state, the LED provided on the MAX bet button 21 is turned on / off in synchronization with the valid / invalid determination process of the player's pressing operation on the MAX bet button 21. .. Specifically, the player presses the MAX bet button 21 in a situation where the total number of medals stored in the credit (1 or more) and the current number of medals inserted (1 or less) is less than 2. When an operation is performed (when the pressing operation of the MAX bet button 21 becomes invalid), the LED provided on the MAX bet button 21 is turned off. On the other hand, the player presses the MAX bet button 21 in a situation where the total number of medals stored in the credit (1 or more) and the current number of medals inserted (1 or less) is 2 or more. When the bet button 21 is pressed (when the operation of pressing the MAX bet button 21 is valid), the LED provided on the MAX bet button 21 is turned on.

In the LED point-off control process provided on the MAX bet button 21 described above, the LED on / off determination process is performed by using the MAX bet button point-off determination table described with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62. ..

When the LED on-off control process provided on the MAX bet button 21 is adopted, the LED provided on the MAX bet button 21 is also turned off when the pressing operation of the MAX bet button 21 is invalidated. It is possible to inform a player who has no knowledge of the game that the pressing operation of the bet button 21 is invalid in an easy-to-understand manner. In this case, even a player who has no knowledge of the game can play the game with peace of mind.

[Random value generation process for production]
In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the effect random value (0 to 32767) used in various lottery processes performed by the sub-control circuit 101 is generated on the software. Here, a method for generating a random value for production (random value for lottery) will be described.

(1) Various random numbers and various prime numbers used in the production random number value generation process First, in the present embodiment, three 16-bit (2-byte: -32767 to 32767) lottery required to generate the production random number value are drawn. Random numbers (first lottery random number, second lottery random number and third lottery random number) and 16-bit select random numbers are prepared. The first lottery random number, the second lottery random number, and the third lottery random number are stored in the first lottery random number storage area, the second lottery random number storage area, and the third lottery random number storage area provided in the sub RAM 103, respectively. Further, the selected random number is stored in the selected random number storage area provided in the sub RAM 103.

Further, in the present embodiment, a 32-bit (4 bytes: 0 to 249497295) first lottery random number prime number and a second lottery random number for updating the first lottery random number, the second lottery random number, and the third lottery random number, respectively. A prime number and a prime number for the third lottery random number are prepared. In addition, a 32-bit prime number for the selected random number for updating the selected random number is also prepared. The first lottery random number prime number, the second lottery random number prime number, the third lottery random number prime number, and the selected random number prime number are stored in the ROM cartridge board 86.

The first lottery random number prime number, the second lottery random number prime number, the third lottery random number prime number, and the selected random number prime number are fixed values. For example, the first lottery random number prime number is set to "443" and the second lottery random number prime number is set to "443". The lottery random number prime number can be set to "71171", the third lottery random number prime number can be set to "5024141", and the selected random number prime number can be set to "375511".

(2) Update processing of various random numbers In the present embodiment, after the power is turned on, the selected random number, the first lottery random number, the second lottery random number, and the third lottery random number are subjected to the selected random number and the third random number, respectively, in a cycle of about 4 msec. Each random number is updated by performing a predetermined arithmetic process using the 1-lottery random number prime number, the 2nd lottery random number prime number, and the 3rd lottery random number prime number.

Specifically, each 16-bit random number is multiplied by the corresponding 32-bit prime number, and the multiplication result is type-converted to 16-bit data (only the 16-bit data on the tail side of the multiplication result is left). (Each random number value in the range of 32767 to 32767)), the absolute value of the type-converted data is calculated. As a result, each random number is updated in the range of 0 to 32767. Then, the calculation result of the absolute value (random number after update) is stored in the corresponding random number storage area, and the update process of each random number is completed. For example, in the update process of the first lottery random number, first, the 16-bit first lottery random number is multiplied by a 32-bit prime number for the first lottery random number, and the multiplication result is type-converted into 16-bit data. Then, the absolute value of the type-converted data is calculated, and the calculation result is stored in the first lottery random number storage area as the updated first lottery random number. The initial value of each random number is a value at the time of turning on the power, and is a value at the time of reset (“-1”). When the values of the updated selected random numbers, the first lottery random number, the second lottery random number, and the third lottery random number become "0", "1" is added to each random number (not). Illustrated). In this embodiment, the random number update operation is performed by the multiplication method as described above. Therefore, when the update operation result becomes "0", all the subsequent random number update operation results also become "0". This is to avoid a problem that ends up. However, in the update process of each random number performed in the generation and acquisition process of the random number value for production described later, "0" as the generated random number value for production is a valid value, so "1" is added to each random number. The process of adding is not performed.

(3) Generation and Acquisition Process of Random Value for Production In the present embodiment, the generation and acquisition process of the random value for production is performed every time the lottery process is executed in the sub-control circuit 101.

In the production and acquisition process of the random number value for production, first, the above-mentioned update process (predetermined arithmetic process) is performed on the selected random number, and the selected random number is updated. Next, the updated selected random number is divided by "4" to calculate the remainder.

Next, a predetermined lottery random number is selected from the first lottery random number, the second lottery random number, and the third lottery random number based on the remainder value. In the present embodiment, as shown in the flowchart of the random number acquisition process of FIG. 84 described later, for example, when the remainder is “0” or “1”, the first lottery random number is selected and the remainder is “2”. In the case of, the second lottery random number is selected, and when the remainder is "3", the third lottery random number is selected.

Next, the selected predetermined lottery random number is subjected to the above-mentioned update process to update the predetermined lottery random number. Then, a predetermined lottery random number (0 to 32767) after the update is acquired as an effect random number value.

In the present embodiment, the effect random value is generated and acquired as described above. When a random number value for production is generated by the above method, one type of random number update process (predetermined arithmetic process) can be used for various lottery processes. Further, in the present embodiment, since the effect random number value is updated and generated using the prime number, it is possible to easily correspond to the ball output change specification for each content by adjusting the prime number.

The method for generating the random value for production is not limited to the above-mentioned example, and can be appropriately changed according to, for example, the production specifications and the ball ejection specifications. For example, in the method of selecting a lottery random number based on the above-mentioned remainder value, the correspondence relationship between the remainder value and the type of the selected lottery random number can be arbitrarily changed according to the ball ejection specifications and the like. Further, the numerical value for dividing the selected random number is not limited to "4" and can be changed as appropriate. Further, in the above example, an example in which three types of lottery random numbers are used has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more types of lottery random numbers may be used. In this case, the method for selecting the lottery random numbers based on the selected random numbers can also be appropriately changed according to the number of lottery random numbers used.

[Various penalty processing]
The pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has, for example, a function of giving a penalty when a stop button pressing order navigation, a predetermined pressing order rule, or the like is ignored, or when a fraudulent act or the like is detected. Here, various penalty processes performed in the sub-control circuit 101 will be described.

In the present embodiment, the on / off state of the penalty flag, the value of the penalty counter (number of penalties), and the number of penalty games are provided as the determination parameters for whether or not to perform the penalty processing. These determination parameters are stored in the sub RAM 103.

Then, these determination parameters are basically used properly according to the object to which the penalty is imposed. Specifically, the penalty flag is used when a penalty is imposed in the direct addition lottery performed in the start waiting state (confirmation screen state) of the pseudo BB game. Penalty counters are used to impose penalties on race win percentage data. Further, the number of penalty games is used when a penalty is imposed on the transition process to the pseudo BB game and the cycle shortening lottery process during the normal game.

When a plurality of types of determination parameters are used as described above in the penalty countermeasures, a penalty can be appropriately imposed according to the game playability, the game state, and the game situation of the gaming machine, so that the player can obtain an illegal profit. While deterring, it is possible to prevent the player from being uncomfortable (not excessively penalizing).

(1) Penalty processing based on the penalty flag In the present embodiment, when the penalty flag is on in the start waiting state of the pseudo BB game (“BB operation waiting” state described later), the number of AT games is directly added. A direct-mounted lottery table (see FIGS. 47B and 47C) dedicated to when the penalty flag is ON during the lottery process is referred to.

At this time, for example, when the current sub-game state is the transition effect state (“during the race” described later), the internal winning combination is other than the internal winning combination related to the “reach eye lip” and the “fixed combination”. , "No addition" of the number of AT games wins. Further, for example, when the current sub-game state is an AT game (“AT in progress” described later) or a pseudo BB game is started in the AT game (“AT in BB” described later), the internal winning combination Regardless of the type of, the "no addition" of the number of AT games wins. That is, when the penalty flag is on, the privilege of adding the number of AT games is almost eliminated.

The penalty flag can be used, for example, when an abnormality occurs in the command sequence (command data reception order) in a predetermined sub-game state (“during race”, “general middle BB” or “during AT” described later). When the push order navigation of the stop button (“BB rush navigation” described later) or the push order rule at the time of entering the pseudo BB game is ignored, the state is turned on. On the other hand, the penalty flag is reset (turned off), for example, at the end of the AT game or at the end of the pseudo BB game started during the AT game.

The above-mentioned on / off control of the penalty flag is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a means for controlling the on / off of the penalty flag (penalty flag setting means). Further, the sub-control circuit 101 executes the lottery process for directly adding the number of AT games in the state of waiting for the start of the pseudo BB game, which is the target of the penalty process based on the penalty flag. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a means for directly adding the number of AT games and performing a lottery process (means for determining the addition of the number of notified games).

(2) Penalty processing based on the number of penalty games The number of penalty games is the number of games indicating the execution period of the penalty processing. In the present embodiment, when the number of penalty games is set to a value of "1" or more, for example, the push order navigation (bell navigation) performed at the time of winning a predetermined internal winning combination ("push order bell"). Penalty processing such as prohibition, prohibition of cycle shortening lottery processing during normal game, prohibition of transition processing to pseudo BB game (BB entry determination processing described later) is performed.

In the present embodiment, the sub-game state is a normal state (described later, "general middle"), a transition effect state (described later, "during a race"), or a pseudo BB game start waiting state (described later, "BB operation waiting"). , When the small winning combination related to the "pushing order bell" (CT bell) is internally won and the first stop operation is performed (irregularly pressed) on a stop button other than the left stop button 19L, the present The number of penalty games is added to the number of set penalty games by "5". In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of penalty games is set to "10", and when the number of penalty games exceeds "10" due to the addition processing of the number of penalty games, the number of penalty games is set to the upper limit value "10". Will be done.

On the other hand, the sub-game state is the normal state (“general medium” described later) or the start waiting state of the pseudo BB game (“BB operation waiting” described later), and the small winning combination related to the “pushing order bell” (CT bell) is If the internal winning is performed and the first stop operation is performed on the left stop button 19L, the number of penalty games is deducted by "1". Further, in the present embodiment, the number of penalty games is also subtracted by "1" when the first stop operation is performed in the AT state ("AT in progress" described later). The number of penalty games is reset at the end of the AT game (final game) or at the end of the pseudo BB game started during the AT state (at the end of the "BB during AT" game described later) ("" 0 "is set).

In the penalty process based on the number of penalty games described above, by performing a general penalty process of prohibiting push order navigation (bell navigation), the player is suggested that the game state is being penalized, and the game state is adjusted according to the game state. Penalties can be imposed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, this penalty process can instruct the player to play the game according to the game rules while suppressing the player's illegal acquisition of profits.

The penalty processing based on the number of penalty games described above is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also includes a means for adding the number of penalty games (means for adding the number of penalty games) and a means for performing a predetermined penalty process based on the number of penalty games (penalty execution means). Also serves as.

(3) Penalty processing based on the penalty counter The penalty counter is a counter that counts the number of illegal operations (ignoring push order rules, etc.) performed during a predetermined game period, and each time it is determined that an illegal operation has been performed. The value of the penalty counter is added to "1". Then, in the present embodiment, when the value of the penalty counter (number of penalties) is "1" or more, the race win rate data rewriting lottery (during penalty) table (see FIG. 40) is referred to, and the value of the penalty counter is set. Correspondingly, a rewriting lottery of the probability of winning the AT (race winning percentage) is performed.

At this time, the larger the value of the penalty counter, the higher the probability that the race win rate will be rewritten to a value lower than the current race win rate. In the present embodiment, as shown in the race win rate data rewriting lottery (during penalty) table of FIG. 40, the larger the value of the penalty counter, the higher the probability that the race win rate will be rewritten to 0%.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the race win rate data rewriting lottery is won and the race win rate is rewritten to 0% (when the right of the AT lottery is treated as extinguished), the "race consecutive loss counter" (described later) The addition process of the value of the ceiling counter) (the number of continuous cycles of AT non-winning) is also prohibited. That is, when the value of the penalty counter is "1" or more and the race win rate is rewritten to 0%, the penalty is the number of ceiling cycles of the normal game in which the AT win is confirmed (the continuous cycle of the AT non-win). When the number of times reaches 10, the AT win will be applied) will be substantially extended.

In the present embodiment, the sub-game state is the normal state (“general medium” described later) or the transition effect state (“during the race” described later), and the small winning combination related to the “pushing order bell” (CT bell) is When the internal winning is performed and the first stop operation is performed (irregularly pressed) on a stop button other than the left stop button 19L, "1" is added to the value of the currently set penalty counter. To. Further, in the present embodiment, the upper limit of the penalty counter is set to "10", and when the value of the penalty counter exceeds "10" by this addition process, the value of the penalty counter is set to the upper limit value "10". ..

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the sub-game state shifts to the transition effect state (“during the race” described later) (when the race effect occurs), the value of the penalty counter is reset (“0” is set). Will be). The value of the penalty counter is also reset at the end of the AT game (final game) or at the end of the pseudo BB game started during the AT state (at the end of the "BB during AT" game described later). ..

By performing the penalty processing based on the value of the penalty counter described above, the race result (AT lottery result) can be rewritten with a predetermined probability corresponding to the number of illicit operations. Therefore, when the value of the penalty counter is small (when the number of illicit operations is small), there is a high possibility of erroneous operation, so it is possible to set the AT occurrence rate to a value close to the probability of a state in which no penalty has occurred. it can. On the other hand, when the value of the penalty counter is large (when the number of illicit operations is large), there is a high possibility that illicit operations have been intentionally performed, so the probability that the AT occurrence rate will decrease (including 0%) is increased. be able to. That is, in the present embodiment, an appropriate penalty can be imposed on the player according to the degree of illicit operation.

The penalty process based on the value of the penalty counter described above is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 is a means for counting the number of times of illegal operation is executed (penalty number of times counting means) and a means for performing a predetermined penalty process based on the value of the penalty counter (penalty execution means). Also serves as.

<Explanation of operation of sub-control circuit>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 77 to 148, the contents of various processes (tasks) executed by the sub CPU 102 of the sub control circuit 101 using the program will be described. Various tables required for various processes of the sub CPU 102 described below are stored in the ROM cartridge board 86, and various control flags, various control counters, various storage areas, and the like are provided in the sub RAM 103.

Further, in the various processes of the sub CPU 102 described below, various types of the sub game state in the previous unit game (game), the sub game state in the current unit game, and the sub game state in the next unit game are managed. To. In the following, the sub-game state in the previous unit game is referred to as "game state (previous)", the sub-game state in the current unit game is referred to as "game state (current)", and the sub-game state in the next unit game is referred to as "game state (current)". It is called "game state (next time)".

Further, in the following, the case where the sub-game state is the normal state is referred to as "general middle", and the pseudo BB state when the pseudo BB game is started in the normal state is referred to as "general middle BB". The case where the sub-game state is the transition effect state is referred to as "race in progress", and the case where the sub-game state is the AT preparation state is referred to as "AT preparation". Further, the case where the sub-game state is the AT state is referred to as "AT in progress", and the pseudo BB state when the pseudo BB game is started in the AT state is referred to as "AT in BB". Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the sub-game state is the W chance state is referred to as "W chance in progress", and the case where the sub game state is the additional challenge state is referred to as "additional challenge in progress".

[Power-on processing of sub CPU]
First, the power-on process of the sub CPU 102 will be described with reference to FIG. 77. The start request process in the power-on process shown in FIG. 77 is a process of making a start request for various tasks required for the function of the pachislot machine 1 to the OS.

First, the sub CPU 102 performs an initialization process (S211). In this process, the sub CPU 102 executes processes such as initialization of the CPU and internal devices and initialization of peripheral ICs.

Next, the sub CPU 102 acquires information on the power failure occurrence time stored in the power failure occurrence time storage area provided in the sub RAM 103 (S212). Next, the sub CPU 102 acquires the current time information from the RTC 108 (S213). Next, the sub CPU 102 calculates the elapsed time by subtracting the power failure occurrence time (most recent power failure occurrence time) acquired in S212 from the current time acquired in S213 (S214).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not 4 hours or more have passed since the latest power failure occurred, based on the elapsed time calculated in S214 (S215). In S215, when the sub CPU 102 determines that 4 hours or more have not passed since the latest power failure occurred (when the determination in S215 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S217 described later.

On the other hand, in S215, when the sub CPU 102 determines that 4 hours or more have passed since the latest power failure occurred (when the determination in S215 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the initialization command reception processing (S216). In this process, for example, reset processing of various game information (for example, the number of digested games) is performed. That is, in the present embodiment, for example, the initialization process of various data controlled by the sub CPU 102 is automatically performed by the power-on process at the start of business of the game store. The details of the initialization command processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 93 described later.

After the processing of S216 or when the determination in S215 is NO, the sub CPU 102 requests the activation of the lamp control task (see FIG. 79 described later) as the activation request of the subtask (S217). Next, the sub CPU 102 makes a request to start the sound control task (see FIG. 80 described later) (S218). Then, the sub CPU 102 makes a request to start the mother task (see FIG. 81 described later) (S219).

As described above, in the power-on processing of the present embodiment, when the elapsed time from the occurrence of the power failure is 4 hours (predetermined time) or more, the initialization command reception processing is performed, and this processing is performed. It is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a means for initializing various game information (initialization means when the power is turned on) when the elapsed time from the occurrence of the power failure is equal to or longer than a predetermined time.

[Power failure detection processing]
Next, the power failure detection process of the sub CPU 102 will be described with reference to FIG. 78. This process is, for example, an interrupt process that is executed when a power failure state that occurs when the power of the pachi-slot machine 1 is turned off is detected.

When the occurrence of a power failure is detected, the sub CPU 102 acquires the current time information from the RTC 108, and stores the current time information as the information of the power failure occurrence time in the power failure occurrence time storage area provided in the sub RAM 103. (S221).

[Ramp control task]
Next, the lamp control task performed by the sub CPU 102 will be described with reference to FIG. 79. In the power-on process of the sub CPU 102 described above (see FIG. 77), when a lamp control task start command is generated from the OS in response to a lamp control task start request by the sub CPU 102, lamp control is performed according to the procedure described below. The task is executed.

First, the sub CPU 102 performs a timer interrupt initialization process (S231). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs an initialization process of data related to lamp control (S232).

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a timer interrupt wait process (S233). Next, the sub CPU 102 executes a sound control task (see FIG. 80 described later) (S234).

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a lamp data analysis process (S235). In this process, the sub CPU 102 analyzes (determines) whether or not there is an LED control request for various LEDs (LED group 85, LED for lighting the MAX bet button, etc.) provided on the front door 2b, for example. ..

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a lamp effect execution process (S236). When it is determined by the analysis process of S235 that there is an LED control request, the sub CPU 102 creates predetermined LED control data in response to the LED control request in the process of S236, and corresponds to the created LED control data. It is transmitted to the LED board. On the other hand, when it is determined by the analysis process of S235 that there is no LED control request, the sub CPU 102 creates LED update data as LED control data in the process of S236, and the LED control data corresponds to the LED substrate. Etc. to send.

Then, after the processing of S236, the sub CPU 102 returns the processing to S233 and repeats the processing after S233.

[Sound control task]
Next, the sound control task performed by the sub CPU 102 will be described with reference to FIG. 80. In the power-on process of the sub CPU 102 described above (see FIG. 77), when a sound control task activation command is generated from the OS in response to a sound control task activation request by the sub CPU 102, sound control is performed according to the procedure described below. The task is executed.

First, the sub CPU 102 performs a sound control-related data initialization process (S241). Next, the sub CPU 102 executes the lamp control task (see FIG. 79) (S242).

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a sound data analysis process (S243). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a sound effect execution process (S244). Then, after the processing of S244, the sub CPU 102 returns the processing to S242 and repeats the processing after S242.

[Mother task]
Next, the mother task performed by the sub CPU 102 will be described with reference to FIG. 81. In the power-on process of the sub CPU 102 described above (see FIG. 77), when a mother task start command is issued from the OS in response to the mother task start request by the sub CPU 102, the mother task is executed according to the procedure described below. Will be done.

First, the sub CPU 102 makes a request to start the main task (see FIG. 82 described later) (S251). Next, the sub CPU 102 makes a start request for the main board communication task (see FIG. 85 described later) (S252). Then, the sub CPU 102 makes a request to start the animation task (see FIG. 86 described later) (S253).

[Main task]
Next, the main task performed by the sub CPU 102 will be described with reference to FIG. 82. In the mother task of the sub CPU 102 described above (see FIG. 81), when a command to start the main task is generated from the OS in response to a request to start the main task by the sub CPU 102, the main task is executed according to the procedure described below. To. In this embodiment, the main task is executed at a cycle of about 4 msec.

First, the sub CPU 102 performs a VSYNC (Vertical Synchronizing Signal) interrupt initialization process (S261). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a VSYNC interrupt wait process (S262). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs drawing processing (S263).

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a random number update process (S264). In this process, the sub CPU 102 updates the selected random number and various lottery random numbers (first lottery random number to third lottery random number) for generating the effect random number value. The details of the random number update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 83 described later. Then, after the processing of S264, the sub CPU 102 returns the processing to S262 and repeats the processing after S262.

[Random number update process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 83, the random number update process performed in S264 in the flowchart of the main task (see FIG. 82) will be described. In this embodiment, the random number update process is executed at a cycle of about 4 msec.

In the random number update process, the sub CPU 102 updates various random numbers stored in various random number storage areas provided in the sub RAM 103 (S271). In this process, the sub CPU 102 has a 32-bit selected random number prime number, a first lottery random number prime number, respectively, corresponding to the 16-bit selected random number, the first lottery random number, the second lottery random number, and the third lottery random number. The above-mentioned predetermined arithmetic processing is performed using the second lottery random number prime number and the third lottery random number prime number, and each random number is updated.

Specifically, the sub CPU 102 multiplies each 16-bit random number by a corresponding 32-bit prime number, and converts the multiplication result into 16-bit data (data for 16 bits on the trailing side of the multiplication result). The absolute value of the type-converted data is calculated, leaving only (each random value in the range of 32767 to 32767). As a result, each random number is updated in the range of 0 to 32767. When the values of the updated selected random numbers, the first lottery random number, the second lottery random number, and the third lottery random number become "0", "1" is added to each random number (not). Illustrated). However, in the update process of each random number performed in the generation and acquisition process of the random number value for production described later, "0" as the generated random number value for production is a valid value, so "1" is added to each random number. The process of adding is not performed.

Then, after the processing of S271, the sub CPU 102 ends the random number update processing, and shifts the processing to S262 of the main task (see FIG. 82).

As described above, the random number update process of the present embodiment is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a means (random number updating means) for updating various random numbers at a predetermined cycle.

[Random number acquisition process]
Next, the random number acquisition process will be described with reference to FIG. 84. In the present embodiment, each time various lottery processes (for example, race information lottery process, pseudo BB lottery process, direct addition lottery process, cycle shortening lottery process, push order navigation lottery process, etc., which will be described later) are executed by the sub CPU 102. Then, the random number acquisition processing program described below is called and executed.

First, the sub CPU 102 updates the 16-bit selected random number stored in the selected random number storage area using a 32-bit selected random number prime number, and uses the updated selected random number to generate an effect random number value. Obtained as a selected random number (S281). The selection random number update process of S281 is performed in the same manner as the update process of each random number described in the random number update process of FIG. 83, but the correction process when the value of the selected random number becomes "0" ("" 1 ”the process of adding) is not performed.

Next, the sub CPU 102 divides the selected random number acquired in S281 by "4" and calculates the remainder (S282). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the remainder value is "0" or "1" (S283).

In S283, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the remainder value is "0" or "1" (when the determination in S283 is YES), the sub CPU 102 is the 16-bit stored in the first lottery random number storage area. The first lottery random number is updated using a 32-bit first lottery random number prime number, and the updated first lottery random number is acquired as an effect random number value (0 to 32767) used in the lottery process of the callee (0 to 32767). S284). The update process of the first lottery random number in S284 is performed in the same manner as the update process of each random number described in the random number update process of FIG. 83, but when the value of the first lottery random number becomes "0". The correction process (process of adding "1") is not performed. Then, after the process of S284, the sub CPU 102 ends the random number acquisition process and returns the effect random number value acquired in S284 to the lottery process of the callee.

On the other hand, in S283, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the remainder value is not "0" or "1" (when the determination in S283 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the remainder value is "2". Is determined (S285).

In S285, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the remainder value is "2" (when the determination in S285 is YES), the sub CPU 102 is the 16-bit second lottery random number stored in the second lottery random number storage area. Is updated using a 32-bit second lottery random number prime number, and the updated second lottery random number is acquired as an effect random number value (0 to 32767) used in the callee's lottery process (S286). The second lottery random number update process of S286 is performed in the same manner as the update process of each random number described in the random number update process of FIG. 83, but when the value of the second lottery random number becomes "0". The correction process (process of adding "1") is not performed. Then, after the process of S286, the sub CPU 102 ends the random number acquisition process and returns the effect random number value acquired in S286 to the lottery process of the callee.

On the other hand, in S285, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the remainder value is not "2" (the remainder value is "3") (when the determination in S285 is NO), the sub CPU 102 stores the third lottery random number. The 16-bit third lottery random number stored in the area is updated using the 32-bit third lottery random number prime number, and the updated third lottery random number is used as the effect random number value used in the callee's lottery process ( It is acquired as 0 to 32767) (S287). The third lottery random number update process of S287 is performed in the same manner as the update process of each random number described in the random number update process of FIG. 83, but when the value of the third lottery random number becomes "0". The correction process (process of adding "1") is not performed. Then, after the process of S287, the sub CPU 102 ends the random number acquisition process and returns the effect random number value acquired in S287 to the lottery process of the callee.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the selected random number and various lottery random numbers for generating the random number value for production are updated not only in the random number update process performed in the cycle of about 4 msec, but also in the random number acquisition process. Will be done.

As described above, the random number acquisition process of the present embodiment is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a means for generating an effect random number value (lottery random number generation means). Further, in the above-mentioned random number acquisition process, the selected random number is updated using the prime number for the selected random number, and this process is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a means for updating the selected random number (selected random number updating means) when generating the effect random number value. Further, in the above-mentioned random number acquisition process, a predetermined lottery random number is selected based on the updated selected random number, and this process is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a means for selecting a predetermined lottery random number based on the updated selected random number (lottery random number selection means). Further, in the above-mentioned random number acquisition process, the effect random number value is acquired by updating the selected lottery random number, and this process is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a means for updating the selected lottery random number to acquire the effect random number value (lottery random number value acquisition means).

[Main board communication task]
Next, the main board communication task performed by the sub CPU 102 will be described with reference to FIG. 85. In the mother task of the sub CPU 102 described above (see FIG. 81), when a command to start the main board communication task is generated from the OS in response to a request to start the main board communication task by the sub CPU 102, the main task is followed by the procedure described below. The board communication task is executed.

First, the sub CPU 102 performs a communication message queue initialization process (S291). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a reception command check process (S292). In this process, the sub CPU 102 extracts the type of the received command and the like.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a valid command has been received (S293). In the present embodiment, the command type is associated with any of 16 types of codes "01H" to "10H", and when the game is operating normally, the command type is "01H" to "01H". It becomes one of "10H". Therefore, in the process of S293, if the code of the received command type is any of "01H" to "10H", the sub CPU 102 determines that the command type is valid (specified type). On the other hand, when the command type code is other than "01H" to "10H", the sub CPU 102 determines that some abnormality (including cheating) has occurred during the game, and determines that the command type is invalid. judge.

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S293 that a valid command has not been received (when the determination in S293 is NO), the sub CPU 102 returns the process to S292 and repeats the processes after S292. On the other hand, in S293, when the sub CPU 102 determines that a valid command has been received (when the determination in S293 is YES), the sub CPU 102 generates various game information based on the received command, and the generated various game information. Is stored in the sub RAM 103 (S294).

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a command analysis process (S295). The details of the command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIG. 89 described later.

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a command sequence check process (S296). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not there is an abnormality in the reception order (sequence) of the reception command, and if there is an abnormality in the sequence, performs a predetermined penalty process. The details of the command sequence check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 90 described later. Then, after the processing of S296, the sub CPU 102 returns the processing to S292, and repeats the processing after S292.

[Anime task]
Next, the animation task performed by the sub CPU 102 will be described with reference to FIG. 86. In the mother task of the sub CPU 102 described above (see FIG. 81), when an animation task activation command is generated from the OS in response to the animation task activation request by the sub CPU 102, the animation task is executed according to the procedure described below. To. In this embodiment, the animation task is executed at a cycle of about 33 msec.

First, the sub CPU 102 checks the change of the current game information generated by the main board communication task from the previous game information (S301). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs the object control process (S302).

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs the animation task management process (S303). The details of the animation task management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 87 described later. Then, after the processing of S303, the sub CPU 102 returns the processing to S301 and repeats the processing after S301.

As described above, each process of the animation task of the present embodiment is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a means (image display control means) for controlling the image display operation based on the determined effect.

[Anime task management process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 87, the animation task management process performed in S303 in the flowchart of the animation task (see FIG. 86) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 performs the effect sequence update process (S311). In this process, the sub CPU 102 mainly updates the effect timeline (index of the reproduced image frame).

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a time frame update process (S312). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a predetermined event (for example, start event, rotation start event, reel stop event, display event, etc.) has occurred, and when the event occurs, the start position of the effect sequence is set as the occurrence event. Change to the corresponding position and clear the production timeline. Further, in this process, if there is call sign data associated (linked) with the image frame (time frame) of the effect sequence data in the current effect timeline, the call sign data is provided in the sub RAM 83. It is stored in the call sign storage area.

Next, the sub CPU 102 acquires the call sign data associated with the time frame (S313). If the callsign data associated with the time frame is not stored in the callsign storage area, the callsign data is not acquired in this process.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the call sign data acquired in S313 includes a request for rewriting the sushi material symbol (S314).

In S314, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the call sign data does not include the sushi material symbol rewriting instruction request (when the determination in S314 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S316 described later. On the other hand, in S314, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the call sign data includes a request for rewriting the sushi material symbol (when the determination in S314 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines that the sushi is based on the acquired call sign data. The rewrite display data of the material symbol is acquired, and the rewrite drawing process is registered (S315).

In addition, at the time of processing S315, when the sushi material data conversion generation lottery (S802 during processing at the time of Kappa victory_game start described later in FIG. 127) is won and the rewriting display of the sushi material symbol is confirmed. In the process of S315, a plurality of (five games) of sushi material symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 after the next game are simultaneously rewritten based on the rewritten display data of the sushi material symbols. On the other hand, if the sushi material data conversion generation lottery is not won at the time of the processing of S315, the sushi material symbol is not rewritten because the rewriting display data of the sushi material symbol is not acquired in the processing of S315.

After the processing of S315 or when the determination in S314 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the cycle information (number of remaining cycle games) of the normal game is being displayed (S316).

In S316, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the cycle information of the normal game is not being displayed (when the determination in S316 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the animation task management process and performs the process as an animation task (see FIG. 86). Move to S301.

On the other hand, in S316, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the cycle information of the normal game is being displayed (when the determination in S316 is YES), the sub CPU 102 is 5 from the display of the previous cycle information (number of remaining cycle games). It is determined whether or not the image reproduction time of the frame or more has elapsed (S317). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the elapsed time from the previous display of the cycle information has reached the update display interval of the cycle information.

If the update display interval of the cycle information is set to 1 frame interval, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the change in the cycle information (the number of remaining cycle games). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the update display interval of the cycle information is 5 frames or more. And. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the update display interval of the cycle information can be arbitrarily set as long as the change of the cycle information is visible to the player.

In S317, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the image reproduction time of 5 frames or more has not elapsed since the previous display of the cycle information (when the determination in S317 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the animation task management process. , Move the process to S301 of the animation task (see FIG. 86). On the other hand, in S317, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the image reproduction time of 5 frames or more has elapsed since the previous display of the cycle information (when the determination in S317 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the cycle information display process (when the determination is YES). S318). In this process, the sub CPU 102 updates the cycle information of the normal game (the number of remaining games in the current cycle), and also determines the display form (the subtraction display mode of the number of remaining games). The details of the periodic information display process will be described later with reference to FIG. 88 described later.

Then, after the processing of S318, the sub CPU 102 ends the animation task management processing, and shifts the processing to S301 of the animation task (see FIG. 86).

As described above, the animation task management process S313 of the present embodiment includes a request for rewriting the sushi material symbol associated with a predetermined image frame in the production moving image displayed by the liquid crystal display device 11. The call sign data is acquired, and this process is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a means (change command information acquisition means) for acquiring call sign data including a request for rewriting instruction of the sushi material symbol in the animation task management process. Further, in S315 of the animation task management process described above, when the rewriting display of the sushi material symbol is confirmed and the call sign data including the rewriting instruction request of the sushi material symbol is acquired, the sushi material symbol Is rewritten and displayed, and this process is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a means (additional game information change display means) for rewriting display (change display) of the sushi material symbol based on the call sign data.

[Periodic information display processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 88, the periodic information display process performed in S318 in the flowchart of the animation task management process (see FIG. 87) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the previous cycle counter is different from the value of the cycle counter (S321). The value of the cycle counter indicates the number of games of normal games actually remaining in the current cycle (the true value of the number of remaining cycle games), and the value of the previous cycle counter is the cycle counter at the time of the previous cycle information display processing. Is the value of. Then, for example, when the game shifts to the next game between the previous cycle information display process and the current cycle information display process, or when the cycle counter value is subtracted by winning the cycle shortening lottery. The value of the previous cycle counter is different from the value of the cycle counter, and S321 is determined to be YES.

In S321, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the previous cycle counter does not differ from the value of the cycle counter (when the determination in S321 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the cycle information display process and also performs the animation task management process. (See FIG. 87) also ends. On the other hand, in S321, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the previous cycle counter is different from the value of the cycle counter (when the determination in S321 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the value of the previous cycle counter to the value of the display cycle counter. It is determined whether or not they are the same (S322). The value of the display cycle counter is the value of the number of remaining cycle games displayed on the liquid crystal screen of the liquid crystal display device 11.

For example, if the current cycle information display process is performed immediately after the game shifts to the next game, or immediately after the cycle counter value is subtracted by winning the cycle shortening lottery, the previous time. Since the value of the cycle counter is the same as the value of the display cycle counter, S322 is determined to be YES. Further, for example, after winning the cycle shortening lottery, the cycle information is displayed in the middle of the operation of subtracting and displaying (counting down) the number of remaining cycle games displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 at a predetermined subtraction game number interval (subtraction display interval). When the display process is performed, the value of the previous cycle counter is different from the value of the display cycle counter, so that S322 is determined as NO.

In S322, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the previous cycle counter is different from the value of the display cycle counter (when the determination in S322 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S324 described later. On the other hand, in S322, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the previous cycle counter is the same as the value of the display cycle counter (when the determination in S322 is YES), the sub CPU 102 remains displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. The subtraction display interval (predetermined unit game number interval) when the number of periodic games is subtracted and displayed is determined (S323).

In the subtraction display interval determination process of S323, for example, the value obtained by subtracting the value of the cycle counter from the value of the previous cycle counter (corresponding to the number of shortened games when winning the cycle shortening lottery) is divided by "30". Then, the value obtained by adding "1" to the quotient obtained by the division is used as the subtraction display interval. For example, when the number of shortened games of 100 games is won in the cycle shortening lottery, the subtraction display interval is "4" (quotient of 100/30 + 1). Further, for example, when the number of shortened games won by the cycle shortening lottery is 20 games, the subtraction display interval is "1" (20/30 quotient + 1).

After the processing of S323 or when the determination in S322 is NO, the sub CPU 102 sets the value obtained by subtracting the subtraction display interval from the value of the display cycle counter as the value of the display cycle counter (S324). By this process, the value of the display cycle counter is updated, and the number of remaining cycle games of the normal game displayed on the liquid crystal screen of the liquid crystal display device 11 is also subtracted. In the update process of the display cycle counter of S324 performed when S322 determines NO, the subtraction display interval at the time of the previous cycle information display process is used.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the cycle counter is equal to or greater than the value of the display cycle counter (S325). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of remaining cycle games scheduled to be displayed on the liquid crystal screen of the liquid crystal display device 11 is less than the true value of the number of remaining cycle games of the normal game currently actually remaining. To determine.

In S325, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the cycle counter is not equal to or greater than the value of the display cycle counter (when the determination in S325 is NO), that is, the number of remaining cycle games of the normal game scheduled to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 is If the value is not less than the true value of the number of remaining cycle games that actually remain, the sub CPU 102 ends the cycle information display process and also ends the animation task management process (see FIG. 87). To do.

On the other hand, in S325, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the cycle counter is equal to or greater than the value of the display cycle counter (when the determination in S325 is YES), that is, the remaining cycle of the normal game scheduled to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. When the number of games is less than the true value of the number of remaining cycle games that are actually remaining, the sub CPU 102 sets the value of the cycle counter to the previous cycle counter (S326).

Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the value of the cycle counter in the display cycle counter (S327). By this process, the true value of the number of remaining cycle games of the normal game that is actually remaining is displayed on the liquid crystal screen of the liquid crystal display device 11. That is, when the number of remaining cycle games of the normal game scheduled to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 is less than the true value of the number of remaining cycle games, the true value of the number of remaining cycle games of the normal game is the liquid crystal display device 11. Is displayed on the LCD screen of. Then, after the process of S327, the sub CPU 102 ends the cycle information display process and also ends the animation task management process (see FIG. 87).

As described above, in the cycle information display process of the present embodiment, when the cycle shortening lottery during the normal game is won, the number of remaining cycle games is subtracted and displayed at a predetermined subtraction game number interval (subtraction display interval). This process is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, when the sub-control circuit 101 wins the cycle shortening lottery during the normal game, the remaining cycle game number (remaining unit game number) of the normal game is subtracted and displayed at predetermined unit game number intervals. It also serves as a means (subtraction display control means). Further, in the cycle information display process described above, the interval of the number of subtraction games when the number of remaining cycle games is subtracted and displayed is determined based on the number of winning shortened games, and this process is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a means for determining the subtraction game number interval (subtraction display interval determination means) based on the number of winning shortened games.

[Command analysis processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 89, the command analysis process performed in S295 in the flowchart of the main board communication task (see FIG. 85) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 performs the effect content determination process (S331). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines the effect content according to the received data. The details of the effect content determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 91 and 92, which will be described later.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not there is an effect determined in the effect content determination process of S331 (S332).

In S332, when the sub CPU 102 determines that there is no determined effect (when the determination in S332 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the command analysis process and performs the process in S296 of the main board communication task (see FIG. 85). Move to. On the other hand, in S332, when the sub CPU 102 determines that there is a determined effect (when the determination in S332 is YES), the sub CPU 102 acquires the effect sequence data (effect moving image data) based on the determined effect. (S333).

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a lamp data determination process (S334). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines predetermined lamp data according to the effect content determined in S331. Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a sound data determination process (S335). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines predetermined sound data according to the effect content determined in S331.

Next, the sub CPU 102 registers various determined data (S336). Then, after the processing of S336, the sub CPU 102 ends the command analysis processing, and shifts the processing to S296 of the main board communication task (see FIG. 85).

[Command sequence check processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 90, the command sequence check process performed in S296 in the flowchart of the main board communication task (see FIG. 85) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the received command is a command to be determined in the command sequence (command reception order) (S341).

When the player is playing the game in a normal operation, the order is usually "BET", "start", "reel rotation start", "stop", "design combination display", and "medal payout" (hereinafter, "medal payout"). The operations are performed in the basic order), and commands of the type corresponding to each operation are transmitted to the sub CPU 102 in this basic order. Therefore, the determination target command in the process of S341 is a medal insertion command (BET command), a start command, a reel rotation start command, a reel stop command, a winning operation command (display command), and a payout end command. The present invention is not limited to this, and the command to be determined in the command sequence may include a bonus start command, a bonus end command, and the like.

In S341, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the received command is not the command to be determined in the command sequence (when the determination in S341 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the command sequence check process and performs the process on the main board communication task (main board communication task). (See FIG. 85).

On the other hand, in S341, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the received command is the command to be determined in the command sequence (when the determination in S341 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the command sequence determination process (S342). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the reception order of the determination target commands is a predetermined order (order at the time of normal operation).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not there is an abnormality in the command sequence based on the result of the determination process in S342 (S343). In S343, when the sub CPU 102 determines that there is no abnormality in the command sequence (when the determination in S343 is NO), that is, when the game is performed in a normal operation, the sub CPU 102 performs the command sequence check process. When finished, the process is transferred to S292 of the main board communication task (see FIG. 85).

On the other hand, in S343, when the sub CPU 102 determines that there is an abnormality in the command sequence (when the determination in S343 is YES), that is, when it is determined that some abnormality (including cheating) has occurred during the game. , The sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (current) is "general", "racing", "general BB", or "AT BB" (S344).

When it is determined in S344 that the sub CPU 102 does not satisfy the determination condition of S344 (when the determination in S344 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the command sequence check process and performs the process in the main board communication task (see FIG. 85). Move to S292. On the other hand, in S344, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determination condition of S344 is satisfied (when the determination in S344 is YES), the sub CPU 102 adds "5" to the current number of penalty games (S345). If the number of penalty games after addition exceeds "10" (upper limit of the number of penalty games) by this addition process, the sub CPU 102 sets "10" to the number of penalty games.

After the process of S345, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (current) is "race in", "general BB", or "AT in BB" (S346).

When it is determined in S346 that the sub CPU 102 does not satisfy the determination condition of S346 (when the determination in S346 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the command sequence check process and performs the process in the main board communication task (see FIG. 85). Move to S292. On the other hand, in S346, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determination condition of S346 is satisfied (when the determination in S346 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the "BB entry check flag" is in the ON state (S347). ). The BB rush check flag is a flag provided for checking the occurrence of an event called "command spill" due to a goto act (illegal act). Then, when a command spill occurs, the BB rush check flag is turned off, which creates a state in which the pseudo BB game is not started.

In S347, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BB inrush check flag is not in the ON state (when the determination in S347 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the command sequence check process and performs the process on the main board communication task (see FIG. 85). ) S292. On the other hand, in S347, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BB entry check flag is in the ON state (when the determination in S347 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns the penalty flag in the ON state (S348). Then, after the processing of S348, the sub CPU 102 ends the command sequence check processing, and shifts the processing to S292 of the main board communication task (see FIG. 85).

[Production content determination process]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 91 and 92, the effect content determination process performed in S331 in the flowchart of the command analysis process (see FIG. 89) will be described. The production data determined (registered) in the following processing is data for designating animation data, sound data, and lamp data. Therefore, when the effect data is registered in each of the following processes, the corresponding animation data, sound data, lamp data, and the like are determined, and the effects such as video display, audio reproduction, and lamp on / off are executed.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is the time when the initialization command is received (S351).

In S351, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the initialization command has been received (YES in S351), the sub CPU 102 performs the initialization command reception process (S352). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines (registers) the effect data at the time of the initialization process based on the information included in the initialization command, such as whether or not the set value is changed and the set value. In addition, various game information (number of digested games, etc.) is also reset in the processing when the initialization command is received. The details of the processing at the time of receiving the initialization command will be described later with reference to FIG. 93 described later. Then, after the processing of S352, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination processing, and shifts the processing to S332 of the command analysis processing (see FIG. 89).

On the other hand, in S351, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not the time when the initialization command is received (when the determination in S351 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is the time when the medal insertion command is received (S353).

In S353, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the medal insertion command is received (YES in S353), the sub CPU 102 performs the medal insertion command reception processing (S354). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines the effect data at the time of medal insertion (at the time of betting) based on the information included in the medal insertion command, for example, the presence / absence of medal insertion, the value of the insertion count counter, the value of the credit counter, and the like. (sign up. The details of the process at the time of receiving the medal insertion command will be described later with reference to FIG. 95 described later. Then, after the processing of S354, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination processing, and shifts the processing to S332 of the command analysis processing (see FIG. 89).

On the other hand, in S353, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not the time when the medal insertion command is received (when the determination in S353 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is the time when the start command is received (S355).

In S355, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the start command is received (YES in S355), the sub CPU 102 performs the start command reception process (S356). In this process, the sub CPU 102 includes information included in the start command, for example, the type of the game state flag, the value of the bonus end number counter, the type of the internal winning combination, the type of the flag related to the lock effect, the value of the effect timer, and the like. Based on, the production data at the start of the game (at the start) is determined (registered). The details of the process at the time of receiving the start command will be described later with reference to FIG. 96 described later. Then, after the processing of S356, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination processing, and shifts the processing to S332 of the command analysis processing (see FIG. 89).

On the other hand, in S355, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not the time when the start command is received (when the determination in S355 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is the time when the reel rotation start command is received (S357).

In S357, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the reel rotation start command is received (YES in S357), the sub CPU 102 performs the reel rotation start command reception processing (S358). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines (registers) the effect data at the start of reel rotation based on the reel rotation start command. Then, after the processing of S358, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination processing, and shifts the processing to S332 of the command analysis processing (see FIG. 89).

On the other hand, in S357, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not the time when the reel rotation start command is received (when the determination in S357 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is the time when the reel stop command is received (S359).

In S359, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the reel stop command has been received (YES in S359), the sub CPU 102 performs the reel stop command reception processing (S360). In this process, the sub CPU 102 outputs the effect data at the time of reel stop based on the information included in the reel stop command, for example, the type of the stop reel (operation stop button), the stop start position, the number of sliding pieces, the effect number, and the like. Decide (register). The details of the processing at the time of receiving the reel stop command will be described later with reference to FIG. 136 described later. Then, after the processing of S360, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination processing, and shifts the processing to S332 of the command analysis processing (see FIG. 89).

On the other hand, in S359, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not the time when the reel stop command is received (when the determination in S359 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is the time when the winning operation command is received (S361).

In S361, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the winning operation command is received (YES in S361), the sub CPU 102 performs the winning operation command receiving processing (S362). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines (registers) the effect data at the time of the winning operation based on the information included in the winning operation command, for example, the type of the display combination, the flag related to the lock effect, the number of medals to be paid out, and the like. .. The details of the processing at the time of receiving the winning operation command will be described later with reference to FIG. 139 described later. Then, after the processing of S362, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination processing, and shifts the processing to S332 of the command analysis processing (see FIG. 89).

On the other hand, in S361, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not the time when the winning operation command is received (when the determination in S361 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is the time when the payout end command is received (S363).

In S363, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is the time when the payout end command is received (when the determination in S363 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the process when the payout end command is received (S364). In this process, the sub CPU 102 requests the lighting of the LED provided on the MAX bet button 21 according to the number of credits of the current medal. The details of the processing at the time of receiving the payout end command will be described later with reference to FIG. 145 described later. Then, after the processing of S364, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination processing, and shifts the processing to S332 of the command analysis processing (see FIG. 89).

On the other hand, in S363, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not the time when the payout end command is received (when the determination in S363 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it is the time when the bonus start command is received (S365).

In S365, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is the time when the bonus start command is received (when the determination in S365 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the process when the bonus start command is received (S366). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines (registers) the effect data at the start of the bonus based on the bonus start command. Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the current number of credits for the medal is two or more (S367).

In S367, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of credits of the current medal is not two or more (when the determination in S367 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process and performs the process for command analysis process (FIG. FIG. Move to S332 of (see 89). On the other hand, in S367, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of credits of the current medal is two or more (when the determination in S367 is YES), the sub CPU 102 requests the LED provided on the MAX bet button 21 to light. (S368). Then, after the processing of S368, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination processing, and shifts the processing to S332 of the command analysis processing (see FIG. 89).

Here, returning to the process of S365 again, when it is determined in S365 that the sub CPU 102 is not at the time of receiving the bonus start command (when the determination of S365 is NO), is the sub CPU 102 at the time of receiving the bonus end command? Whether or not it is determined (S369).

In S369, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is the time when the bonus end command is received (when the determination in S369 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the process when the bonus end command is received (S370). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines (registers) the effect data at the end of the bonus based on the bonus end command. Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the current number of credits for the medal is 3 or more (S371).

In S371, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of credits of the current medal is not 3 or more (when the determination in S371 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process and performs the process for command analysis process (FIG. FIG. Move to S332 of (see 89). On the other hand, in S371, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of credits of the current medal is 3 or more (when the determination in S371 is YES), the sub CPU 102 requests the LED provided on the MAX bet button 21 to light. (S372). Then, after the processing of S372, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination processing, and shifts the processing to S332 of the command analysis processing (see FIG. 89).

Here, returning to the process of S369 again, when it is determined in S369 that the sub CPU 102 is not at the time of receiving the bonus end command (when the determination of S369 is NO), is the sub CPU 102 at the time of receiving the no-operation command? Whether or not it is determined (S373).

In S373, when the sub CPU 102 determines that it is not the time when the no-operation command is received (when the determination in S373 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination process and performs the process in the command analysis process (see FIG. 89) S332. Move to.

On the other hand, in S373, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the non-operation command is received (YES in S373), the sub CPU 102 performs the non-operation command reception process (S374).

The non-operation command is transmitted from the main control circuit 71 to the sub control circuit 72 at a cycle of about 16 msec when there is no other command transmitted from the main control circuit 71. Then, in the non-operation command reception processing, the sub CPU 102 subsulates the input port state information of each operation unit (for example, on / off information of the BET switch 77, the start switch 78, etc.) included in the non-operation command. It is stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 103. Further, in this process, various processes related to the determination of the number of AT start games are also performed based on the information of the input port state of each operation unit. The details of the non-operation command reception processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 146, which will be described later. Then, after the processing of S374, the sub CPU 102 ends the effect content determination processing, and shifts the processing to S332 of the command analysis processing (see FIG. 89).

[Processing when initialization command is received]
Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the initialization command reception processing performed in S352 in the flowchart of the effect content determination processing (see FIGS. 91 and 92) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 initializes the ball output related variable (S381). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets "general middle" in the gaming state (previous), the gaming state (current), and the gaming state (next time), respectively. Further, in this process, the sub CPU 102 also resets various game information (number of digested games, etc.), for example, sets the value of the cycle counter to "180" (resets the number of remaining cycle games of the normal game).

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a race information lottery process (S382). The details of the race information lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 94 described later. Then, after the process of S382, the sub CPU 102 ends the process at the time of receiving the initialization command and also ends the effect content determination process (see FIGS. 91 and 92).

As described above, in the initialization command reception processing of the present embodiment, various game information (number of digestion games, etc.) is reset, and this processing is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a means for initializing various game information (game information initialization means) when an initialization command is received.

[Race information lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the race information lottery process performed in S382 in the flowchart (see FIG. 93) of the process at the time of receiving the initialization command will be described. In this race information lottery process, various information related to the race production of the character performed in the transition effect game is determined by lottery.

First, the sub CPU 102 refers to the race runner MAP lottery table (see FIG. 32) and performs the race runner MAP lottery process (S391). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the value (MAP number) of the lottery result of the race runner MAP lottery process to the "race runner MAP" (S392).

Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the race information MAP data table (see FIG. 33), and based on the value of "race runner MAP" (race information MAP number), the winner lottery table corresponding to the race information MAP data. The type (target tables A to J) of (see FIG. 34) is determined (S393). In this process, based on the set race runner MAP (race information MAP) value, the "target table" (target table) corresponding to the race information MAP data up to 4 races ahead (1st to 5th races). Any of A to J) is determined.

Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the determined "target table" for the first to fifth races (S394). Then, the sub CPU 102 performs a lottery process for the race winners (candidates) from the first race to the fifth race based on the "target table" from the first race to the fifth race set in S394 ( S395).

Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of the winner lottery process to the "race winner" (S396). By this processing, any of the race winners from the 1st race to the 5th race ("male A", "male B", "female A", "tengu", "kappa" and "male A / male B" Is set as the "race winner".

Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the race win rate MAP lottery table (see FIG. 35) and performs the race win rate MAP lottery process (S397). In this process, the sub CPU 102 defines the race win rate MAP of the "race winner" (race winner) set in S396 based on the current set value (any of 1 to 6). To decide. Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result (race win rate MAP) of the race win rate MAP lottery process in the "race win rate map" (S398).

Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the race win rate MAP data table (see FIG. 36) and acquires the race win rate data corresponding to the set “race win rate map” (S399). In this process, as shown in FIG. 36, only the race win rate data of the current set race (first race) may be determined, or the race win rate data of the second and subsequent races may also be determined. is there. Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the race win rate data acquired in S399 (S400).

Then, after the processing of S400, the sub CPU 102 ends the race information lottery processing, and also ends the initialization command reception processing (see FIG. 93). As described above, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the initialization command is received (when the information regarding the content of the race effect is not set in the initial state), the race victory target of the race effect executed in the transition effect game. (Candidate) and their winning percentage are determined.

As described above, in the race information lottery process of the present embodiment, information on the content of the race production is determined from the first race to the fifth race (four sets ahead of the current set) at the start of the game period of the normal game. This process is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 is a means for determining information regarding the production content of each transition effect game performed after the end of the normal game from the current set to four sets ahead at the start of the game period of the normal game ( It also serves as a means of determining the transition effect).

[Processing when receiving medal insertion command]
Next, with reference to FIG. 95, the medal insertion command reception processing performed in S354 in the flowchart of the effect content determination processing (see FIGS. 91 and 92) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 acquires information on the number of inserted medals and the number of credits based on the reception parameter included in the received medal insertion command (S401). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (the gaming state managed by the main CPU 93) is the non-MB state (S402).

In S402, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state is the non-MB state (when the determination in S402 is YES), the sub CPU 102 refers to the MAX bet button point extinguishing determination table during non-MB (see FIG. 61). , The lighting or extinguishing of the LED provided on the MAX bet button 21 is determined based on the information on the number of inserted medals and the number of credits (S403). On the other hand, in S402, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state is not the non-MB state (when the determination in S402 is NO), the sub CPU 102 refers to the MAX bet button point extinguishing determination table in MB (see FIG. 62). , The lighting or extinguishing of the LED provided on the MAX bet button 21 is determined based on the information on the number of inserted medals and the number of credits (S404).

After the processing of S403 or the processing of S404, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the determination result of S403 or S404 is the lighting of the LED provided on the MAX bet button 21 (S405).

In S405, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determination result is the lighting of the LED (when the determination in S405 is YES), the sub CPU 102 makes a lighting request to the LED provided on the MAX bet button 21 (S406). Then, after the processing of S406, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of receiving the medal insertion command, and also ends the effect content determination processing (see FIGS. 91 and 92).

On the other hand, in S405, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determination result is not the lighting of the LED (when the determination in S405 is NO), the sub CPU 102 requests the LED provided in the MAX bet button 21 to be turned off (S407). .. Then, after the processing of S407, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of receiving the medal insertion command, and also ends the effect content determination processing (see FIGS. 91 and 92).

By the ON ON OFF control process of the LED of the MAX bet button 21 in the above-mentioned processing at the time of receiving the medal insertion command, the LED of the MAX bet button 21 is turned on in synchronization with the valid / invalid determination of the player's pressing operation on the MAX bet button 21. / Can be turned off.

As described above, in the medal insertion command reception processing of the present embodiment, the lighting / extinguishing control of the LED provided on the MAX bet button 21 is performed based on the information of the number of inserted medals and the number of credits (stored number). Is performed, and this process is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a means (light emission control means) for controlling the lighting / extinguishing of the LED provided on the MAX bet button 21 based on the information on the number of inserted medals and the number of credits. ..

[Processing when receiving start command]
Next, with reference to FIG. 96, the process at the time of receiving the start command performed in S356 in the flowchart of the effect content determination process (see FIGS. 91 and 92) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 performs a variable setting process (S411). In this process, the sub CPU 102 performs setting processing of various variables (various flags, counters, etc.) used for effect control according to the type of the sub game state. The details of the variable setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98 described later.

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a ball ejection state update process (S412). In this process, the sub CPU 102 updates the game state (previous), game state (current), and game state (next time) information. The details of the ball ejection state update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 108 described later.

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a Bns (bonus) state update process (S413). In this process, the sub CPU 102 performs setting processing of various variables (various flags, counters, etc.) used for effect control according to the type of the pseudo BB state. The details of the Bns state update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 109 described later.

The types of pseudo BB states managed in this embodiment are "at the time of BB winning", "between BB flags", "waiting for BB operation", "in BB", "in JAC", "in ChaBB", and "in ChaJAC". There are 7 types. In addition, "between BB flags" indicates a state in which the pseudo BB game is being carried over, and "during JAC" indicates a state of "JACGAME guaranteed section". Further, "in ChaBB" indicates the state of the "JACIN challenge section" in the "general medium BB", and "during ChaJAC" indicates the state of the "JACIN challenge section" in the "AT during BB".

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub-game state is at the start of the game of "general middle" (hereinafter, referred to as "general middle_game start") (S414).

In S414, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is "general middle_game start time" (when S414 is YES determination), the sub CPU 102 performs general middle_game start time processing (S415). .. The details of the general middle-game start processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118 described later. Then, after the processing of S415, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S426 described later.

On the other hand, in S414, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is not "general middle_game start" (when S414 is NO determination), the sub CPU 102 has a game in which the sub game state is "general middle BB". It is determined whether or not it is at the start (hereinafter, referred to as "general middle BB_game start") (S416).

In S416, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is "at the start of the general middle BB_game" (when the determination in S416 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the process at the start of the general middle BB_game (S417). .. The details of the processing at the start of the general BB_game will be described later with reference to FIG. 120 described later. Then, after the processing of S417, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S426 described later.

On the other hand, in S416, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is not "at the start of the general BB_game" (when the determination in S416 is NO), the sub CPU 102 starts the game in which the sub game state is "during the race". It is determined whether or not it is time (hereinafter, referred to as "during the race_at the start of the game") (S418).

In S418, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is "during the race_at the start of the game" (when the determination in S418 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the process during the race_at the start of the game (S419). .. The details of the process at the start of the game during the race will be described later with reference to FIG. 124 described later. Then, after the processing of S419, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S426 described later.

On the other hand, in S418, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is not "during the race_at the start of the game" (when the determination in S418 is NO), the sub CPU 102 has the sub game state "preparing for AT". It is determined whether or not it is at the start (hereinafter, referred to as "AT preparation_at the start of the game") (S420).

In S420, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is "AT preparation_game start time" (when the determination in S420 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs AT preparation_game start time processing (AT preparation in progress_game start time processing). S421). The details of the AT preparation _ game start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 125 described later. Then, after the processing of S421, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S426 described later.

On the other hand, in S420, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is not "AT preparation_at the start of the game" (when the determination in S420 is NO), the sub CPU 102 has a game in which the sub game state is "AT". It is determined whether or not it is at the start (hereinafter, referred to as "during AT_at the start of the game") (S422).

In S422, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is "during AT_at the start of the game" (when the determination in S422 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the process at the time of the start of the AT_game (S423). .. The details of the process during AT_game start will be described later with reference to FIG. 128 described later. Then, after the processing of S423, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S426 described later.

On the other hand, in S422, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is not "AT in _ game start" (when S422 is NO determination), the sub CPU 102 has a game in which the sub game state is "AT in BB". It is determined whether or not it is at the start (hereinafter, referred to as "BB_game start during AT") (S424).

In S424, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is "at the start of the BB_game during AT" (when the determination in S424 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the process at the start of the BB_game during the AT (S425). .. The details of the BB_game start processing during AT will be described later with reference to FIG. 129 described later. Then, after the processing of S425, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S426 described later.

On the other hand, in S424, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is not "at the start of BB_game during AT" (when the determination in S424 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S426 described later.

After processing S415, S417, S419, S421, S423 or S425, or when S424 is a NO determination, the sub CPU 102 performs BB precursor counter management processing (S426). In this process, the sub CPU 102 subtracts the value of the BB precursor counter indicating the number of remaining precursor games until the activation of the pseudo BB game.

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a game state setting process (S427). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets the game state (next time). The details of the game state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 130 described later. Then, after the processing of S427, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of receiving the start command, and also ends the effect content determination processing (see FIGS. 91 and 92).

Although not shown in FIG. 96, in the series of iterative processing of the above-mentioned sub-game state determination process and game start process during the start command reception process, the sub-game state is actually "W chance". Judgment processing of whether or not it is, and game start processing of "W chance in progress", judgment processing of whether or not the sub-game state is "additional challenge in progress", and game start processing of "additional challenge in progress" are also performed. It is said.

[Variable setting process]
Next, the variable setting process performed in S411 in the flowchart of the start command reception process (see FIG. 96) will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the game state (next time) is "general" (S431).

In S431, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (next time) is "general middle" (when the determination in S431 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the general middle_variable setting process (S432). The details of the general medium_variable setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 99 described later. Then, after the processing of S432, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S441 described later.

On the other hand, in S431, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (next time) is not "general" (when the determination in S431 is NO), the sub CPU 102 is in the pseudo BB ("general"). It is determined whether or not it is "BB" or "BB during AT" (S433).

In S433, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (next time) is in the pseudo BB (when the determination in S433 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the _ variable setting process in the BB (S434). The details of the _variable setting process in BB will be described later with reference to FIG. 100 described later. Then, after the processing of S434, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S441 described later.

On the other hand, in S433, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (next time) is not in the pseudo BB (when the determination in S433 is NO), is the sub CPU 102 in the gaming state (next time) "AT preparing"? Whether or not it is determined (S435).

In S435, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the game state (next time) is "AT preparing" (when the determination in S435 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the AT preparing_variable setting process (S436). The details of the AT preparation_variable setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 101 described later. Then, after the processing of S436, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S441 described later.

On the other hand, in S435, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (next time) is not "AT preparing" (when the determination in S435 is NO), the sub CPU 102 has the gaming state (next time) "AT in progress". Whether or not it is determined (S437).

In S437, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (next time) is "AT in progress" (when the determination in S437 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the AT-in-AT_variable setting process (S438). The details of the _variable setting process during AT will be described later with reference to FIG. 102 described later. Then, after the processing of S438, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S441 described later.

On the other hand, in S437, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (next time) is not "AT" (when the determination in S437 is NO), is the sub CPU 102 "racing" in the gaming state (next time)? Whether or not it is determined (S439).

In S439, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (next time) is not "during the race" (when the determination in S439 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S441 described later. On the other hand, in S439, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (next time) is "during the race" (when the determination in S439 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the _variable setting process during the race (S440). The details of the _variable setting process during the race will be described later with reference to FIG. 103 described later. Then, after the processing of S440, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S441 described later.

After processing S432, S434, S436, S438 or S440, or when S439 is a NO determination, the sub CPU 102 describes the game state (currently) as "general" at the end of the game (hereinafter, "general end"). ) (S441).

In S441, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is "at the time of general termination" (when the determination in S441 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the general termination_variable setting process (S442). The details of the general end_variable setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 104 described later. Then, after the processing of S442, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S449 described later.

On the other hand, in S441, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not "at the time of general end" (when the determination in S441 is NO), the sub CPU 102 has the gaming state (current) of "general middle BB". It is determined whether or not it is at the end of the game (hereinafter, referred to as "at the end of general BB") (S443).

In S443, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is "at the end of the general middle BB" (when the determination in S443 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the general middle BB end_variable setting process. (S444). The details of the _variable setting process at the end of the general BB will be described later with reference to FIG. 105 described later. Then, after the processing of S444, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S449 described later.

On the other hand, in S443, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not "at the end of the general BB" (when the determination in S443 is NO), the sub CPU 102 has the gaming state (current) "racing". It is determined whether or not it is at the end of the game (hereinafter, referred to as "at the end of the race") (S445).

In S445, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is "at the end of the race" (when the determination in S445 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the _variable setting process at the end of the race (S446). The details of the _variable setting process at the end of the race will be described later with reference to FIG. 106 described later. Then, after the processing of S446, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S449 described later.

On the other hand, in S445, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not "at the end of the race" (when the determination in S445 is NO), the sub CPU 102 has the gaming state (current) "AT in BB". It is determined whether or not it is at the end of the game (hereinafter, referred to as "at the end of BB during AT") (S447).

In S447, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not "at the end of BB during AT" (when the determination in S447 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S449 described later. On the other hand, in S447, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is "at the end of the BB during AT" (when the determination in S447 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the _ variable setting process at the end of the BB during AT. (S448). The details of the _variable setting process at the end of BB during AT will be described later with reference to FIG. 107 described later. Then, after the processing of S448, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S449 described later.

After processing S442, S444, S446 or S448, or when S447 is determined to be NO, the sub CPU 102 initializes the "AT direct addition G (game) number" (S449). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets "0" to the number of additional AT games. Then, after the processing of S449, the sub CPU 102 ends the variable setting processing, and shifts the processing to S412 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 96).

Further, although not shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, in the series of iterative processing of the above-mentioned game state (next time) determination process and variable setting process during the variable setting process, the game state (next time) is actually set to ". Judgment processing of whether or not it is either "W chance in progress" or "additional challenge in progress" and variable setting processing in these sub-game states are also performed. In the variable setting process when the game state (next time) is "W chance", "5" is set as the number of bell navigations.

Further, although not shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, in the series of iterative processing of the above-mentioned game state (current) determination process and variable setting process during the variable setting process, the game state (current) is actually set to ". Judgment processing of whether or not it is either "W chance in progress" or "additional challenge in progress" and variable setting processing in these sub-game states are also performed. In the variable setting process when the game state (current) is "W chance in progress", "5" is set as the number of bell navigations.

[General middle_variable setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 99, the general medium_variable setting process performed in S432 in the flowchart of the variable setting process (see FIGS. 97 and 98) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (next time) (“general middle”) (S451).

In S451, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not different from the gaming state (next time) (when the determination in S451 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the general middle_variable setting process and performs the process. Move to S441 of the variable setting process (see FIGS. 97 and 98). On the other hand, in S451, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (next time) (when the determination in S451 is YES), the sub CPU 102 has the gaming state (current) "in race". It is determined whether or not there is (S452).

In S452, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not "race in progress" (when the determination in S452 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the general middle_variable setting process and performs the process as the variable setting process. Move to S441 (see FIGS. 97 and 98).

On the other hand, in S452, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the game state (current) is "race in progress" (when the determination in S452 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines the next cycle (inn point) based on the "accommodation point". The number of shortened games (the number of next shortened games) in the non-AT state of the next set) is calculated (S453).

The "inn points" are the total number of shortened games generated by the cycle shortening lottery (which may be performed multiple times) performed during the normal game of the current cycle (current set), and the total number of shortened games. Corresponds to the total number of games of the total number of shortened games for the surplus generated by the pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery (which may be performed multiple times) performed during the pseudo BB game.

Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the cycle counter to "180" (S454). Next, the sub CPU 102 subtracts the number of next shortened games calculated in S453 from the value of the cycle counter (180) (S455). By this process, the subtraction result is set as the number of staying games in the normal state in the next set. Then, after the process of S455, the sub CPU 102 ends the general middle_variable setting process, and shifts the process to S441 of the variable setting process (see FIGS. 97 and 98).

As described above, in S455 of the general middle_variable setting process of the present embodiment, the number of set games (180 games) of the normal game of the next set to the number of next shortened games (the number of shortened games of the surplus in the current set). Is performed, and this process is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a means (game number subtraction means) for subtracting the number of shortened games for the surplus from the number of set games of the normal game of the next set.

[In BB_variable setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 100, the _ variable setting process in BB performed in S434 in the flowchart of the variable setting process (see FIGS. 97 and 98) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (next time) (“general BB” or “AT BB”) (S461).

In S461, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not different from the gaming state (next time) (when the determination in S461 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the _ variable setting process in BB and performs the process. Move to S441 of the variable setting process (see FIGS. 97 and 98). On the other hand, in S461, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (next time) (when the determination in S461 is YES), the value of the BB precursor counter of the sub CPU 102 is "0". Whether or not it is determined (S462).

In S462, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the BB precursor counter is not "0" (when the determination in S462 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the _ variable setting process in the BB and performs the process as the variable setting process (when the process is determined to be NO). Move to S441 of (see FIGS. 97 and 98).

On the other hand, in S462, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the BB precursor counter is "0" (when the determination in S462 is YES), the sub CPU 102 resets the value of the BB precursor counter ("-1"). Set) (S463). Then, after the process of S463, the sub CPU 102 ends the _variable setting process in BB, and shifts the process to S441 of the variable setting process (see FIGS. 97 and 98).

[AT preparation_variable setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 101, the AT preparing_variable setting process performed in S436 in the flowchart of the variable setting process (see FIGS. 97 and 98) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (next time) (“AT preparing”) (S471).

In S471, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not different from the gaming state (next time) (when the determination in S471 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the AT preparation _ variable setting process and processes it. To S441 of the variable setting process (see FIGS. 97 and 98). On the other hand, in S471, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (next time) (when the determination in S471 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the "race victory flag" and the "race runner map". , "Race win rate map" and "Race consecutive loss counter" (S472).

The "race victory flag" is a flag indicating whether or not the set "race winner" (race winner (candidate)) wins in the race production, and when the "race winner" wins the race, , "1" is set in the "race victory flag". Further, the "race consecutive loss counter" is a counter that manages the number of times that the set "race winner" is continuously defeated in the race production (the number of times that the AT is not won in succession). In this embodiment, if the "race winner" loses in the race production 10 times in a row (at the ceiling), the AT wins.

Then, after the processing of S472, the sub CPU 102 ends the AT preparing_variable setting processing, and shifts the processing to S441 of the variable setting processing (see FIGS. 97 and 98).

[AT _ variable setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 102, the AT-variable setting process performed in S438 in the flowchart of the variable setting process (see FIGS. 97 and 98) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (next time) (“AT preparing”) (S481). In S481, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not different from the gaming state (next time) (when the determination in S481 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the _ variable setting process during AT and performs the process. Move to S441 of the variable setting process (see FIGS. 97 and 98).

On the other hand, in S481, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (next time) (when the determination in S481 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the number of penalty games to "0" ( S482). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the value of the penalty counter to "0" (S483).

Next, the sub CPU 102 turns off the penalty flag (S484). Then, after the process of S484, the sub CPU 102 ends the _variable setting process during AT, and shifts the process to S441 of the variable setting process (see FIGS. 97 and 98).

[During the race_variable setting process]
Next, the in-race_variable setting process performed in S440 in the flowchart of the variable setting process (see FIGS. 97 and 98) will be described with reference to FIG. 103.

The sub CPU 102 sets the value of the penalty counter to "0" (S491). Then, after the process of S491, the sub CPU 102 ends the _variable setting process during the race, and shifts the process to S441 of the variable setting process (see FIGS. 97 and 98).

[At general end_variable setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 104, the general termination_variable setting process performed in S442 in the flowchart of the variable setting process (see FIGS. 97 and 98) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (current) (“at the time of general end”) is different from the gaming state (next time) (S501).

In S501, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not different from the gaming state (next time) (when the determination in S501 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the general termination_variable setting process and processes it. To S449 of the variable setting process (see FIGS. 97 and 98). On the other hand, in S501, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (next time) (when the determination in S501 is YES), the sub CPU 102 clears the "winning combination history" (S502). ..

The "winning combination history" is data representing the winning combination of 5 games of internal winning combination (including "loss", "small role", and "replay"), and is used for the cycle shortening lottery and the direct addition lottery. Be done.

Then, after the processing of S502, the sub CPU 102 ends the general termination_variable setting processing, and shifts the processing to S449 of the variable setting processing (see FIGS. 97 and 98).

[At the end of general BB_variable setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 105, the general middle BB end_variable setting process performed in S444 in the flowchart of the variable setting process (see FIGS. 97 and 98) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (current) (“general middle BB”) is different from the gaming state (next time) (S511).

In S511, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not different from the gaming state (next time) (when the determination in S511 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the _ variable setting process at the end of the general BB. , The process is transferred to S449 of the variable setting process (see FIGS. 97 and 98). On the other hand, in S511, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the game state (current) is different from the game state (next time) (when the determination in S511 is YES), the sub CPU 102 initializes the "BB game counter" ("-". 1 ”is set) (S512). The "BB game counter" is a counter that manages the number of remaining games in the JACIN challenge section (the section in which the push order 2-choice challenge game for acquiring JACGAME is performed).

Then, after the processing of S512, the sub CPU 102 ends the general middle BB end_variable setting processing, and shifts the processing to S449 of the variable setting processing (see FIGS. 97 and 98).

[At the end of the race_variable setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 106, the race end_variable setting process performed in S446 in the flowchart of the variable setting process (see FIGS. 97 and 98) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (current) (“during the race”) is different from the gaming state (next time) (S521).

In S521, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not different from the gaming state (next time) (when the determination in S521 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the race end _ variable setting process and processes it. To S449 of the variable setting process (see FIGS. 97 and 98). On the other hand, in S521, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (next time) (when the determination in S521 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the "number of race games" and the "race generation flag". , Clear the data of "race flag after AT" and "race win rate rewriting flag" (S522).

The "number of race games" is data for managing the number of elapsed games (1 to 10 games) of the race effect performed in the transition effect game, and the "race generation flag" indicates whether or not to generate the race effect. It is a flag to indicate. The "post-AT race flag" is a flag indicating whether or not to generate a race effect after AT, and the "race win rate rewriting flag" is a flag indicating whether or not to rewrite the race win rate data. Although detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, when the "rare role" is won in the game in the normal state, the race win rate is increased by lottery. Then, when the lottery for increasing the race win rate is won, the "race win rate rewrite flag" is turned on.

Then, after the process of S522, the sub CPU 102 ends the _variable setting process at the end of the race, and shifts the process to S449 of the variable setting process (see FIGS. 97 and 98).

[At the end of BB during AT_variable setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 107, the _ variable setting process at the end of BB during AT performed in S448 in the flowchart of the variable setting process (see FIGS. 97 and 98) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (current) (“AT in BB”) is different from the gaming state (next time) (S531).

In S531, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not different from the gaming state (next time) (when the determination in S531 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the _ variable setting process at the end of BB during AT. , The process is transferred to S449 of the variable setting process (see FIGS. 97 and 98).

On the other hand, in S531, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the game state (current) is different from the game state (next time) (when the determination in S531 is YES), the sub CPU 102 initializes the "BB game counter" ("-". 1 ”is set) (S532). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the number of penalty games to "0" (S533).

Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the value of the penalty counter to "0" (S534). Next, the sub CPU 102 turns off the penalty flag (S535). Then, after the processing of S535, the sub CPU 102 ends the _ variable setting processing at the end of BB during AT, and shifts the processing to S449 of the variable setting processing (see FIGS. 97 and 98).

[Ball out status update process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 108, the ball ejection state update process performed in S412 in the flowchart (see FIG. 96) of the process at the time of receiving the start command will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (previous) is different from the gaming state (current) (S541).

In S541, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (previous time) is not different from the gaming state (current) (when the determination in S541 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S543 described later. On the other hand, in S541, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (previous) is different from the gaming state (current) (when the determination in S541 is YES), the sub CPU 102 is in the gaming state (previous) in the gaming state (current). Is set (S542).

After the processing of S542 or when the determination in S541 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (next time) (S543). In S543, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the game state (current) is not different from the game state (next time) (when the determination in S543 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the ball ejection state update process and starts the process. Move to S413 of command reception processing (see FIG. 96).

On the other hand, in S543, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (next time) (when the determination in S543 is YES), the sub CPU 102 is in the gaming state (current) in the gaming state (next time). Is set (S544). Then, after the processing of S544, the sub CPU 102 ends the ball ejection state update processing, and shifts the processing to S413 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 96).

[Bns status setting process]
Next, the Bns state setting process performed in S413 in the flowchart of the start command reception process (see FIG. 96) will be described with reference to FIG. 109.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo BB state is "at the time of winning the BB" (S551).

In S551, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is "at the time of BB winning" (when the determination in S551 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the BB winning _Bns state setting process (S552). The details of the BB winning _Bns state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 110 described later. Then, after the processing of S552, the sub CPU 102 ends the Bns state setting processing, and shifts the processing to S414 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 96).

On the other hand, in S551, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is not "at the time of BB winning" (when the determination in S551 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo BB state is "between BB flags". Is determined (S553).

In S553, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is "between BB flags" (when the determination in S553 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the _Bns state setting process between the BB flags (S554). The details of the BB flag-to-Bns state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 111 described later. Then, after the processing of S554, the sub CPU 102 ends the Bns state setting processing, and shifts the processing to S414 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 96).

On the other hand, in S553, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is not "between the BB flags" (when the determination in S553 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo BB state is "waiting for BB operation". Is determined (S555).

In S555, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is "waiting for BB operation" (when the determination in S555 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the BB operation waiting_Bns state setting process (S556). The details of the BB operation waiting_Bns state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 112 described later. Then, after the processing of S556, the sub CPU 102 ends the Bns state setting processing, and shifts the processing to S414 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 96).

On the other hand, in S555, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is not "waiting for BB operation" (when the determination in S555 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo BB state is "in BB". Determine (S557).

In S557, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is "in BB" (when the determination in S557 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the BB in _Bns state setting process (S558). The details of the _Bns state setting process in BB will be described later with reference to FIG. 113 described later. Then, after the processing of S558, the sub CPU 102 ends the Bns state setting processing, and shifts the processing to S414 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 96).

On the other hand, in S557, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is not "in BB" (when the determination in S557 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo BB state is "in JAC". (S559).

In S559, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is "in JAC" (when the determination in S559 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the _Bns state setting process in JAC (S560). The details of the _Bns state setting process during JAC will be described later with reference to FIG. 114 described later. Then, after the processing of S560, the sub CPU 102 ends the Bns state setting processing, and shifts the processing to S414 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 96).

On the other hand, in S559, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is not "in JAC" (when the determination in S559 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo BB state is "in ChaBB". (S561).

In S561, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is "in ChaBB" (when the determination in S561 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the _Bns state setting process in ChaBB (S562). The details of the _Bns state setting process in ChaBB will be described later with reference to FIG. 115 described later. Then, after the processing of S562, the sub CPU 102 ends the Bns state setting processing, and shifts the processing to S414 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 96).

On the other hand, in S561, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is not "in ChaBB" (when the determination in S561 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo BB state is "in ChaJAC". (S563).

In S563, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is "in ChaJAC" (when the determination in S563 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the _Bns state setting process in ChaJAC (S564). The details of the _Bns state setting process during ChaJAC will be described later with reference to FIG. 116 described later. Then, after the processing of S564, the sub CPU 102 ends the Bns state setting processing, and shifts the processing to S414 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 96).

On the other hand, in S563, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is not "in ChaJAC" (when the determination in S563 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the Bns state setting process and processes the process when the start command is received. Move to S414 (see FIG. 96).

[At the time of BB winning_Bns status setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 110, the BB winning _Bns state setting process performed in S552 in the flowchart of the Bns state setting process (see FIG. 109) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 shifts the pseudo BB state to "between BB flags" (S571). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs the _Bns state setting process between the BB flags (S572). The details of the BB flag-to-Bns state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 111 described later. Then, after the processing of S572, the sub CPU 102 ends the BB winning _Bns state setting process, and also ends the Bns state setting process (see FIG. 109).

[Between BB flags_Bns status setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 111, the BB flag interval_Bns performed in S554 in the flowchart of the Bns state setting process (see FIG. 109) or S572 in the flowchart of the BB winning _Bns state setting process (see FIG. 110). The state setting process will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (current) is "general BB" or "AT BB" (S581).

In S581, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not "general BB" or "AT BB" (when S581 is NO determination), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S583 described later. On the other hand, in S581, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is "general BB" or "AT in BB" (when the determination in S581 is YES), the sub CPU 102 changes the pseudo BB state to "B". Transition to "waiting for BB operation" (S582).

After the processing of S582 or when the determination in S581 is NO, the sub CPU 102 performs the BB operation waiting_Bns state setting processing (S583). The details of the BB operation waiting_Bns state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 112 described later. Then, after the processing of S583, the sub CPU 102 ends the BB flag-to-Bns state setting process, and also ends the Bns state setting process (see FIG. 109) or the BB winning _Bns state setting process (see FIG. 110).

[Waiting for BB operation_Bns status setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 112, BB operation waiting_Bns performed in S556 in the flowchart of the Bns state setting process (see FIG. 109) or S583 in the flowchart of the BB flag-to-Bns state setting process (see FIG. 111). The state setting process will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the "BB rush flag" is in the ON state (S591). The "BB rush flag" is a flag indicating whether or not the pseudo BB state shifts from "waiting for BB operation" to "in BB". When the flag is on, the pseudo BB state is "BB in progress". It shifts to "in BB" and the pseudo BB game is started.

In S591, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BB inrush flag is not in the ON state (when the determination in S591 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the BB operation waiting_Bns state setting process and the Bns state setting process (FIG. 109). (See) or the _Bns state setting process between BB flags (see FIG. 111) is also completed.

On the other hand, in S591, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BB entry flag is in the ON state (when the determination in S591 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns the BB entry flag in the OFF state (S592). Next, the sub CPU 102 shifts the pseudo BB state to “in BB” (S593).

Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the initial value “2” in the “BB guaranteed JAC number” (S594). The "BB guaranteed JAC number" is the number of successful JACINs (the number of times JACGAME is executed) guaranteed in the JACGAME guaranteed section, and in the present embodiment, two JACGAMEs are guaranteed in the JACGAME guaranteed section.

Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the initial value "10" to the value of the BB game counter (S595).

Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the initial value "5" to the value of "JAC bell navigation number of times" (S596). In this embodiment, one JACGAME game period is managed by the number of navigations (number of bell navigations) of small roles related to the "pushing order bell" (CT bell) in which 10 medals are paid out, and 5 times. When the number of bell navigations is completed, one JACGAME game period ends. And, "JAC bell navigation number of times" represents the remaining number of bell navigations in JACGAME.

Next, the sub CPU 102 turns off the "penalty flag" (S597). The "penalty flag" is a flag indicating whether or not a penalty has occurred. Then, after the processing of S597, the sub CPU 102 ends the BB operation waiting_Bns state setting process, and also ends the Bns state setting process (see FIG. 109) or the BB flag-between _Bns state setting process (see FIG. 111).

[In BB_Bns status setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 113, the _Bns state setting process in BB performed in S558 in the flowchart of the Bns state setting process (see FIG. 109) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the "BARJAC inrush flag" is in the ON state (S601). The "BARJAC rush flag" is a flag indicating whether or not the transition of the pseudo BB state to "in JAC" is determined. The "BARJAC rush flag" is a valid line for a predetermined symbol combination (in this embodiment, "black BAR"-"black BAR"-"black BAR" or "black cherry"-"black BAR"-"black BAR"). It is turned on when the stop is displayed above.

In S601, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BARJAC inrush flag is not in the ON state (when the determination in S601 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the _Bns state setting process during BB and the Bns state setting process (see FIG. 109). ) Also ends.

On the other hand, in S601, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BARJAC inrush flag is on (when the determination in S601 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns off the BARJAC inrush flag (S602). Next, the sub CPU 102 shifts the pseudo BB state to “in JAC” (S603).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of BB guaranteed JACs is larger than "0" (S604). In S604, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of BB guaranteed JACs is not larger than "0" (when the determination in S604 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the _Bns state setting process in BB and the Bns state setting process. (See FIG. 109) also ends.

On the other hand, in S604, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of BB guaranteed JACs is larger than "0" (when the determination in S604 is YES), the sub CPU 102 subtracts "1" from the number of BB guaranteed JACs (S605). Then, after the processing of S605, the sub CPU 102 ends the _Bns state setting process in BB, and also ends the Bns state setting process (see FIG. 109).

[JAC _Bns status setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 114, the _Bns state setting process in JAC performed in S560 in the flowchart of the Bns state setting process (see FIG. 109) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of times of JAC bell navigation is "0" (S611). In S611, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of JAC bell navigations is not "0" (when the determination in S611 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the _Bns state setting process during JAC and the Bns state setting process (FIG. 109). See) also ends.

On the other hand, in S611, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of JAC bell navigations is "0" (when the determination in S611 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the BB guaranteed JAC number is larger than "0". (S612).

In S612, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of BB guaranteed JACs is not larger than "0" (when the determination in S612 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the pseudo BB state to "in ChaBB" (S613). On the other hand, in S612, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BB guaranteed JAC number is larger than "0" (when the determination in S612 is YES), the sub CPU 102 shifts the pseudo BB state to "in BB" (S614). ..

After the processing of S613 or S614, the sub CPU 102 sets the initial value "5" to the value of the number of JAC bell navigations (S615). Then, after the processing of S615, the sub CPU 102 ends the _Bns state setting process during JAC, and also ends the Bns state setting process (see FIG. 109).

[ChaBB middle_Bns state setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 115, the _Bns state setting process in ChaBB performed in S562 in the flowchart of the Bns state setting process (see FIG. 109) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the BB game counter is less than "0" (S621).

In S621, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BB game counter is not less than "0" (when the determination in S621 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S623 described later. On the other hand, in S621, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BB game counter is less than "0" (when the determination in S621 is YES), the sub CPU 102 transitions the pseudo BB state to "none" (S622). In this process, the data indicating the pseudo BB state is reset, and the sub-game state returns from the pseudo BB state to the normal state.

After the processing of S622 or when the determination in S621 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the BARJAC inrush flag is in the ON state (S623). In S623, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BARJAC inrush flag is not in the ON state (when the determination in S623 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the _Bns state setting process during ChaBB and the Bns state setting process (see FIG. 109). ) Also ends.

On the other hand, in S623, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BARJAC rush flag is on (when the determination in S623 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns the BARJAC rush flag off (S624). Next, the sub CPU 102 shifts the pseudo BB state to “in ChaJAC” (S625).

Then, after the processing of S625, the sub CPU 102 ends the _Bns state setting process in ChaBB, and also ends the Bns state setting process (see FIG. 109).

[ChaJAC _Bns status setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 116, the _Bns state setting process in ChaJAC performed in S564 in the flowchart of the Bns state setting process (see FIG. 109) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of times of JAC bell navigation is "0" (S631). In S631, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of JAC bell navigations is not "0" (when the determination in S631 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the _Bns state setting process during ChaJAC and the Bns state setting process (FIG. 109). See) also ends.

On the other hand, in S631, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of JAC bell navigations is "0" (when the determination in S631 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the BB game counter is larger than "0". Determine (S632).

In S632, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the BB game counter is not greater than "0" (when the determination in S632 is NO), the sub CPU 102 transitions the pseudo BB state to "none" (S633). In this process, the data indicating the pseudo BB state is reset, and the sub-game state returns from the pseudo BB state to the AT state. On the other hand, in S632, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the BB game counter is larger than "0" (when the determination in S632 is YES), the sub CPU 102 shifts the pseudo BB state to "in ChaBB" (S634). ).

After the processing of S633 or S634, the sub CPU 102 sets the initial value "5" to the value of the number of JAC bell navigations (S635). Then, after the processing of S635, the sub CPU 102 ends the _Bns state setting process during ChaJAC, and also ends the Bns state setting process (see FIG. 109).

[General middle _ processing at the start of the game]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118, the general middle-game start processing performed in S415 in the flowchart (see FIG. 96) of the start command reception processing will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the cycle counter is larger than "0" (S641).

In S641, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the cycle counter is not larger than "0" (when the determination in S641 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S643 described later. On the other hand, in S641, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the cycle counter is larger than "0" (when the determination in S641 is YES), the sub CPU 102 subtracts the value of the cycle counter by "1" (S642).

After the processing of S642 or when the determination in S641 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the race information MAP data is "0" (S643). In the present embodiment, as described above, five race information MAP data (“1” to “10”) up to four race destinations (first race to fifth race) are stored in advance at the start of the set of the normal game. Although it is set in the area, each time the race production is completed, the race information MAP data of the end race is deleted, and the race information MAP data of the next set and thereafter is stored in the storage area on the leading side. Shifted and stored. At this time, "0" is stored as race information MAP data in the last storage area that has become empty. Therefore, in the process of S643, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the race information data of the reference storage area is empty.

In S643, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the race information MAP data is "0" (when the determination in S643 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the race information lottery process described with reference to FIG. 94 (S644). That is, if the information regarding the content of the race production of the current set (type of ally character who is the race victory target (candidate), race win rate data of the ally character) is not set, the game of the normal game of the current set. At the start of the period, information about the content of the race production will be decided by lottery. At this time, information on the content of the race production from the current set to 4 sets ahead (1st to 5th races) is determined. Then, after the processing of S644, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S659 described later.

On the other hand, in S643, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the race information MAP data is not "0" (when the determination in S643 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (previous) is "during the race". Is determined (S645). In S645, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (previous time) is not "during the race" (when the determination in S645 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S659 described later.

On the other hand, in S645, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (previous time) is "race in progress" (when the determination in S645 is YES), the sub CPU 102 satisfies the re-lottery condition of the race runner MAP. Whether or not it is determined (S646). In the present embodiment, the re-lottery condition for the race runner MAP is the case where the number of consecutive losses of the race (value of the consecutive loss counter of the race) is "5".

In S646, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the re-lottery condition of the race runner MAP is not satisfied (when the determination in S646 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S649 described later.

On the other hand, in S646, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the re-lottery condition of the race runner MAP is satisfied (when the determination in S646 is YES), the sub CPU 102 uses the race runner MAP lottery table (see FIG. 32). The race runner MAP lottery process is performed with reference to (S647). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the value of the lottery result (race information MAP number) of the race runner MAP lottery process in the "race runner MAP" (S648).

After the processing of S648 or when the determination in S646 is NO, the sub CPU 102 refers to the race information MAP data table (see FIG. 33) and race information based on the value of "race runner MAP" (race information MAP number). The type (target tables A to J) of the winning target lottery table (see FIG. 34) corresponding to the MAP data is determined (S649). In this process, based on the set race runner MAP (race information MAP) value, the "target table" (target table) corresponding to the race information MAP data up to 4 races ahead (1st to 5th races). Any of A to J) is determined. Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the determined "target table" for the first to fifth races (S650).

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a lottery process for race winners (candidates) from the first race to the fifth race based on the "target table" from the first race to the fifth race set in S650 ( S651). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of the winning target lottery process to the "race winner" (S652). By this processing, any of the race winners from the 1st race to the 5th race ("male A", "male B", "female A", "tengu", "kappa" and "male A / male B" Is set as the "race winner".

Next, the sub CPU 102 checks the race win rate data of the current set (S653).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the "race information data" is "0" (S654). The "race information data" is the race win rate data, and in the process of S654, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the race win rate data of the current set is set.

In S654, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the race information data is not "0" (when the determination in S654 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S659 described later.

On the other hand, in S654, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the race information data is "0" (when the determination in S654 is YES), the sub CPU 102 refers to the race win rate MAP lottery table (see FIG. 35) and races. Win rate MAP lottery processing is performed (S655). In this process, the sub CPU 102 defines the race win rate MAP of the "race winner" (race winner) set in S652 based on the current set value (any of 1 to 6). To decide.

Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result (race win rate MAP) of the race win rate MAP lottery process in the “race win rate map” (S656).

Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the race win rate MAP data table (see FIG. 36) and acquires the race win rate data corresponding to the set “race win rate map” (S657). In this process, as shown in FIG. 36, only the race win rate data of the current set race (first race) may be determined, or the race win rate data of the second and subsequent races may also be determined. is there. Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the race win rate data acquired in S657 (S658).

After the processing of S644 or S658, or when the determination of S645 or S654 is NO, the sub CPU 102 performs a pseudo BB lottery processing (S659). The details of the pseudo BB lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 119 described later.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of penalty games is "0" (S660). In S660, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of penalty games is not "0" (when the determination in S660 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the process at the start of the general game, and processes the process at the time of receiving the start command. Move to S426 (see FIG. 96). That is, when the current game is being penalized, the cycle shortening-related processing of S661 described later is not performed, and the privilege of shortening the number of games of the normal game cannot be obtained.

On the other hand, in S660, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of penalty games is "0" (when the determination in S660 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the cycle shortening related process (S661). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to the cycle shortening lottery table (see FIGS. 44 and 45), and performs the cycle shortening lottery based on the data of the “winning combination history”.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the cycle counter is "10" or more and the "race generation flag" is in the off state (S662).

In S662, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determination condition of S662 is not satisfied (when the determination in S662 is NO), the sub CPU 102 sets the "accommodation point" as the lottery result of the cycle shortening lottery determined in S661. The number of corresponding shortened games is added (S663).

After the processing of S663, the sub CPU 102 refers to the race victory expectation degree lottery table (not shown) and performs the race victory expectation degree data up lottery (S664). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of the race win expectation data up lottery in the race win rate data (S665). Then, after the processing of S665, the sub CPU 102 ends the general middle _game start processing, and shifts the processing to S426 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 96).

On the other hand, in S662, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determination condition of S662 is satisfied (when the determination in S662 is YES), the sub CPU 102 is the lottery result (shortening) of the cycle shortening lottery determined in S661 from the value of the cycle counter. The number of games) is subtracted, and the calculation result is set to the value of the cycle counter. Then, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the period counter after subtraction is less than "10" (S666).

In S666, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the cycle counter after subtraction is not less than "10" (when the determination in S666 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the general middle _game start process and performs the process. Move to S426 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 96).

On the other hand, in S666, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the cycle counter after subtraction is less than "10" (when the determination in S666 is YES), the sub CPU 102 has a surplus corresponding to the calculation (subtraction) result. The number of shortened games of is added to the "inn points" (S667). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the value of the cycle counter to "10" (S668). Then, after the processing of S668, the sub CPU 102 ends the general middle _game start processing, and shifts the processing to S426 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 96).

As described above, in S661 of the general middle-game start processing of the present embodiment, a lottery for shortening the game period of the normal game is performed, and this processing is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a means (normal game shortening means, first normal game shortening means) for determining the subtraction number of the current remaining unit game number of the normal game in the normal game. Further, in S667 of the general middle _ game start processing, when the value obtained by subtracting the number of shortened games determined by the cycle shortening lottery of the normal game from the number of remaining unit games of the normal game is less than 10 games, the subtraction result is obtained. Is stocked as the number of shortened games for the surplus. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a means for stocking the subtraction result as the number of shortened games for the surplus (surplus game number stocking means) when the subtraction result is less than 10 games.

[Pseudo BB lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 119, the pseudo BB lottery process performed in S659 in the flowchart (see FIGS. 117 and 118) of the general middle-game start process will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the BB precursor counter is "0" or more (S671). In S671, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the BB precursor counter is "0" or more (when the determination in S671 is YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the pseudo BB lottery process, and performs the process in general. Move to S660 of the start processing (see FIGS. 117 and 118).

On the other hand, in S671, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the BB precursor counter is not "0" or more (when the determination in S671 is NO), is the sub CPU 102 in the gaming state (current) "general"? Whether or not it is determined (S672).

In S672, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not "general" (when the determination in S672 is NO), the sub CPU 102 is a pseudo BB lottery (AT in progress, AT preparation in progress, race in progress) table. (See FIG. 42), a pseudo BB lottery process is performed based on the internal winning combination (S673). On the other hand, in S672, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is "general middle" (when the determination in S672 is YES), the sub CPU 102 uses the pseudo BB lottery (general middle) table (see FIG. 41). ), And the pseudo BB lottery process is performed based on the internal winning combination (S674).

After the processing of S673 or S674, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo BB lottery has been won (S675). In S675, when it is determined that the sub CPU 102 has not won the pseudo BB lottery (when the determination in S675 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the pseudo BB lottery process and performs the process at the start of the general game (FIG. 117). And S660 of FIG. 118).

On the other hand, in S675, when it is determined that the sub CPU 102 has won the pseudo BB lottery (when the determination in S675 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the pseudo BB state to "at the time of BB winning" (S676). Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the pseudo BB precursor lottery table (see FIG. 43), and performs the pseudo BB precursor lottery process based on the internal winning combination (S677).

Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of the pseudo BB precursor lottery (the number of precursor games of the pseudo BB game) in the BB precursor counter (S678). Then, after the processing of S678, the sub CPU 102 ends the pseudo BB lottery processing, and shifts the processing to S660 of the general middle-game start processing (see FIGS. 117 and 118).

As described above, the pseudo BB lottery process of the present embodiment is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a means for determining the execution of the pseudo BB game (special game determining means).

[General BB_Game start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 120, the general middle BB_game start processing performed in S417 in the flowchart (see FIG. 96) of the start command reception processing will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of penalty games is "0" (S681).

In S681, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of penalty games is not "0" (when the determination in S681 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S683 described later. That is, when the current game is being penalized, the BB rush determination process (at the start of the game) of S682, which will be described later, is not performed. In this case, since the process of turning on the BB rush check flag (transition process to the pseudo BB game) is not performed, a state in which the pseudo BB game is not started occurs.

On the other hand, in S681, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of penalty games is "0" (when the determination in S681 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the BB rush determination process (at the start of the game) (S682). In this process, the sub CPU 102 manages the on / off of the “BB rush check flag” provided for checking the occurrence of the “command spill”. The details of the BB rush determination process (at the start of the game) will be described later with reference to FIG. 121 described later.

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs the BBJAC transition determination process (at the start of the game) (S683). In this process, the sub CPU 102 manages on / off of the "BARJAC inrush check flag" provided for checking the occurrence of "command spill". The details of the BBJAC transition determination process (at the start of the game) will be described later with reference to FIG. 122 described later.

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a BB counter management process (S684). The details of the BB counter management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 123 described later.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the race occurrence flag is in the ON state (S685).

In S685, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the race occurrence flag is in the ON state (when the determination in S685 is YES), the sub CPU 102 refers to a winning percentage lottery table after winning the race (not shown) and draws a winning percentage up after winning the race. Process (S686). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of the lottery process for increasing the winning percentage after winning the race in the race winning percentage data (S687). Then, after the processing of S687, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S695 described later.

On the other hand, in S685, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the race occurrence flag is not in the ON state (when the determination in S685 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the cycle counter is "1" or more. (S688). In S688, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the cycle counter is not "1" or more (when the determination in S688 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S695 described later.

On the other hand, in S688, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the cycle counter is "1" or more (when the determination in S688 is YES), the sub CPU 102 refers to the pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery table (see FIG. 46). Then, based on the "winning combination history", a pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery process is performed (S689). Next, the sub CPU 102 subtracts the number of shortened games determined by the pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery process from the value of the current cycle counter, and sets this calculation result in the cycle counter (S690).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the cycle counter after the arithmetic processing of S690 is "0" or less (S691). In S691, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the cycle counter is not "0" or less (when the determination in S691 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S695 described later.

On the other hand, in S691, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the cycle counter is "0" or less (when the determination in S691 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns on the race occurrence flag (S692). By this process, after the pseudo BB game is completed, the race effect of the transition effect game is started.

Next, the number of shortened games (absolute value of the calculation result) corresponding to the value of the calculation result of S690 is added to the "inn point" (S693). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the value of the cycle counter to "0" (S694). Then, after the processing of S694, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S695 described later.

After the processing of S687 or S694, or when the determination of S688 or S691 is NO, the sub CPU 102 refers to the push order navigation lottery table (not shown) and performs the push order navigation lottery process of the small winning combination related to the "push order bell". (S695). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of this push order navigation lottery process to the "push order navigation number" (S696). Then, after the processing of S696, the sub CPU 102 ends the general middle BB_game start processing, and shifts the processing to S426 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 96).

As described above, in S689 of the general middle BB_game start processing of the present embodiment, a lottery for shortening the game period of the normal game (pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery) is performed, and this processing is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. Will be done. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a means (second normal game shortening means) for determining the subtraction number of the current remaining unit game number of the normal game in the pseudo BB game.

[BB rush judgment processing (at the start of the game)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 121, the BB rush determination process (at the start of the game) performed in S682 in the flowchart (see FIG. 120) of the general middle BB_game start process will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the BB inrush check flag is in the ON state (S701).

In S701, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BB entry check flag is not in the ON state (when the determination in S701 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S703 described later. On the other hand, in S701, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BB entry check flag is in the ON state (when the determination in S701 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns the penalty flag in the ON state (S702).

After the processing of S702 or when the determination in S701 is NO, the sub CPU 102 turns off the BB inrush check flag (S703). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (current) is "race in progress" (S704).

In S704, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not "race in progress" (when the determination in S704 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo BB state is "waiting for BB operation". Determine (S705). In S705, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is not "waiting for BB operation" (when the determination in S705 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the BB rush determination process (at the start of the game) and generalizes the process. Move to S683 of the middle BB_game start processing (see FIG. 120).

On the other hand, in S705, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is "waiting for BB operation" (when the determination in S705 is YES), the sub CPU 102 has an internal winning combination of "normal rip 1" to "normal rip 1" to "normal rip". 8 ”is determined (S706).

In S706, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the internal winning combination is not any of "normal lip 1" to "normal lip 8" (when the determination in S706 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the BB rush determination process (game start). Time) is finished, and the process is transferred to S683 of the general middle BB_game start process (see FIG. 120). On the other hand, in S706, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the internal winning combination is any of "normal lip 1" to "normal lip 8" (when the determination in S706 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the BB entry check flag. Is turned on (S707). Then, after the processing of S707, the sub CPU 102 ends the BB entry determination processing (at the start of the game), and shifts the processing to S683 of the general BB_game start processing (see FIG. 120).

Here, returning to the process of S704 again, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S704 that the sub game state is "during the race" (when the determination in S704 is YES), the sub CPU 102 has the pseudo BB state ". It is determined whether or not it is "between the BB flags" (S708). In S708, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is not "between the BB flags" (when the determination in S708 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the BB rush determination process (at the start of the game) and generalizes the process. Move to S683 of the middle BB_game start processing (see FIG. 120).

On the other hand, in S708, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is "between the BB flags" (when the determination in S708 is YES), the sub CPU 102 has an internal winning combination of "normal rip 2" or "normal rip 2". It is determined whether or not it is "4" (S709).

In S709, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the internal winning combination is not "normal lip 2" or "normal lip 4" (when the determination in S709 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the BB rush determination process (at the start of the game). When the process is completed, the process is transferred to S683 of the general BB_game start process (see FIG. 120). On the other hand, in S709, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the internal winning combination is "normal lip 2" or "normal lip 4" (when the determination in S709 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns on the BB entry check flag. (S710). Then, after the process of S710, the sub CPU 102 ends the BB rush determination process (at the start of the game), and shifts the process to S683 of the general BB_game start process (see FIG. 120).

[BBJAC transition determination process (at the start of the game)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 122, the BBJAC transition determination process (at the start of the game) performed in S683 in the flowchart of the process at the start of the general BB_game (see FIG. 120) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the BARJAC inrush check flag is in the ON state (S721). In S721, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BARJAC inrush check flag is not in the ON state (when the determination in S721 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S725 described later.

On the other hand, in S721, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BARJAC entry check flag is in the ON state (when the determination in S721 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo BB state is "in BB". (S722). In S722, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is not "in BB" (when the determination in S722 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S725 described later.

On the other hand, in S722, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is "in BB" (when the determination in S722 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns on the BARJAC entry flag (S723). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs the BB in _Bns state setting process described with reference to FIG. 113 (S724). Then, after the processing of S724, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S725 described later.

After the processing of S724, or when S721 or S722 is determined to be NO, the sub CPU 102 turns off the BARJAC entry check flag (S725).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo BB state is “in BB” or “in ChaBB” (S726). In S726, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is not "in BB" or "in ChaBB" (when the determination in S726 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the BBJAC transition determination process (at the start of the game). , The process is transferred to S684 of the general middle BB_game start process (see FIG. 120).

On the other hand, in S726, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is "in BB" or "in ChaBB" (when the determination in S726 is YES), the sub CPU 102 has an internal winning combination of "normal lip 1". -It is determined whether or not it is any of "normal lip 8" and "bell lip 1" to "bell lip 4" (S727).

In S727, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the internal winning combination is not one of "normal lip 1" to "normal lip 8" and "bell lip 1" to "bell lip 4" (when S727 is a NO determination), the sub The CPU 102 ends the BBJAC transition determination process (at the start of the game), and shifts the process to S684 of the general BB_game start process (see FIG. 120). On the other hand, in S727, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the internal winning combination is one of "normal lip 1" to "normal lip 8" and "bell lip 1" to "bell lip 4" (when S727 is a YES determination). ), The sub CPU 102 turns on the BARJAC rush check flag (S728). Then, after the process of S728, the sub CPU 102 ends the BBJAC transition determination process (at the start of the game), and shifts the process to S684 of the general BB_game start process (see FIG. 120).

[BB counter management process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 123, the BB counter management process performed in S684 in the flowchart (see FIG. 120) of the general BB_game start process will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo BB state is “in ChaBB” (S731). In S731, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is not "in ChaBB" (when the determination in S731 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S734 described later.

On the other hand, in S731, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is "in ChaBB" (when the determination in S731 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the BB game counter is larger than "0". Is determined (S732).

In S732, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the BB game counter is not larger than "0" (when the determination in S732 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S734 described later. On the other hand, in S732, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the BB game counter is larger than "0" (when the determination in S732 is YES), the sub CPU 102 subtracts the value of the BB game counter by "1" (S733). ). Then, after the processing of S733, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S734 described later.

After the processing of S733, or when S731 or S732 is determined to be NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo BB state is "in JAC" or "in ChaJAC" (S734).

In S734, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is not "in JAC" or "in ChaJAC" (when the determination in S734 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the BB counter management process and is performing the process in general. BB_ Move to S685 of the game start processing (see FIG. 120). On the other hand, in S734, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is "in JAC" or "in ChaJAC" (when the determination in S734 is YES), the sub CPU 102 has an internal winning combination of "push order bell". (CT bell: any one of the winning numbers "17" to "48") is determined (S735).

In S735, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the internal winning combination is not the "push order bell" (when the determination in S735 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the BB counter management process and performs the process at the start of the general BB_game. The process moves to S685 (see FIG. 120). On the other hand, in S735, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the internal winning combination is the "push order bell" (when the determination in S735 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of JAC bell navigations is greater than "0". Determine (S736).

In S736, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of JAC bell navigations is not greater than "0" (when the determination in S736 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the BB counter management process and performs the process at the start of the general BB_game. The process moves to S685 (see FIG. 120).

On the other hand, in S736, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of JAC bell navigations is larger than "0" (when the determination in S736 is YES), the sub CPU 102 subtracts "1" from the number of JAC bell navigations (S737). Then, after the processing of S737, the sub CPU 102 ends the BB counter management processing, and shifts the processing to S685 of the general middle BB_game start processing (see FIG. 120).

[During the race_Processing at the start of the game]
Next, with reference to FIG. 124, the process at the start of the race_game performed in S419 in the flowchart of the process at the time of receiving the start command (see FIG. 96) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of penalty games is "0" (S741).

In S741, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of penalty games is not "0" (when the determination in S741 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S743 described later. That is, when the current game is being penalized, the BB rush determination process (at the start of the game) of S742, which will be described later, is not performed. In this case, since the process of turning on the BB rush check flag (transition process to the pseudo BB game) is not performed, a state in which the pseudo BB game is not started occurs.

On the other hand, in S741, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of penalty games is "0" (when the determination in S741 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the BB rush determination process (at the start of the game) described with reference to FIG. 121. Do (S742).

After the processing of S742 or when the determination in S741 is NO, the sub CPU 102 adds "1" to the number of race games (S743).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of racing games is "1" (S744). In S744, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of race games is not "1" (when the determination in S744 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S749 described later.

On the other hand, in S744, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of race games is "1" (when the determination in S744 is YES), the sub CPU 102 is set with reference to the race result lottery table (see FIG. 38). Based on the race win rate data, the race result lottery process is performed (S745). In this process, the result of the race production (winning / non-winning) performed in the transition production game is determined. That is, in the present embodiment, the race result (winning / non-winning of the AT game) is determined by lottery in the first game (starting game) of the race production.

Next, whether or not the sub CPU 102 wins the race by drawing the race result (whether or not the AT wins) or whether the value of the race consecutive loss counter (continuous non-execution count counting means) is "9" or more. It is determined whether or not it is determined (S746).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S746 that the determination condition of S746 is satisfied (YES in S746), the sub CPU 102 turns on the race victory flag (S747). Then, after the processing of S747, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S747 described later.

On the other hand, in S746, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determination condition of S746 is not satisfied (when the determination in S746 is NO), the sub CPU 102 adds "1" to the value of the race consecutive loss counter (S748). Then, after the processing of S748, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S749 described later.

In this embodiment, the race win rate data rewriting lottery (S945 in FIG. 137), which will be described later, is won and the race win rate is rewritten to 0% (when the penalty process based on the penalty counter is performed). In the process of S748, the addition process of the race consecutive loss counter (ceiling counter) is not performed. In this case, the number of ceiling cycles of the normal game in which the AT winning is determined is substantially extended.

After the processing of S747 or S748, or when the determination in S744 is NO, the sub CPU 102 performs the pseudo BB lottery processing described with reference to FIG. 119 (S749). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo BB state is "at the time of winning the BB" (S750).

In S750, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is not "at the time of winning the BB" (when the determination in S750 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S752 described later. On the other hand, in S750, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is "at the time of winning the BB" (when the determination in S750 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns on the race victory flag (S751).

After the processing of S751 or when the determination in S750 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo BB state is "between BB flags" or "waiting for BB operation" (S752). In S752, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is not "between BB flags" or "waiting for BB operation" (when the determination in S752 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S755 described later.

On the other hand, in S752, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is "between BB flags" or "waiting for BB operation" (when the determination in S752 is YES), the sub CPU 102 is placed directly on the lottery table (FIG. 47A). (See FIG. 47B), and based on the “winning combination history”, an additional lottery process for the number of AT games (directly added lottery process) is performed (S753). At this time, when the penalty flag is in the off state, the direct addition lottery (penalty flag OFF) table in FIG. 47A is referred to, and when the penalty flag is in the on state, the direct addition lottery in FIG. 47B (penalty flag OFF) is referred to. Penalty flag ON: During the race) The table is referenced. Next, the sub CPU 102 adds the value of the lottery result (the number of additional AT games) of the direct addition lottery process to the number of remaining AT games (S754).

After the processing of S754 or when the determination in S752 is NO, the sub CPU 102 refers to the push order navigation lottery table (not shown) and performs the push order navigation lottery process of the small winning combination related to the "push order bell" (S755). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of this push order navigation lottery process to the "push order navigation number" (S756). Then, after the processing of S756, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the start of the race_game, and shifts the processing to S426 of the processing at the time of receiving the start command (see FIG. 96).

As described above, in S745 of the process at the start of the race during the race of the present embodiment, the AT lottery is performed, and this process is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a means (notifying game determining means) for determining whether or not to perform an AT game.

[Preparing AT_Processing at game start]
Next, with reference to FIG. 125, the AT preparing_game start processing performed in S421 in the flowchart (see FIG. 96) of the start command reception processing will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 performs the pseudo BB lottery process described with reference to FIG. 119 (S761). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (previous time) (S762).

In S762, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (previous time) (when the determination in S762 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S775 described later. On the other hand, in S762, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not different from the gaming state (previous time) (when the determination in S762 is NO), the sub CPU 102 has the "race winner" as "male A". It is determined whether or not it is (S763).

In S763, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the "race winner" is "male A" (when the determination in S763 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs processing at the time of male A victory_game start (S764). .. In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines the number of AT start games (the number of basic stay games in the AT state) of the AT game according to the content of the AT start game number determination game at the time of victory of the "male A" described above. Further, in this process, the sub CPU 102 turns on the AT entry flag. Then, after the processing of S764, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S775 described later.

On the other hand, in S763, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the "race winner" is not "male A" (when the determination in S763 is NO), the sub CPU 102 asks whether the "race winner" is "male B". Whether or not it is determined (S765).

In S765, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the "race winner" is "male B" (when the determination in S765 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a process at the time of male B victory_game start (S766). .. In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines the number of AT start games in the AT game according to the content of the AT start game number determination game at the time of winning the "male B" described above. Further, in this process, the sub CPU 102 turns on the AT entry flag. Then, after the processing of S766, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S775 described later.

On the other hand, in S765, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the "race winner" is not "male B" (when the determination in S765 is NO), the sub CPU 102 asks whether the "race winner" is "female A". Whether or not it is determined (S767).

In S767, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the "race winner" is "female A" (when the determination in S767 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of winning the female A_game start (S768). .. In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines the number of AT start games in the AT game according to the content of the AT start game number determination game at the time of winning the "woman A" described above. The details of the process of female A winning _ game starting will be described later with reference to FIG. 126 described later. Then, after the processing of S768, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S775 described later.

On the other hand, in S767, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the "race winner" is not "female A" (when the determination in S767 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the "race winner" is "kappa". (S769).

In S769, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the "race winner" is a "kappa" (when the determination in S769 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a process at the time of winning the kappa_at the start of the game (S770). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines the number of AT start games in the AT game according to the content of the AT start game number determination game at the time of winning the "Kappa" described above. The details of the processing at the time of winning the kappa_at the start of the game will be described later with reference to FIG. 127 described later. Then, after the processing of S770, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S775 described later.

On the other hand, in S769, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the "race winner" is not a "kappa" (when the determination in S769 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the "race winner" is a "tengu". (S771).

In S771, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the "race winner" is the "tengu" (when the determination in S771 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the tengu victory time_game start time processing (S772). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines the number of AT start games in the AT game according to the content of the AT start game number determination game at the time of winning the "tengu" described above. Further, in this process, the sub CPU 102 turns on the AT entry flag. Then, after the processing of S772, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S775 described later.

On the other hand, in S771, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the "race winner" is not a "tengu" (when the determination in S771 is NO), the sub CPU 102 has a "race winner" of "male A / male B". It is determined whether or not there is (S773). In S773, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the "race winner" is not "male A / male B" (when the determination in S773 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S775 described later.

On the other hand, in S773, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the "race winner" is "male A / male B" (when the determination in S773 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines that the male A / male B wins_game. Start processing is performed (S774). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines the number of AT start games in the AT game according to the content of the AT start game number determination game at the time of victory of "male A / male B" described above. Further, in this process, the sub CPU 102 turns on the AT entry flag. Then, after the processing of S774, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S775 described later.

After processing S764, S766, S768, S770, S772 or S774, if S762 determines YES or S773 determines NO, the sub CPU 102 refers to a push order navigation lottery table (not shown) and "push order bell". The small winning combination navigation lottery process according to "S775" is performed. Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of this push order navigation lottery process to the "push order navigation number" (S776). Then, after the processing of S776, the sub CPU 102 ends the AT preparing_game start processing, and shifts the processing to S426 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 96).

[Woman A wins_Processing at game start]
Next, with reference to FIG. 126, the process of female A winning _ game start time performed in S768 in the flowchart of AT preparation _ game start time processing (see FIG. 125) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 turns on the AT entry flag (S781). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines the AT start game number lottery (when female A wins) table (see FIGS. 48A and 48B) used in the process of determining the number of AT start games (S782).

In the process of S782, the number of AT start games is added by 50 games by one MAX bet operation, and the continuation probability is 50% in the first mode, and the AT start game by one MAX bet operation. The AT start game number lottery (when woman A wins) table corresponding to one of the second modes in which the number is added by 5 games and the continuation probability is 95% is determined. In the present embodiment, in S782, the AT start game number lottery (at the time of woman A victory) table (see FIG. 48B) corresponding to the second mode is set to be automatically determined. Not limited to this, in S782, the AT start game number lottery (at the time of woman A victory) table (see FIG. 48A) corresponding to the first mode may be automatically determined.

Then, after the processing of S782, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of female A victory_game start, and shifts the processing to S775 of the AT preparation_game start processing (see FIG. 125).

[Kappa victory _ processing at the start of the game]
Next, with reference to FIG. 127, the kappa victory time_game start time processing performed in S770 in the flowchart of the AT preparation_game start time processing (see FIG. 125) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the Kappa sushi MAP data (see FIG. 53) of the current game is "0" (whether or not the Kappa sushi MAP is not set) (S791).

In S791, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the Kappa sushi MAP data is not "0" (when the determination in S791 is NO), the sub CPU 102 moves the Kappa sushi MAP data from the next game onward toward the storage area on the leading side. Move one (S792). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 stores one dish of Kappa sushi MAP data (either "1" to "8" is stored or empty (" 0")) on the second to tenth dishes. Shift to the storage area of the Kappa sushi MAP data of the 9th dish and empty the storage area of the Kappa sushi MAP data of the 10th dish (store "0"). Then, after the processing of S792, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S797, which will be described later.

On the other hand, in S791, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the Kappa sushi MAP data is "0" (when the determination in S791 is YES), the sub CPU 102 is the AT start game number lottery (Kappa victory) table (FIG. 49). -Refer to FIG. 52), and the Kappa sushi MAP lottery process is performed (S793). By this process, the number of "Kado Sushi MAP" is determined. Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the Kappa sushi MAP data table (see FIG. 53), and based on the "Kappa sushi MAP" number determined in S793, the Kappa sushi MAP data from the first dish to the first to tenth dishes (see FIG. 53). Data of sushi material) is acquired (S794).

After the processing of S794, the sub CPU 102 sets the Kappa sushi MAP data of the first to tenth dishes acquired in S794 (S795). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 stores the Kappa sushi MAP data of the first to tenth dishes defined in the Kappa sushi MAP in the corresponding storage area. Next, the sub CPU 685 sets the initial value "5" in the kappa end counter (S796).

After the processing of S792 or S796, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the Kappa sushi MAP data of the sixth dish is empty (“0”) (S797). In S797, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the Kappa sushi MAP data of the sixth dish is not empty (when the determination in S797 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S801 described later.

On the other hand, in S797, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the kappa sushi MAP data of the sixth dish is empty (when the determination in S797 is YES), the sub CPU 102 draws the number of AT start games (when the kappa wins). With reference to the table (see FIGS. 49 to 52), the kappa sushi MAP lottery process is performed based on the current kappa sushi MAP number (S798). By this process, the number of "Kappa Sushi MAP" set on the 6th plate is determined.

Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the Kappa sushi MAP data table (see FIG. 53) and acquires 10 dishes of Kappa sushi MAP data based on the "Kappa sushi MAP" number determined in S798 (S799). .. Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the kappa sushi MAP data for 10 dishes defined in the kappa sushi MAP acquired in S799 in the empty storage area for the sixth and subsequent dishes (S800).

After the processing of S800 or when the determination in S797 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the internal winning combination is the “group 1 combination” (S801). The "group 1 role" is an internal winning role corresponding to any of the winning numbers "9" to "14", and is "213 bell 1" to "213 bell 8", "231 bell 1" to "231". Inside any of "Bell 8", "312 Bell 1" to "312 Bell 8", "321 Bell 1" to "321 Bell 8", "1xx 3 Bell", "2xx 3 Bell" and "3xx 3 Bell" It is the winning role.

In S801, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the internal winning combination is not the "group 1 combination" (when the determination in S801 is NO), the sub CPU 102 refers to the Kappa sushi data conversion generation lottery table (see FIG. 55). Kappa sushi data conversion generation lottery processing is performed based on the internal winning combination (S802).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the lottery for generating Kawado sushi data conversion has been won (S803). In S803, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the kappa sushi data conversion generation lottery has not been won (when the determination in S803 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the process at the time of winning the kappa _ at the start of the game, and prepares the process for AT. Move to S775 of the middle_game start processing (see FIG. 125).

On the other hand, in S803, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the kappa sushi data conversion generation lottery has been won (when the determination in S803 is YES), the sub CPU 102 uses the kappa sushi data conversion lottery table (see FIGS. 56 to 60). With reference to this, conversion lottery processing of sushi material (Kappa sushi MAP data) for 5 dishes (2nd to 6th dishes) after the next game is performed (S804).

Next, the sub CPU 102 rewrites the Kappa sushi MAP data (sushi material) of the second to sixth dishes based on the lottery result of the Kappa sushi data conversion generation lottery process of S804 (S805). Then, after the processing of S805, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of winning the kappa_game, and shifts the processing to S775 of the processing at the time of AT preparation_game start (see FIG. 125).

Here, returning to the processing of S801 again, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S801 that the internal winning combination is the "group 1 combination" (when the determination in S801 is YES), the sub CPU 102 is the number of kappa games. The number of acquired AT games is determined by lottery based on the Kappa sushi MAP data (sushi material) with reference to the acquired lottery table (see FIG. 54) (S806). Next, the sub CPU 102 adds the determined number of acquired AT games to the current number of acquired AT games (S807).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sushi material at the time of acquiring the number of AT games is any of "squid", "salmon", and "tuna" (Kawado sushi MAP data is "1", "4", and "6". (S808). In S808, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sushi material is not any of "squid", "salmon", and "tuna" (when the determination in S808 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S810 described later.

On the other hand, in S808, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sushi material is any of "squid", "salmon" and "tuna" (when the determination in S808 is YES), the sub CPU 102 is the value of the kappa end counter. Is subtracted by "1" (S809).

After the processing of S809 or when the determination in S808 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the kappa end counter is less than "0" (S810).

In S810, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the kappa end counter is not less than "0" (when the determination in S810 is NO), the sub CPU 102 sets the number of AT games after the addition calculation of S807 to "the number of AT start games". "(S811). Then, after the processing of S811, the sub CPU 701 ends the processing at the time of winning the kappa_game, and shifts the processing to S775 of the processing at the time of AT preparation_game start (see FIG. 125).

On the other hand, in S810, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the kappa end counter is less than "0" (when the determination in S810 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns on the AT entry flag (S812). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets "20 times" in the "BET return chance" (S813).

By the processing of S813, as a revival lottery of the game for determining the number of AT start games, which is performed at the end of the processing at the time of winning the kappa _ at the start of the game, it is possible to draw by pressing the BET button 20 times (recovering repeated hits). If the revival lottery by pressing the BET button 20 times is won, the kappa victory time_game start time processing (AT start game number acquisition processing) is performed again.

Then, after the processing of S813, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of winning the kappa_game, and shifts the processing to S775 of the processing at the time of AT preparation_game start (see FIG. 125).

Although not shown in FIG. 127, when the sushi material is "Kappa sushi roll" (when the Kappa sushi MAP data is "3") in the lottery processing of the number of acquired AT games in S806, "LIFE up" is performed. Wins. In this case, the sub CPU 102 adds "1" to the value of the kappa end counter instead of the series of processes from the AT game number addition process (S807) to the kappa end counter subtraction process (S809). Will be done.

As described above, in S793 of the Kappa victory time_game start processing of the present embodiment, 10 dishes (10 games) of sushi material (Kappa sushi MA data) sequentially displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 are determined. , This process is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a means (additional game information determining means) for determining game information for 10 games sequentially displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 in the Kawado sushi production.

Further, in S804 of the processing at the time of winning the kappa _ at the start of the game, if the internal winning role is other than "group role 1" (for example, "missing") and the winning is won in the kappa sushi data conversion generation lottery, the second to sixth dishes Whether or not to rewrite the kappa sushi MAP data (sushi material) of the eyes is determined by lottery, and this process is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 is a means (game information change) for determining whether or not to change the Kappa sushi MAP data (sushi material) for the second and subsequent dishes when the internal winning combination is lost. It also serves as a means of determination). In addition, in S805 of the processing at the time of Kappa victory_game start, when the rewriting of the Kappa sushi MAP data (sushi material) is decided, the Kappa sushi MAP data (sushi material) of the second to sixth dishes is rewritten. , This process is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a means (game information changing means) for changing the kappa sushi MAP data (sushi material) for the second and subsequent dishes.

Further, in S807 of the processing at the time of Kappa victory_game start, when the internal winning combination is "group combination 1" (specified internal winning combination), the number of acquired AT games is added to the current number of acquired AT games. , This process is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a means for adding the number of acquired AT games to the current number of acquired AT games (unit game number adding means).

In addition, in S807 to S809 of the processing at the time of Kappa victory_game start, when the internal winning combination is "Group role 1", the value of the Kappa end counter is updated according to the sushi material (Kappa sushi MA data) ("Kappa sushi MA data"). 1 "subtraction or" 1 "addition) is performed, and this process is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a means for updating the value of the kappa end counter (end information updating means). Further, in S811 of the Kado victory_game start process, if the value of the Kado end counter is less than "0" (when the AT start game number determination game at the time of "Kado" victory ends), it is acquired at that time. The total number of AT games being played is set as the number of AT start games, and this process is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 is a means (basic unit) for setting the total number of AT games acquired by the end of the AT start game number determination game at the time of "Kawado" victory as the AT start game number. It also serves as a means for determining the number of games. Further, in S813 of the process at the time of Kappa victory_game start, a revival lottery of the AT start game number determination game at the time of "Kappa" victory is performed at the end of the AT start game number determination game, and this process is performed by the sub control circuit 101. Will be executed. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 is a means for performing a revival lottery of the AT start game number determination game when the "Kappa" wins at the end of the game period of the AT start game number determination game when the "Kappa" wins. It also serves as a return lottery means).

[During AT_Processing at game start]
Next, with reference to FIG. 128, the process at the time of AT_game start performed in S423 in the flowchart of the process at the time of receiving the start command (see FIG. 96) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of penalty games is larger than "0" (S821).

In S821, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of penalty games is not greater than "0" (when the determination in S821 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S823 described later. On the other hand, in S821, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of penalty games is larger than "0" (when the determination in S821 is YES), the sub CPU 102 subtracts "1" from the number of penalty games (S822).

After the processing of S822 or when the determination in S821 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of remaining AT games is larger than "0" (S823).

In S823, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of remaining AT games is not greater than "0" (when the determination in S823 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S825 described later. On the other hand, in S823, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of remaining AT games is larger than "0" (when the determination in S823 is YES), the sub CPU 102 subtracts "1" from the number of remaining AT games (S824).

After the processing of S824 or when the determination in S823 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (previous) and the gaming state (previous) is "AT preparing". (S825). When the sub CPU 102 determines in S825 that the determination condition of S825 is not satisfied (when the determination in S825 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S832 described later.

On the other hand, in S825, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determination condition of S825 is satisfied (when the determination in S825 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the game number lottery end flag is off (S826). ).

The game number lottery end flag indicates whether the AT start game number determination process by the player's MAX bet button 21 continuous hitting operation (continuous hitting lottery) has been completed in the AT start game number determination game when "Woman A" wins. It is a flag for determining whether or not (whether or not the pressing operation is performed until the additional lottery for the number of AT start games is not won). In the game for determining the number of AT start games when "Woman A" wins, when the process of determining the number of AT start games by repeatedly hitting the MAX bet button 21 is completed (when the number of AT start games is determined), The number of games lottery end flag is turned on. However, in the game for determining the number of AT start games when "Woman A" wins, if the MAX bet button 21 is not repeatedly hit, or in the middle of the continuous hit lottery (the additional lottery for the number of AT start games becomes non-winning). If the player stops pressing the MAX bet button 21, that is, if the number of AT start games at the time of winning "Woman A" is not determined, the game number lottery end flag is turned off. ..

In S826, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the game number lottery end flag is off (when the determination in S826 is YES), that is, in the previous game (the final game of the AT start game number determination game), "Woman A". If the number of AT start games at the time of victory has not been determined, the sub CPU 102 executes the process of determining the number of female A_AT start games (S827). In this process, a predetermined number of AT start games (5 games or 50) is referred to in the AT start game number lottery (at the time of woman A victory) table (FIG. 48A or FIG. 48B) determined in the AT start game number determination game. If the lottery for the game) is performed and the lottery result is a win (continuation), the predetermined number of AT start games is added to the number of AT start games currently determined. The details of the process of determining the number of female A_AT start games will be described later with reference to FIG. 148 described later.

Then, after the processing of S827, the sub CPU 102 returns the processing to S826. Then, the processes of S826 and S827 are repeated until the game number lottery end flag is turned off. That is, in the present embodiment, when the number of AT start games is not determined in the AT start game number determination game when "Woman A" wins, the predetermined AT start game number (5 games or 5 games or) is set at the start of the AT game. The loop addition lottery of 50 games) is automatically performed, and the number of AT start games when "Woman A" wins is determined.

On the other hand, in S826, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the game number lottery end flag is not in the off state (when the determination in S826 is NO), that is, when the number of AT start games at the time of winning "Woman A" is determined. The sub CPU 102 refers to the winning target person lottery table (see FIG. 34) and performs the lottery processing of the race winning target (candidate) person (S828). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of the winner lottery process to the "race winner" (S829).

Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the post-AT race win expectation data selection lottery table (see FIG. 39), and performs a race win rate lottery process (post-AT race win rate lottery process) performed in the post-AT transition production game (see FIG. 39). S830). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of the post-AT race win rate lottery process in S830 in the race win rate data (S831).

After the processing of S831 or when the determination in S825 is NO, the sub CPU 102 performs the pseudo BB lottery processing described with reference to FIG. 119 (S832). Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the direct addition lottery table (see FIGS. 47A and 47C), and performs an additional lottery process for the number of AT games (directly added lottery process) (S833). At this time, when the penalty flag is in the off state, the direct addition lottery (penalty flag OFF) table in FIG. 47A is referred to, and when the penalty flag is in the on state, the direct addition lottery in FIG. 47C (penalty flag OFF) is referred to. Penalty flag ON: During AT, during AT BB) The table is referenced. Next, the sub CPU 102 adds the value of the lottery result (the number of additional AT games) of the direct addition lottery process to the number of remaining AT games (S834).

Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to a push order navigation lottery table (not shown), and performs a push order navigation lottery process for a small winning combination related to the “push order bell” (S835). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of this push order navigation lottery process to the "push order navigation number" (S836). Then, after the processing of S836, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of starting the game during AT, and shifts the processing to S426 of the processing at the time of receiving the start command (see FIG. 96).

As described above, in the AT-game start processing of the present embodiment, an additional lottery for the number of AT games is performed, and this processing is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a means (notifying game adding means, first notifying game adding means) for determining the number of additions of the unit game number of the AT game in the AT game. Further, in the above-mentioned processing at the start of the AT game, when the number of AT start games is not determined in the transition effect game when "Woman A" wins (when the game number lottery end flag is off), the AT game At the start, the number of AT start games at the time of winning "Woman A" is determined, and this process is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, when the number of AT start games (basic unit game number) is not determined in the transition effect game when the "woman A" wins, the sub-control circuit 101 "woman A" at the start of the AT game. It also serves as a means for determining the number of AT start games at the time of victory (second basic game number determination means).

[BB_Game start processing during AT]
Next, with reference to FIG. 129, the BB_game start processing during AT performed in S425 in the flowchart (see FIG. 96) of the start command reception processing will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of penalty games is "0" (S841).

In S841, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of penalty games is not "0" (when the determination in S841 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S843 described later. That is, when the current game is being penalized, the BB rush determination process (at the start of the game) of S842 described later is not performed. In this case, since the process of turning on the BB rush check flag (transition process to the pseudo BB game) is not performed, a state in which the pseudo BB game is not started occurs.

On the other hand, in S841, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of penalty games is "0" (when the determination in S841 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the BB rush determination process (at the start of the game) described with reference to FIG. 121. Do (S842).

After the processing of S842 or when the determination in S841 is NO, the sub CPU 102 performs the BBJAC transition determination processing (at the start of the game) described with reference to FIG. 122 (S843). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs the BB counter management process described with reference to FIG. 123 (S844).

Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the direct addition lottery table (see FIGS. 47A and 47C), and performs an additional lottery process for the number of AT games (directly added lottery process) (S845). At this time, when the penalty flag is in the off state, the direct addition lottery (penalty flag OFF) table in FIG. 47A is referred to, and when the penalty flag is in the on state, the direct addition lottery in FIG. 47C (penalty flag OFF) is referred to. Penalty flag ON: During AT, during AT BB) The table is referenced. Next, the sub CPU 102 adds the value of the lottery result (the number of additional AT games) of the direct addition lottery process to the number of remaining AT games (S846).

Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to a push order navigation lottery table (not shown), and performs a push order navigation lottery process for a small winning combination related to the “push order bell” (S847). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of this push order navigation lottery process to the “push order navigation number” (S848). Then, after the processing of S848, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the start of BB_game during AT, and shifts the processing to S426 of the processing at the time of receiving the start command (see FIG. 96).

As described above, in the AT-in-AT BB_game start processing of the present embodiment, an additional lottery for the number of AT games is performed, and this processing is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 also serves as a means for determining the addition number of the unit game number of the AT game (second notification game addition means) in the pseudo BB game.

[Game status setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 130, the game state setting process performed in S427 in the flowchart (see FIG. 96) of the process at the time of receiving the start command will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (current) is "general" (S851).

In S851, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the game state (current) is "general middle" (when the determination in S851 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the general middle_game state setting process (S852). The details of the general middle _game state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 131 described later. Then, after the processing of S852, the sub CPU 102 ends the game state setting processing, and also ends the processing at the time of receiving the start command (see FIG. 96).

On the other hand, in S851, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not "general middle" (when the determination in S851 is NO), the sub CPU 102 has the gaming state (current) "general middle BB". Whether or not it is determined (S853).

In S853, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is "general middle BB" (when the determination in S853 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the general middle BB_game state setting process (S854). The details of the general BB_game state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 132 described later. Then, after the processing of S854, the sub CPU 102 ends the game state setting processing, and also ends the processing at the time of receiving the start command (see FIG. 96).

On the other hand, in S853, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not "general middle BB" (when the determination in S853 is NO), the sub CPU 102 is in the gaming state (current) "racing". Whether or not it is determined (S855).

In S855, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the game state (current) is "race in progress" (when the determination in S855 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the race-in-game state setting process (S856). The details of the during-race_game state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 133 described later. Then, after the processing of S856, the sub CPU 102 ends the game state setting processing, and also ends the processing at the time of receiving the start command (see FIG. 96).

On the other hand, in S855, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not "race in progress" (when the determination in S855 is NO), the sub CPU 102 has the gaming state (current) "AT preparing". Whether or not it is determined (S857).

In S857, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the game state (current) is "AT preparing" (when the determination in S857 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the AT preparing_game state setting process (S858). .. The details of the AT preparation_game state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 134 described later. Then, after the process of S858, the sub CPU 102 ends the game state setting process and also ends the process at the time of receiving the start command (see FIG. 96).

On the other hand, in S857, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not "AT preparing" (when the determination in S857 is NO), the sub CPU 102 has the gaming state (current) "AT in progress BB". It is determined whether or not there is (S859).

In S859, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is "AT in BB" (when the determination in S859 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the AT BB_gaming state setting process (S860). The details of the BB_game state setting process during AT will be described later with reference to FIG. 135 described later. Then, after the processing of S860, the sub CPU 102 ends the game state setting processing, and also ends the processing at the time of receiving the start command (see FIG. 96).

On the other hand, in S859, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is not "AT in BB" (when the determination in S859 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the game state setting process and processes when the start command is received. (See FIG. 96) also ends.

Although not shown in FIG. 130, in a series of repetitive processes of the above-mentioned sub-game state determination process and game state setting process during the game state setting process, the sub-game state is actually "W chance". Judgment processing of whether or not there is, a game state setting process of "W chance in progress", a judgment process of whether or not the sub game state is "AT in progress", and a game state setting process of "AT in progress" are also performed. ..

[General middle_game status setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 131, the general medium_game state setting process performed in S852 in the flowchart of the game state setting process (see FIG. 130) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the cycle counter is "0" (S871).

In S871, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the cycle counter is not "0" (when the determination in S871 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S873 described later. On the other hand, in S871, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the cycle counter is "0" (when the determination in S871 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets "during the race" in the gaming state (next time) (the next time). S872).

After the processing of S872 or when the determination in S871 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the BB precursor counter is "0" (S873). In S873, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the BB precursor counter is not "0" (when the determination in S873 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the general middle _game state setting process and the game state setting process. (See FIG. 130) also ends.

On the other hand, in S873, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the BB precursor counter is "0" (when the determination in S873 is YES), is the sub CPU 102 in the gaming state (next time) "in the race"? Whether or not it is determined (S874).

In S874, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (next time) is not "during the race" (when the determination in S874 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S876 described later. On the other hand, in S874, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (next time) is "race in progress" (when the determination in S874 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns on the race occurrence flag (S875).

After the processing of S875 or when the determination in S874 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the race occurrence flag is in the ON state (S876). In S876, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the race occurrence flag is not in the ON state (when the determination in S876 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S878 described later. On the other hand, in S876, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the race occurrence flag is in the ON state (when the determination in S876 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets “0” in the cycle counter (S877).

After the processing of S877 or when the determination in S876 is NO, the sub CPU 102 sets "general middle BB" in the gaming state (next time) (S878). Then, after the processing of S878, the sub CPU 102 ends the general middle _game state setting process and also ends the game state setting process (see FIG. 130).

[General middle BB_game state setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 132, the general medium BB_game state setting process performed in S854 in the flowchart of the game state setting process (see FIG. 130) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the BB game counter is "0" (S881). In S881, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the BB game counter is not "0" (when the determination in S881 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the general BB_game state setting process and the game state setting process. (See FIG. 130) also ends.

On the other hand, in S881, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the BB game counter is "0" (when the determination in S881 is YES), the sub CPU 102 has a pseudo BB state of "ChaJAC" and JAC. It is determined whether or not the number of times of bell navigation is larger than "0" (S882). In S882, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determination condition of S882 is satisfied (when the determination in S882 is YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the general BB_game state setting process and the game state setting process (see FIG. 130). ) Also ends.

On the other hand, in S882, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determination condition of S882 is not satisfied (NO determination in S882), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the race occurrence flag is on (S883). ..

In S883, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the race occurrence flag is not in the ON state (when the determination in S883 is NO), the sub CPU 102 sets "general middle" in the game state (next time) (S884). Then, after the processing of S884, the sub CPU 102 ends the general BB_game state setting process and also ends the game state setting process (see FIG. 130).

On the other hand, in S883, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the race occurrence flag is in the ON state (when the determination in S883 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets "in race" in the gaming state (next time) (S885). .. Then, after the processing of S885, the sub CPU 102 ends the general BB_game state setting process and also ends the game state setting process (see FIG. 130).

[During the race_Game status setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 133, the during-race_game state setting process performed in S856 in the flowchart of the game state setting process (see FIG. 130) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of racing games is the 10th game (S891). In S891, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of race games is not the 10th game (when the determination in S891 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the race-in-game state setting process and the game state setting process (FIG. See 130) also ends.

On the other hand, in S891, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of race games is the 10th game (when the determination in S891 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the race victory flag is on (the race victory flag is ON). S892).

In S892, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the race victory flag is not in the ON state (when the determination in S892 is NO), the sub CPU 102 sets "general middle" in the game state (next time) (S893). Then, after the processing of S893, the sub CPU 102 ends the _game state setting process during the race, and also ends the game state setting process (see FIG. 130).

On the other hand, in S892, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the race victory flag is in the ON state (when the determination in S892 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the BB precursor counter is "0". (S894).

In S894, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the BB precursor counter is not "0" (when the determination in S894 is NO), the sub CPU 102 sets "AT preparing" in the game state (next time) (S895). ). Then, after the processing of S895, the sub CPU 102 ends the _game state setting process during the race, and also ends the game state setting process (see FIG. 130).

On the other hand, in S894, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the BB precursor counter is "0" (when the determination in S894 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets "AT in BB" in the gaming state (next time). (S896). Then, after the processing of S896, the sub CPU 102 ends the _game state setting process during the race, and also ends the game state setting process (see FIG. 130).

[AT preparation_game status setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 134, the AT preparing_game state setting process performed in S858 in the flowchart of the game state setting process (see FIG. 130) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the AT inrush flag is in the ON state (S901). In S901, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the AT rush flag is not in the ON state (when the determination in S901 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the AT preparation_game state setting process and the game state setting process (FIG. See 130) also ends.

On the other hand, in S901, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the AT entry flag is in the ON state (when the determination in S901 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets "AT in progress" in the gaming state (next time) (S902). .. Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the BB precursor counter is "0" or more (S903).

In S903, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the BB precursor counter is not "0" or more (when the determination in S903 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S906 described later.

On the other hand, in S903, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the BB precursor counter is "0" or more (when the determination in S903 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the value of the BB precursor counter to "0". (S904). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets "AT in BB" to the gaming state (next time) (S905).

After the processing of S905 or when the determination in S903 is NO, the sub CPU 102 turns off the "game number lottery end flag" (S906). The "game number lottery end flag" is a flag indicating whether or not to end the AT start game number determination game. Then, after the processing of S906, the sub CPU 102 ends the AT preparation_game state setting process and also ends the game state setting process (see FIG. 130).

[BB_game status setting process during AT]
Next, with reference to FIG. 135, the BB_game state setting process during AT performed in S860 in the flowchart of the game state setting process (see FIG. 130) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the BB game counter is "0" (S911). In S911, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the BB game counter is not "0" (when the determination in S911 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the BB_game state setting process during AT and the game state setting process. (See FIG. 130) also ends.

On the other hand, in S911, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the BB game counter is "0" (when the determination in S911 is YES), the sub CPU 102 has a pseudo BB state of "ChaJAC" and JAC. It is determined whether or not the number of times of bell navigation is larger than "0" (S912). When the sub CPU 102 determines in S912 that the determination condition of S912 is satisfied (when the determination in S912 is YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the BB_game state setting process during AT and the game state setting process (see FIG. 130). ) Also ends.

On the other hand, in S912, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determination condition of S912 is not satisfied (NO in S912), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the race victory flag is on (S913). ..

In S913, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the race victory flag is in the ON state (when the determination in S913 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets "AT preparing" in the game state (next time) (S914). Then, after the processing of S914, the sub CPU 102 ends the BB_game state setting process during AT, and also ends the game state setting process (see FIG. 130).

On the other hand, in S913, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the race victory flag is not in the ON state (when the determination in S913 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the "additional challenge flag" is in the ON state (when the race victory flag is determined to be NO). S915). The "additional challenge flag" is a flag indicating whether or not the game in the additional challenge state is executed, and is not shown, but is set in the AT preparation_game state setting process.

In S915, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the additional challenge flag is on (when the determination in S915 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets "additional challenge in progress" to the gaming state (next time) (S916). Then, after the processing of S916, the sub CPU 102 ends the BB_game state setting process during AT, and also ends the game state setting process (see FIG. 130).

On the other hand, in S915, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the additional challenge flag is not in the ON state (when the determination in S915 is NO), the sub CPU 102 sets "AT in progress" in the game state (next time) (S917). Then, after the processing of S917, the sub CPU 102 ends the BB_game state setting process during AT, and also ends the game state setting process (see FIG. 130).

[Processing when receiving reel stop command]
Next, with reference to FIG. 136, the reel stop command reception processing performed in S360 in the flowchart of the effect content determination processing (see FIGS. 91 and 92) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the special processing condition is satisfied (S921). The "special processing condition" is a condition in which the penalty determination is not performed. Specifically, when the maximum number of medals that can be inserted is two, the game state is the state between the 3MB flags. This is the case, or when the MB is in operation.

In S921, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the special processing condition is satisfied (when the determination in S921 is YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of receiving the reel stop command and determines the effect content (FIG. 91). And FIG. 92) also ends. On the other hand, in S921, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the special processing condition is not satisfied (NO in S921), is the sub CPU 102 the current reel stop state other than the first stop? Whether or not it is determined (S922).

In S922, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the current stop state of the reel is a state other than the first stop (when the determination in S922 is YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of receiving the reel stop command, and also The effect content determination process (see FIGS. 91 and 92) is also completed. On the other hand, in S922, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the current stop state of the reel is not a state other than the first stop (when the determination in S922 is NO), the sub CPU 102 has a gaming state (current) of "general". It is determined whether or not it is (S923).

In S923, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is "general middle" (when the determination in S923 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the general middle penalty process (S924). The details of the general penalty treatment will be described later with reference to FIG. 137 described later. Then, after the processing of S924, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of receiving the reel stop command, and also ends the effect content determination processing (see FIGS. 91 and 92).

On the other hand, in S923, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not "general" (when the determination in S923 is NO), is the sub CPU 102 "racing" in the gaming state (current)? Whether or not it is determined (S925).

In S925, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is "race in progress" (when the determination in S925 is YES), the sub CPU 102 has an internal winning combination of "push order bell" (CT bell). It is determined whether or not the first stopped reel is other than the left reel 3L (S926).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S926 that the determination condition of S926 is not satisfied (NO in S926), the sub CPU 102 ends the reel stop command reception process and determines the effect content (FIGS. 91 and 91). (See FIG. 92) also ends. On the other hand, in S926, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determination condition of S926 is satisfied (when the determination in S926 is YES), the sub CPU 102 adds "5" to the number of penalty games and adds "1" to the value of the penalty counter. "Is added (S927).

In the process of S927, when the number of penalty games after addition exceeds "10" (upper limit value of the number of penalty games), the sub CPU 102 sets "10" to the number of penalty games. If the value of the penalty counter after addition exceeds "10" (upper limit of the value of the penalty counter), the sub CPU 102 sets the value of the penalty counter to "10". Then, after the processing of S927, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of receiving the reel stop command, and also ends the effect content determination processing (see FIGS. 91 and 92).

Here, returning to the process of S925 again, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S925 that the gaming state (current) is not "race in progress" (when the determination in S925 is NO), the sub CPU 102 is in the gaming state (when the determination is NO). It is determined whether or not (currently) is "general BB" or "AT BB" (S928).

In S928, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is "general BB" or "AT BB" (when the determination in S928 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a penalty process during BB (when the determination is YES). S929). The details of the penalty processing during BB will be described later with reference to FIG. 138 described later. Then, after the processing of S929, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of receiving the reel stop command, and also ends the effect content determination processing (see FIGS. 91 and 92).

On the other hand, in S928, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not "general BB" or "AT BB" (when S928 is NO determination), the sub CPU 102 is in the gaming state (current). It is determined whether or not it is "during AT" (S930).

In S930, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not "AT in progress" (when the determination in S930 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the reel stop command reception process and determines the effect content. (See FIGS. 91 and 92) also ends. On the other hand, in S930, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the game state (current) is "AT in progress" (when the determination in S930 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the number of penalty games is larger than "0". Is determined (S931).

In S931, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of penalty games is not greater than "0" (when the determination in S931 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of receiving the reel stop command and determines the effect content (the effect content determination processing). (See FIGS. 91 and 92) also ends. On the other hand, in S931, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of penalty games is larger than "0" (when the determination in S931 is YES), the sub CPU 102 subtracts "1" from the number of penalty games (S932). Then, after the processing of S932, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of receiving the reel stop command, and also ends the effect content determination processing (see FIGS. 91 and 92).

[General penalty processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 137, the general penalty processing performed in S924 in the flowchart of the reel stop command reception processing (see FIG. 136) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the internal winning combination is the "push order bell" (CT bell) and the first stopped reel is other than the left reel 3L (S941).

In S941, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determination condition of S941 is not satisfied (NO in S941), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of penalty games is greater than "0" (S942).

In S942, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of penalty games is not greater than "0" (when the determination in S942 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the general penalty process and processes when the reel stop command is received (when the penalty game is received). (See FIG. 136) also ends. On the other hand, in S942, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of penalty games is larger than "0" (when the determination in S942 is YES), the sub CPU 102 subtracts "1" from the number of penalty games (S943). Then, after the processing of S943, the sub CPU 102 ends the general penalty processing and also the processing at the time of receiving the reel stop command (see FIG. 136).

Here, returning to the process of S941 again, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S941 that the determination condition of S941 is satisfied (when the determination in S941 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the number of penalty games to "5". Add and add "1" to the value of the penalty counter (S944). In this process, if the number of penalty games after addition exceeds "10" (upper limit of the number of penalty games), the sub CPU 102 sets "10" to the number of penalty games. If the value of the penalty counter after addition exceeds "10" (upper limit of the value of the penalty counter), the sub CPU 102 sets the value of the penalty counter to "10".

Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the race win rate data rewrite (during penalty) table shown in FIG. 40, and performs the race win rate data rewrite lottery process (S945). If the lottery process is won (when the winning type is other than "no rewriting"), the race winning percentage data is rewritten so that the race winning percentage (AT winning probability) of the current cycle is reduced as a penalty.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the race win rate data rewriting lottery in S945 has been won (whether or not the winning type is other than "no rewriting") (S946). In S946, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the race win rate data rewriting lottery has not been won (when the determination in S946 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the general penalty process and processes when the reel stop command is received (FIG. 136) also ends.

On the other hand, in S946, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the race win rate data rewriting lottery has been won (when the determination in S946 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines the race win rate as the lottery result (in the present embodiment, the race win rate is 0%). Is set (S947). Then, after the processing of S947, the sub CPU 102 ends the general penalty processing and also the processing at the time of receiving the reel stop command (see FIG. 136).

[Penalty processing during BB]
Next, with reference to FIG. 138, the penalty processing during BB performed in S929 in the flowchart of the processing at the time of receiving the reel stop command (see FIG. 136) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of penalty games is larger than "0" (S951).

In S951, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of penalty games is not greater than "0" (when the determination in S951 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S953 described later. On the other hand, in S951, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of penalty games is larger than "0" (when the determination in S951 is YES), the sub CPU 102 subtracts "1" from the number of penalty games (S952).

After the processing of S952 or when the determination in S951 is NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo BB state is "waiting for BB operation" (S953).

In S953, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is not "waiting for BB operation" (when the determination in S953 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the penalty processing during BB and processes when receiving the reel stop command (when the reel stop command is received). (See FIG. 136) also ends. On the other hand, in S953, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is "waiting for BB operation" (when the determination in S953 is YES), the sub CPU 102 has a penalty game number larger than "0" or a penalty. It is determined whether or not the flag is in the ON state (S954).

In S954, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determination condition of S954 is not satisfied (NO in S954), the sub CPU 102 ends the penalty processing during BB and processes when receiving the reel stop command (see FIG. 136). ) Also ends. On the other hand, in S954, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determination condition of S954 is satisfied (when the determination in S954 is YES), the sub CPU 102 has an internal winning combination of "push order bell" (CT bell) and It is determined whether or not the first stopped reel is other than the left reel 3L (S955).

In S955, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determination condition of S955 is not satisfied (NO in S955), the sub CPU 102 ends the penalty processing during BB and processes when receiving the reel stop command (see FIG. 136). ) Also ends. On the other hand, in S955, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determination condition of S955 is satisfied (when the determination in S955 is YES), the sub CPU 102 adds "5" to the number of penalty games (S956). In this process, if the number of penalty games after addition exceeds "10" (upper limit of the number of penalty games), the sub CPU 102 sets "10" to the number of penalty games.

Then, after the processing of S956, the sub CPU 102 ends the penalty processing during BB, and also ends the processing at the time of receiving the reel stop command (see FIG. 136).

[Processing when receiving a winning operation command]
Next, with reference to FIG. 139, the process at the time of receiving the winning operation command performed in S362 in the flowchart of the effect content determination process (see FIGS. 91 and 92) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub-game state is at the time of winning the "general middle BB" (hereinafter, referred to as "general middle BB_winning time") (S961).

In S961, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is "general middle BB_winning time" (when S961 is YES determination), the sub CPU 102 performs the general middle BB_winning time processing (S962). The details of the general middle BB_ prize-winning process will be described later with reference to FIG. 140 described later. Then, after the processing of S962, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of receiving the winning operation command, and also ends the effect content determination processing (see FIGS. 91 and 92).

On the other hand, in S961, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is not "general middle BB_winning time" (when S961 is NO determination), the sub CPU 102 is when the sub game state is "race in progress". Hereinafter, it is determined whether or not it is “during the race_at the time of winning”) (S963).

In S963, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub-game state is "during the race_at the time of winning" (when the determination in S963 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the processing during the race_at the time of winning (S964). The details of the process during the race_winning will be described later with reference to FIG. 143, which will be described later. Then, after the processing of S964, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of receiving the winning operation command, and also ends the effect content determination processing (see FIGS. 91 and 92).

On the other hand, in S963, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is not "during race_at the time of winning" (when S963 is determined to be NO), the sub CPU 102 is at the time of winning when the sub game state is "during AT BB". (Hereinafter referred to as "at the time of BB_winning during AT"), it is determined (S965). In S965, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is not "at the time of BB_winning during AT" (when the determination in S965 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of receiving the winning operation command and determines the production content. The process (see FIGS. 91 and 92) also ends.

On the other hand, in S965, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub game state is "at BB_winning during AT" (when the determination in S965 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs BB_winning processing during AT (S966). .. The details of the BB_winning process during AT will be described later with reference to FIG. 144 described later. Then, after the processing of S966, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of receiving the winning operation command, and also ends the effect content determination processing (see FIGS. 91 and 92).

[General BB_Processing at the time of winning]
Next, with reference to FIG. 140, the general middle BB_ prize-winning process performed in S962 in the flowchart of the winning operation command reception processing (see FIG. 139) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 performs a BB rush determination process (at the time of winning) (S971). The details of the BB rush determination process (at the time of winning) will be described later with reference to FIG. 141 described later.

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a BBJAC transition determination process (at the time of winning) (S972). The details of the BBJAC transition determination process (at the time of winning) will be described later with reference to FIG. 142 described later. Then, after the processing of S972, the sub CPU 102 ends the general middle BB_ prize-winning process, and also ends the winning operation command reception process (see FIG. 139).

[BB rush judgment processing (at the time of winning)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 141, the BB rush determination process (at the time of winning) performed in S971 in the flowchart of the general middle BB_ winning process (see FIG. 140) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the BB inrush check flag is in the ON state (S981). In S981, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BB entry check flag is not in the ON state (when the determination in S981 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the BB entry determination process (at the time of winning), and the process is performed in the general BB_ prize. Move to S972 of time processing (see FIG. 140).

On the other hand, in S981, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BB entry check flag is in the ON state (when the determination in S981 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns the BB entry check flag in the OFF state (S982).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the player has pressed the stop button according to the push order navigation of the stop button (hereinafter, referred to as “BB rush navigation”) notified by the liquid crystal display device 11 at the time of entering the pseudo BB game. (S983).

In the present embodiment, when the internal winning combination is "normal lip 1" or "normal lip 3", the order of "right, left, middle" is notified as the pressing order of the stop button. When the internal winning combination is "normal lip 2" or "normal lip 4", the order of "right, middle, left" is notified as the pressing order of the stop button. When the internal winning combination is "normal lip 5" or "normal lip 7", the order of "middle left and right" is notified as the pressing order of the stop button. Further, when the internal winning combination is "normal lip 6" or "normal lip 8", the order of "middle right left" is notified as the pressing order of the stop button.

In S983, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the player has followed the BB rush navigation (when the determination in S983 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns on the BB rush flag (S984). Next, the sub CPU 102 turns off the penalty flag (S985). Then, after the processing of S985, the sub CPU 102 ends the BB entry determination processing (at the time of winning), and shifts the processing to S972 of the general middle BB_winning processing (see FIG. 140).

On the other hand, in S983, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the player did not follow the BB entry navigation (when the determination in S983 is NO), that is, when the BB entry navigation is ignored, the sub CPU 102 has a penalty game number. It is determined whether or not it is "0" (S986).

In S986, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of penalty games is not "0" (when the determination in S986 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the BB rush determination process (at the time of winning), and the process is performed in general BB_winning. Move to S972 of time processing (see FIG. 140). On the other hand, in S986, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of penalty games is "0" (when the determination in S986 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns on the penalty flag (S987). Then, after the processing of S987, the sub CPU 102 ends the BB entry determination processing (at the time of winning), and shifts the processing to S972 of the general middle BB_winning processing (see FIG. 140).

[BBJAC transition judgment process (at the time of winning)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 142, the BBJAC transition determination process (at the time of winning) performed in S972 in the flowchart of the general BB_winning process (see FIG. 140) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the BARJAC inrush check flag is in the ON state (S991). In S991, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BARJAC entry check flag is not in the ON state (when the determination in S991 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S998 described later.

On the other hand, in S991, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BARJAC rush check flag is on (when the determination in S991 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns off the BARJAC rush check flag (S992). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo BB state is “in BB” (S993).

In S993, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is "in BB" (when the determination in S993 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S997 described later. On the other hand, in S993, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is not "in BB" (when the determination in S993 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the pseudo BB state is "in ChaBB". (S994).

In S994, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is not "in ChaBB" (when the determination in S994 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S998 described later. On the other hand, in S994, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the pseudo BB state is "in ChaBB" (when the determination in S994 is YES), the sub CPU 102 has a display combination (winning combination) of "BAR lip". Whether or not it is determined (S995). The winning combination "BAR Lip" corresponds to "Bell Lip 3" or "Bell Lip 4".

In S995, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the display combination (winning combination) is the "BAR lip" (when the determination in S995 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S997 described later. On the other hand, in S995, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the display combination (winning combination) is not the "BAR lip" (when the determination in S995 is NO), the sub CPU 102 is in the gaming state (currently BB during AT). It is determined whether or not there is (S996).

In S996, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is "AT in BB" (when the determination in S996 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S997 described later. On the other hand, in S996, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not "AT in BB" (when the determination in S996 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S998 described later.

If S993, S995 or S996 is a YES determination, the sub CPU 102 turns on the BARJAC inrush flag (S997).

After the processing of S997, or when S991, S994 or S996 is NO determination, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (next time) (S998). In S998, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is not different from the gaming state (next time) (when the determination in S998 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the BBJAC transition determination process (at the time of winning). , General BB_ prize-winning processing (see FIG. 140) is also completed.

On the other hand, in S998, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is different from the gaming state (next time) (when the determination in S998 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the BARJAC entry flag is on. Is determined (S999). In S999, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BARJAC entry flag is not in the ON state (when the determination in S999 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the BBJAC transition determination process (at the time of winning), and at the same time, the general middle BB_ prize processing (See FIG. 140) also ends.

On the other hand, in S999, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BARJAC entry flag is in the ON state (when the determination in S999 is YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the game state (current) to the game state (next time) (S1000). ). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the value of the BB game counter to "0" (S1001). Then, after the process of S1001, the sub CPU 102 ends the BBJAC transition determination process (at the time of winning), and also ends the general middle BB_winning process (see FIG. 140).

[During the race_Processing at the time of winning]
Next, with reference to FIG. 143, the during-race_winning process performed in S964 in the flowchart of the winning operation command receiving process (see FIG. 139) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the BB inrush check flag is in the ON state (S1011). In S1011, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BB entry check flag is not in the ON state (when the determination in S1011 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the race-time_winning process and the winning operation command reception processing (when the winning operation command is received). (See FIG. 139) also ends.

On the other hand, in S1011, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the BB entry check flag is in the ON state (when the determination in S1011 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns the BB entry check flag in the OFF state (S1012).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the stop button pressing order by the player is in a predetermined order (whether or not the pressing order is correct) (S1013).

In S1013, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the order in which the player presses the stop buttons is not a predetermined order (when the determination in S1013 is NO), the sub CPU 102 turns on the penalty flag (S1014). Then, after the processing of S1014, the sub CPU 102 ends the process during the race_at the time of winning, and also ends the processing at the time of receiving the winning operation command (see FIG. 139).

On the other hand, in S1013, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the stop button pressing order by the player is a predetermined order (when the determination in S1013 is YES), the sub CPU 102 turns on the BB entry flag (S1015). ). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets "AT in BB" to the gaming state (next time) (S1016). Then, after the processing of S1016, the sub CPU 102 ends the process during the race_at the time of winning, and also ends the processing at the time of receiving the winning operation command (see FIG. 139).

[BB during AT_Processing at the time of winning]
Next, with reference to FIG. 144, the BB_winning process during AT performed in S966 in the flowchart of the winning operation command receiving process (see FIG. 139) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 performs the BB entry determination process (at the time of winning) described with reference to FIG. 141 (S1021). Next, the sub CPU 102 performs the BBJAC transition determination process (at the time of winning) described with reference to FIG. 142 (S1022). Then, after the processing of S1022, the sub CPU 102 ends the BB_winning time processing during AT, and also ends the winning operation command reception time processing (see FIG. 139).

[Processing when payout end command is received]
Next, with reference to FIG. 145, the process at the time of receiving the payout end command performed in S364 in the flowchart of the effect content determination process (see FIGS. 91 and 92) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (the gaming state managed by the main CPU 93) is the non-MB state (S1031).

In S1031, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state is in the non-MB state (when the determination in S1031 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of credits for medals is "3" or more (when the determination is YES in S1031). S1032).

In S1032, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of credits for medals is not "3" or more (when the determination in S1032 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the process at the time of receiving the payout end command and determines the effect content (the effect content determination process). (See FIGS. 91 and 92) also ends. On the other hand, in S1032, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of credits for medals is "3" or more (when the determination in S1032 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S1034 described later.

Here, returning to the process of S1031 again, when the sub CPU 102 determines in S1031 that the gaming state is not the non-MB state (when the determination in S1031 is NO), the sub CPU 102 has a medal credit number of "2". It is determined whether or not it is equal to or greater than that (S1033).

In S1033, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of credits for medals is not "2" or more (when the determination in S1033 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the process at the time of receiving the payout end command and determines the effect content (the effect content determination process). (See FIGS. 91 and 92) also ends. On the other hand, in S1033, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the number of credits for medals is "2" or more (when the determination in S1033 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S1034 described later.

When the determination in S1032 or S1033 is YES, the sub CPU 102 makes a lighting request to the LED provided on the MAX bet button 21 (S1034). Then, after the processing of S1034, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of receiving the payout end command, and also ends the effect content determination processing (see FIGS. 91 and 92).

[Processing when no operation command is received]
Next, with reference to FIG. 146, the non-operation command reception processing performed in S374 in the flowchart of the effect content determination processing (see FIGS. 91 and 92) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 is provided with the state information of the input port of each operation unit (for example, on / off information of the BET switch 77, the start switch 79, etc.) included in the received non-operation command data in the sub RAM 103. Saved in the input port state storage area (S1041). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the current state is after receiving the payout end command and before receiving the medal insertion command (S1042).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S1042 that the determination condition of S1042 is not satisfied (NO determination in S1042), the sub CPU 102 ends the non-operation command reception process and determines the effect content (FIGS. 91 and 91). (See FIG. 92) also ends. On the other hand, in S1042, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determination condition of S1042 is satisfied (when the determination in S1042 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the gaming state (current) is "AT preparing". (S1043).

In S1043, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the game state (current) is not "AT preparation" (NO in S1043), the sub CPU 102 ends the non-operation command reception processing and determines the effect content. The process (see FIGS. 91 and 92) also ends.

On the other hand, in S1043, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the gaming state (current) is "AT preparing" (when the determination in S1043 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the process when the AT preparing button is pressed (S1044). ). In this process, a process of determining the number of AT start games when "Woman A" wins and a process of reviving a lottery process of determining the number of AT start games when "Kappa" wins are performed. The details of the process when the AT preparation button is pressed will be described later with reference to FIG. 147, which will be described later. Then, after the processing of S1044, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of receiving the no-operation command, and also ends the effect content determination processing (see FIGS. 91 and 92).

[Processing when pressing the AT preparation button]
Next, with reference to FIG. 147, the process at the time of pressing the AT preparation button performed in S1044 in the flowchart of the process at the time of receiving the non-operation command (see FIG. 146) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the MAX bet button 21 is pressed by the player and the race winner is a "kappa" (S1051).

In S1051, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determination condition of S1051 is satisfied (when the determination in S1051 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a process when the kappa wins_MAX bet button is pressed (S1052). In this process, a lottery for reviving the AT start game number determination game when the "Kappa" wins is performed. Then, after the processing of S1052, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing when the AT preparation button is pressed, and also ends the processing when the no-operation command is received (see FIG. 146).

On the other hand, in S1051, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determination condition of S1051 is not satisfied (when the determination in S1051 is NO), the sub CPU 102 has the selection button 25 (chance button) pressed by the player and the race. It is determined whether or not the winner is "Woman A" (S1053).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S1053 that the determination condition of S1053 is satisfied (YES in S1053), the sub CPU 102 performs an AT start game number lottery table switching process (S1054).

In the game for determining the number of AT start games when "Woman A" wins, as described above, as the determination form (determination mode) for the number of AT start games, the first mode (continuation probability is 50%, addition for each MAX bet operation). A second mode (the continuation probability is 95% and the number of additional games for each MAX bet operation is 5 games) is prepared. Then, in the process of S1054, the AT start game number lottery table (one of FIG. 48A and FIG. 48B) currently set corresponding to one mode is selected by the AT start game number lottery corresponding to the other mode (woman A wins). Hour) Switch to the table (the other of FIGS. 48A and 48B).

For example, in a situation where the currently set AT start game number lottery (when woman A wins) table is the AT start game number lottery (when woman A wins) table corresponding to the second mode (FIG. 48B). When the selection button 25 (chance button) is pressed by a person, the AT start game number lottery (when woman A wins) table (FIG. 48A) corresponding to the first mode is displayed as "woman A" by the switching process of S1054. Determine the number of AT start games at the time of victory The number of AT start games used in the game is set as a lottery (at the time of woman A victory) table. Then, after the processing of S1054, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing when the AT preparation button is pressed, and also ends the processing when the no-operation command is received (see FIG. 146).

On the other hand, in S1053, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determination condition of S1053 is not satisfied (when the determination in S1053 is NO), the sub CPU 102 has the MAX bet button 21 pressed by the player and the race winner. It is determined whether or not the person is "woman A" (S1055).

In S1055, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determination condition of S1055 is not satisfied (NO in S1055), the sub CPU 102 ends the process when the AT preparation button is pressed, and also processes when the non-operation command is received (when the determination condition is NO). (See FIG. 146) also ends.

On the other hand, in S1055, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determination condition of S1055 is satisfied (when the determination in S1055 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the female A_AT start game number determination process (S1056). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines the number of AT start games when "Woman A" wins. The details of the female A_AT start game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 148 described later.

Then, after the processing of S1056, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing when the AT preparation button is pressed, and also ends the processing when the no-operation command is received (see FIG. 146).

As described above, in the process when the AT preparation button is pressed in the present embodiment, when the MAX bet button 21 is pressed by the player and the race winner is "woman A", "woman A" The number of AT start games at the time of victory is determined, and this process is executed by the sub-control circuit 101. That is, in the present embodiment, when the race winner is "woman A", the sub-control circuit 101 is a means for determining the number of AT start games triggered by the pressing operation of the MAX bet button 21 (first basic game). It also serves as a means for determining numbers).

[Woman A_AT start game decision processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 148, the woman performing in S827 in the flowchart of the process at the start of the AT_game (see FIG. 128) or S1056 in the flowchart of the process at the time of pressing the AT preparing button (see FIG. 147). The A_AT start game determination process will be described.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the game number lottery end flag is in the off state (S1061).

In S1061, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the game number lottery end flag is not in the off state (when the determination in S1061 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the female A_AT start game determination process, and the female A_AT start game determination process. When the callee is AT-game start processing (see FIG. 128), the processing is transferred to S826 of AT-game start processing. Further, when the call destination of the female A_AT start game determination process is the process when the AT preparation button is pressed (see FIG. 147) and S1061 is a NO determination, the sub CPU 102 ends the female A_AT start game determination process. At the same time, the processing when the AT preparation button is pressed is also completed.

On the other hand, in S1061, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the game number lottery end flag is in the off state (when the determination in S1061 is YES), the sub CPU 102 uses the AT start game number lottery table (see FIGS. 48A and 48B). With reference to this, a lottery process for the number of female A_AT start games is performed (S1062). Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the female A_AT start game number lottery in S1062 has been won (S1063).

In S1063, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the female A_AT start game number lottery has been won (when the determination in S1063 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines the predetermined number of games (5 games or 50 games) corresponding to the lottery result. , Add to the currently determined number of AT start games (S1064). Then, after the processing of S1064, the sub CPU 102 ends the female A_AT start game determination process, and when the callee of the female A_AT start game determination process is the AT-in-game start time process (see FIG. 128), The process is transferred to S826, which is the process at the time of AT_game start. Further, when the call destination of the female A_AT start game determination process is the process when the AT preparation button is pressed (see FIG. 147), the sub CPU 102 ends the female A_AT start game determination process after the process of S1064, and also terminates the female A_AT start game determination process. The process when the AT preparation button is pressed also ends.

On the other hand, in S1063, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the female A_AT start game number lottery has not been won (when the determination in S1063 is NO), the sub CPU 102 turns on the game number lottery end flag (S1065). Then, after the processing of S1065, the sub CPU 102 ends the female A_AT start game determination process, and when the callee of the female A_AT start game determination process is the AT-in-game start time process (see FIG. 128), The process is transferred to S826, which is the process at the time of AT_game start. Further, when the call destination of the female A_AT start game determination process is the process when the AT preparation button is pressed (see FIG. 147), after the process of S1065, the sub CPU 102 ends the female A_AT start game determination process, and at the same time, The process when the AT preparation button is pressed also ends.

<Various effects>
In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the following various effects can be obtained in terms of playability.

[Various effects obtained by playing games between 2MB flags]
In the present embodiment, as described above, in the RT1 (high RT) game state in which the winning and winning bonus "2MB" is carried over only in the two-card game, that is, in the state between the 2MB flags, a predetermined number of games (190). Various games such as a non-AT state game (normal game and transition production game) having one cycle of the game) and a game in the AT state of a specific number of games are performed. Then, in the game in the state between the 2MB flags, a suggestion of three cards is given, and as long as the player plays the game of three cards according to the suggestion, the game can be played without winning the bonus "2MB". As long as the player plays a three-card game in the state between the 2MB flags, the lottery table for which the establishment and winning of the bonus "2MB" are not specified is referred to, so any stop operation is performed for the bonus "2MB". It is structured so that it does not win a prize.

Further, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a "loss" or a specific internal winning combination (small combination or replay combination) is internally won once or continuously in a normal game, the game period in a non-AT state (normally). A lottery (cycle shortening lottery) is performed to shorten the number of games during the game period. Then, if the cycle shortening lottery is won, the gaming period in the non-AT state of the current set can be shortened, and the period until the transition to the AT state can be shortened. Further, in the present embodiment, when a "loss" or a predetermined internal winning combination (replay combination) is internally won once or continuously in the AT game, an additional lottery for the number of AT games (directly added lottery) is performed. If the game is played and the additional lottery is won, the number of remaining AT games will increase.

That is, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the game in the high RT gaming state during which the bonus is carried over, even if the internal winning combination becomes "missing", the advantageous game can be continued without winning the bonus. .. Further, in the present embodiment, the content of the privilege given at the time of winning the "loss" is different depending on the type of the sub-game state ("normal state" or "AT state") in the high RT game state during the bonus carry-over. be able to.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to give a game value to the "loss" that occurs in the game in the high RT game state during the bonus carry-over, and the range of the game can be expanded. In addition, in a game in a high RT gaming state in which the bonus is carried over, it is possible to appropriately generate a "loss" in which the bonus does not win, so that the gambling of the gaming machine can be maintained. From the above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game in the high RT gaming state during the bonus carry-over.

Further, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the game in the state between the 2MB flags, if the total number of credits and the number of inserted medals is less than 3, the player performs a MAX bet operation. However, the MAX bet operation is invalid. In this case, in the state between the 2MB flags, the game of playing two cards by the MAX bet operation is not started, and the winning of the bonus "2MB" being carried over can be more reliably avoided.

That is, in the present embodiment, in the state between the 2MB flags, the game of the number of medals that is disadvantageous to the player cannot be played by the MAX bet operation. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, even a player who has no knowledge of the game can play the game with peace of mind.

[Various effects obtained by drawing a lottery to shorten the cycle of normal games]
In the present embodiment, as a result of subtracting the number of remaining games of the normal game of the current set by the number of shortened games determined by the cycle shortening lottery performed during the normal game, the subtraction result is less than the predetermined number of games (10 games). In that case, the number of shortened games corresponding to the subtraction result is stocked. Then, the number of shortened games in stock is applied as the number of shortened games in the next set. In this case, from the start of the next set, the game is performed in a state where the game period in the non-AT state is shortened.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the normal game, it can be applied to the normal game of the next set without wasting the number of shortened games (privileges) surplus in the current set. It is possible to give the player an interest in the game. Further, in this case, since it is possible to generate a motivation for the player to execute the next set of normal games, it is possible to increase the operating rate of the game machine.

[Various effects obtained in pseudo BB games]
As described above, the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a pseudo BB game in which the payout of medals is increased, and when a pseudo BB lottery is won in a normal game or an AT game, the pseudo BB game is started as an interrupt process. To. Therefore, the normal game is not a game that simply digests the game, but a game in which more medals can be obtained by a pseudo BB game.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the pseudo BB game started during the normal game, even when the "loss" or the "rare role" is internally won, the cycle of the non-AT state game period (game period of the normal game). A shortened lottery will be held. Then, when the result of subtracting the number of remaining games of the normal game of the current set by the number of shortened games determined by the cycle shortening lottery at this time and the subtraction result is less than "0", the surplus corresponding to the subtraction result is obtained. The number of minutes shortened games is stocked. Then, the number of shortened games in stock is applied as the number of shortened games in the next set.

On the other hand, in the pseudo BB game started during the AT game, if the "loss" or "rare role" is internally won, an additional lottery for the number of AT games (directly added lottery) is performed, and the additional lottery is won. If so, the current number of remaining AT games will increase.

That is, in the pseudo BB game, the privilege given to the winning of the "loss" or "rare role" according to the type of the sub game state ("normal state" or "AT state") at the start of the pseudo BB game. The contents of can be different. Further, even in the pseudo BB game, it is possible to give a game value to "loss". Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest in the pseudo BB game.

Further, in the AT game in the state between the 2MB flags, not only the game of notifying the player of the small winning combination internally is performed, but also the pseudo BB game may be started, so that the state between the 2MB flags is in progress. It is possible to prevent the AT game from becoming a monotonous game.

[Various effects obtained in the game that determines the number of AT start games when "Kappa" wins]
In the AT start game number determination game when the "Kappa" wins in the present embodiment, as described above, the character "Kappa" eats the sushi material that is sequentially served for each game according to the type of the internal winning role, and the sushi material is eaten. The number of AT start games is determined according to the type of sushi material eaten. That is, in this game for determining the number of AT start games at the time of "Kawado" victory, the number of basic stay games in the AT state (the number of AT start games) is not determined by one lottery, but extends over a plurality of games. , It is determined based on the type of the internal winning combination and the sushi material (game information) displayed on the liquid crystal screen of the liquid crystal display device 11. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to enhance the interest of the player with respect to the acquisition game of the number of games in the AT state (the game of determining the number of AT start games).

Further, in the game for determining the number of AT start games when the "Kappa" wins in this embodiment, as described above, even if the internal winning role is "lost", the data (game information) of the sushi material from the next game onward is used. , May be converted to better data for the player. That is, in the present embodiment, it is possible to give a game value to the "loss" even in the AT start game number determination game, and it is possible to maintain the interest even when the "loss" is determined.

<Various deformation examples>
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and for example, the following various modifications can be considered.

[Modification 1]
In the pachislot machine 1 of the above embodiment, when a "loss" is won in a normal game or a pseudo BB game (one or consecutive wins), the game period (number of staying games) in the normal state is shortened (cycle shortening). There is a possibility that you can get the privilege. Further, in the pachislot machine 1 of the above embodiment, if a "loss" is won in the AT game, there is a possibility that the privilege of adding the number of AT games can be obtained.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even in games in a sub-game state other than the normal game, the pseudo BB game, and the AT game, a function of giving a privilege by winning a "loss" (one-time or continuous winning) is provided. You may. Therefore, in the first modification, a pachi-slot machine having a function of obtaining the privilege of winning the AT when a "loss" is won in the transition production game (race production) will be further described.

(1) During the race_Lottery table at the time of loss First, with reference to FIG. 149, the lottery table at the time of the loss during the race, which is necessary for executing the above-mentioned privilege (AT winning) granting function in the transition production game (race production), will be described. To do. FIG. 149 is a diagram showing the configuration of a lottery table at the time of loss during the race. In addition, the lottery table at the time of the race_loss is, for example, the winning / non-winning of the race victory in the lottery processing (S1118) during the race_loss at the time of the race_game start processing (see FIG. 150 described later) described later. It is referred to when determining the winning / non-winning of the AT game.

During the race_at the time of loss The lottery table defines the correspondence between the winning / non-winning of the race victory and the lottery value for each value ("1" to "4") of the loss counter. The loss counter is a counter that manages (counts) the number of consecutive wins of "loss" during the race production period (10 games).

Therefore, for example, when "loss" is won three times in a row during the race production, the value of the loss counter becomes "3". Then, in this case, the probability of winning the race is 6554/32768, and the probability of winning the race is 26214/32768 (the race victory flag is ON). If the value of the loss counter is "1" (at the time of the first "loss" win), the race win is always non-win (AT non-win).

(2) Process at the start of the race during the race Next, the process at the start of the race during the race in the first modification will be described with reference to FIG. 150. The process at the start of the race in this example is also performed in S419 in the flowchart (see FIG. 96) of the process at the time of receiving the start command of the above embodiment.

Further, in this example, the processing other than the processing at the start of the race_game by the sub-control circuit 101 is the same as that of the above embodiment. Therefore, here, only the process at the start of the race_game will be described.

As is clear from the comparison between the flowchart of the process at the start of the game in this example shown in FIG. 150 and the flowchart of the process at the start of the game of the above embodiment shown in FIG. 124, the process during the race of this example_ The processes from S110 to S1114 in the flow chart of the game start process are the same as the processes from S741 to S754 in the flow chart of the race-in-game start process of the above embodiment. Therefore, the description of the processes from S1101 to S1114 will be omitted here.

In this example, after the processing of S1114 or when S1112 is determined to be NO, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the result of the race result lottery is a non-winning race victory and the internal winning combination is "missing". (S1115).

When the sub CPU 102 determines in S1115 that the determination condition of S1115 is not satisfied (when the determination in S1115 is NO), the sub CPU 102 sets "0" in the loss counter (S1116). Then, after the processing of S1116, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S1121 described later.

On the other hand, in S1115, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the determination condition of S1115 is satisfied (when the determination in S1115 is YES), the sub CPU 102 adds "1" to the value of the loss counter (S1117). Next, the sub CPU 102 refers to the during-race_missing lottery table (see FIG. 149), and performs the during-race_missing lottery process based on the value of the loss counter after addition (S1118).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the result of the lottery process during the race is a non-winning race victory (S1119). In S1119, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the result of the lottery process during the race is a non-winning race victory (when the determination in S1119 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of S1121 described later.

On the other hand, in S1119, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the result of the lottery process during the race_loss is not a non-winning race victory (when the determination in S1119 is NO), the sub CPU 102 turns on the race victory flag. (S1120). Then, after the processing of S1120, the sub CPU 102 performs the processing of S1121 described later.

After processing S1116 or S1120, or when S1119 is determined to be YES, the sub CPU 102 refers to a push order navigation lottery table (not shown) and performs a push order navigation lottery process for a small winning combination related to the "push order bell" (S1121). ). Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the lottery result of this push order navigation lottery process to the "push order navigation number" (S1122). Then, after the processing of S1122, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the start of the race_game, and shifts the processing to S426 of the processing at the time of receiving the start command (see FIG. 96).

In the pachislot machine of the above-described modification 1, the same effect as that of the above-described embodiment can be obtained, and even in the transition effect state (during the race effect), it is possible to give a game value to "loss". It is possible to improve the interest in the transition production game. In the first modification, when the "loss" is internally won once (when the value of the loss counter is "1"), the non-winning of the race victory is always determined. The configuration is not limited to the above, and the winning of the race victory may be obtained with a predetermined probability even at the time of one winning of "loss".

[Modification 2]
In the second modification, as in the first modification, a pachislot machine having a function of obtaining the benefit of AT winning when a "loss" is won in the transition production game (race production) (when winning once or continuously). Will be described. However, in this example, the lottery form of the AT lottery performed at the time of "missing" is changed from the above-mentioned modification 1.

Specifically, in this example, not only the winning / non-winning of the race win, but also the race win rate MAP lottery table determined at the start of the set (cycle) of the normal game according to the value of the loss counter (see FIG. 35). The re-lottery of the race win rate using the above will also be selectable. Therefore, the configuration of the lottery table during the race used in this example is different from that of the above-mentioned modification 1.

Here, with reference to FIG. 151, the lottery table during the race_missing time in the second modification will be described. FIG. 151 is a diagram showing the configuration of a lottery table during the race of this example. In this example as well, the during-race_lost lottery table is referred to, for example, in the above-described modification 1 of FIG. 150 during the race_during the race during the game start processing_lost lottery processing (S1118). To.

In this example of the race, the lottery table at the time of loss shows the types of lottery results (win / non-win of race win and re-lottery of race win rate) for each value of the loss counter ("1" to "3"). Define the correspondence with the lottery value. In this example as well, the value of the loss counter indicates the number of consecutive wins of "loss" during the race production period (10 games).

In this example, as shown in FIG. 151, when the value of the loss counter is "1", as a result of the lottery, a non-winning race victory is always obtained. When the value of the loss counter is "2", as a result of the lottery, a re-lottery of the race winning percentage is always obtained. Then, when the value of the loss counter is "3", the winning of the race victory is always obtained as the lottery result.

In this example, when the value of the loss counter is "2" in the lottery process (S1118) during the race, during the race during the game start process, and during the loss process (S1118) shown in FIG. 150, the player wins the re-lottery. , The sub CPU 102 refers to the race win rate MAP lottery table determined at the start of the set in the process of S1118, and redraws the race win rate data based on the set value.

In this example, it is configured in the same manner as the above-described modification 1 except that the lottery form of the AT lottery performed at the time of “loss” winning is different from the above-mentioned modification 1. Therefore, the same effect as that of the first modification can be obtained in the second modification. In the second modification, when the "loss" is internally won once (when the value of the loss counter is "1"), the non-winning of the race victory is always determined. The configuration is such that at least one of the winning of the re-lottery of the race winning percentage and the winning of the race winning can be obtained with a predetermined probability even at the time of one winning of "missing".

[Modification 3]
In the above-mentioned modifications 1 and 2, the pachislot machine having the function of obtaining the privilege of AT winning when the "loss" is won in the transition production game (race production) (when winning once or continuously) has been described. , The present invention is not limited to this. In the transition production game, if a "loss" is won, another privilege may be given. For example, if a "loss" is won in a transition production game (one or consecutive wins), a pseudo BB game is won and stocked with a high probability over a predetermined number of games in an "additional challenge state" game. May be stocked.

In this case, the game in the "additional challenge state" stocked during the transition production game (race production) has a specific symbol combination ("yellow BAR"-"yellow BAR"-"yellow BAR") after the transition to the AT state. Stop is displayed on the valid line and started.

In the configuration of this example, the game after the transition to the AT state can be made more advantageous to the player, and the difference in game playability (advantage of the game) between the AT state and the other states is increased. Can be done. Therefore, in this example, the playability between the AT state and the other states can be sharpened, and the enjoyment of the game can be further improved.

[Modification example 4]
In the pachislot machine 1 of the above embodiment, when a "loss" is won in a normal game or a pseudo BB game (when the game is won once or continuously), the game period (number of staying games) in the normal state is shortened (cycle shortening). However, the present invention is not limited to this. In the case of winning a "loss" in a normal game or a pseudo BB game (when winning once or continuously), the cycle shortening lottery may not be performed.

In this case, the configuration of the cycle shortening lottery table and the pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery table used in this example is the cycle shortening lottery table (see FIGS. 44 and 45) and the pseudo BB cycle shortening lottery table (see FIG. 46) of the above embodiment. ), The column that specifies the lottery value for "loss" is deleted.

As in this example, by configuring the configuration so that no privilege is given when a "loss" is won in a normal game or a pseudo BB game, the playability between the AT state and the other states (advantage of the game). The difference can be increased. Therefore, in this example, the playability between the AT state and the other states can be sharpened, and the enjoyment of the game can be further improved.

[Modification 5]
In the above-described embodiment or the above-mentioned various modified examples of pachislot, a configuration in which a predetermined privilege is given at the time of winning a "loss" in a plurality of types of sub-game states has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of types of subs Only in one of the sub-game states of the game state, the privilege granting function at the time of winning the "loss" may be provided.

The configuration and operation of the gaming machine according to the present invention have been described above, including their effects. However, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments and modifications, and includes various other embodiments and modifications as long as it does not deviate from the gist of the present invention described in the claims. Further, in the above-described embodiment and modified example, the pachi-slot machine has been described as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention can be applied to a game machine called "pachinko". The effect of is obtained.
As in the above-mentioned prior art document (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2013-236911), conventionally, a gaming machine having a penalty function has been proposed. However, excessive penalties can be offensive to the player. In addition, with the diversification of playability in recent years, there may be situations where the conventional penalty function cannot handle the situation. Therefore, when such a problem occurs, it may damage the amusement store.
The present invention has been made to solve the above problems, and an object of the present invention is a penalty capable of suppressing an illegal acquisition of profits by a player and not causing discomfort to the player. It is to provide a gaming machine having a function.
According to the gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, for example, a penalty can be imposed according to the game playability, gaming state, gaming situation, etc. of the gaming machine, so that while suppressing the illegal acquisition of profits by the player, It is possible to prevent the player from being uncomfortable. The reason why this effect can be obtained is as described in detail in the description of the above-described embodiment.
Another object of the present invention is to provide a technique capable of advancing a game in a gaming machine having a function of displaying the status of the game without giving the player a feeling of extension of the game during the display operation. Is.
Then, according to the gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, the gaming can be advanced without giving the player a feeling of extension of the gaming during the display operation of the gaming status.

1 ... Pachislot (game machine), 2 ... Exterior, 2a ... Cabinet, 2b ... Front door, 3L ... Left reel, 3C ... Middle reel, 3R ... Right reel, 4 ... Reel display window, 11 ... LCD display device, 19L ... Left stop button, 19C ... Middle stop button, 19R ... Right stop button, 20 ... Medal slot, 21 ... MAX bet button, 23 ... Start lever, 25 ... Selection button, 51 ... Hopper device, 53 ... Power supply device, 55 … Main control board case, 57… Sub control board case, 71… Main control board, 72… Sub control board, 91… Main control circuit, 93… Main CPU, 101… Sub control circuit, 102… Sub CPU

Claims (2)

A display device that can display game information with images corresponding to the content of the production,
Production control means that can determine the production to be executed,
An image display control means that controls the image display operation of the display device based on the effect determined by the effect control means, and an image display control means.
As the game information displayed by the display device, a game information determining means capable of determining the first game information and
When a specific condition is satisfied, a change determining means capable of determining a change in the first game information displayed on the display device, and a change determining means.
When the change determining means determines to change the first game information, the game information changing means for changing the first game information to the second game information, and the game information changing means.
A change command information acquisition means capable of acquiring effect control data that may include a change command request for the game information associated with the time information of the effect sequence of the effect being executed during the effect execution.
When it is determined by the change determining means to change the first game information and the change command request is acquired by the change command information acquiring means, the image display control means is transmitted to the display device. It is possible to execute control to change the displayed image of the first game information to the image of the second game information and display it.
The degree of advantage suggested by the second game information is higher than the degree of advantage suggested by the first game information.
At the start of the display effect of the game information, both the first game information and the second game information can be displayed as the first game information, and the first game information is displayed as the first game information. A gaming machine characterized in that the ratio to be played is higher than the ratio at which the second game information is displayed as the first game information. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein a plurality of the gaming information can be displayed at the same time in the display effect of the gaming information.

Images